GE Fanuc Open Ladder Editing

GFZ-62884EN B-62884EN
GE Fanuc CNC
Open CNC Ladder Editing Package
Operators Manual
Presented By: CNC Center

For Product Needs Please Visit:
http://www.cnccenter.com/
OR Email:
sales@cnccenter.com
OR Call:
1-800-963-3513
GE Fanuc CNC Manuals
www.cnccenter.com
GE Fanuc Automation
Computer Numerical Control Products
Open CNC
Ladder Editing Package
Operator's Manual
GFZ-62884EN/01
September 1996
GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes

as Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory
with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.
Copyright 1996 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
Table of contents
B62884EN/01
1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1
OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2
THE MAJOR FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.3
The Overview of Ladder Editing Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Supported PMC Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sequence Program Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
7
8
ABOUT PMC PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
PMC Programming Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About Symbol & Comment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
12
om
1.3.1
1.3.2
2. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF PACKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
2.2
PACKAGE CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
2.3
Registering the Software in the Windows [Programs] Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the Software to Invoke from the DOS Command Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
22
2.4
DIRECTORY CONFIGURATION AFTER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
2.5
CONFIG.SYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26
2.6
ce
nt
e
2.3.1
2.3.2
r.c
2.1
FILE CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.1
2.6.2
28
File System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Constitution of Source Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28
29
3. OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
3.1
STARTING THE LADDER EDITING PACKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
3.2
OVERVIEW OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
3.2.1
33
COMMON SYSTEM OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
3.4
ONLINE FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
43
47
101
105
106
OFF-LINE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
115
3.5
37
Overview of the OnLine Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Examples of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.c
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
nc
Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Decompilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Program Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mnemonic Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting On-Line Function from Off-Line Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.5.5
3.5.6
3.5.7
3.5.8
3.5.9
3.5.10
115
115
174
195
202
209
220
224
235
236
4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

4.1
A : INITIAL MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.2
238
Fatal Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
238
239
B : TITLE EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
240
Table of contents
4.2.1
Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
240
C : I/O MODULE EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
241
4.3.1
4.3.2
241
241
D : SYSTEM PARAMETER EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
242
4.4.1
242
E : LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
243
243
243
244
246
F : SYMBOL & COMMENT EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
247
4.6.1
4.7
Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
247
G : MESSAGE EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
248
4.7.1
4.8
H : PRINTOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.1
4.8.2
4.8.3
4.9
249
249
250
I : COMPILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
251
Fatal Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
251
251
255
J : DECOMPILATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
256
4.10.1
4.10.2
4.10.3
4.11
Fatal Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
256
256
257
K : MNEMONIC CONVERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
258
4.11.1
4.11.2
4.11.3
4.12
Fatal Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
258
259
262
L : INPUT/OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
264
4.12.1
4.12.2
4.13
248
249
Fatal Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.1
4.9.2
4.9.3
4.10
Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
r.c
4.6
Fatal Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error (at Editing Ladder Diagram) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error (at Editing Step Sequence) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning (at Editing Ladder Diagram) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
om
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.5.4
ce
nt
e
4.5
Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
nc
4.4
Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
264
270
N : ONLINE MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
271
Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
271
4.13.1
.c
4.3
B62884EN/01
APPENDIX
A. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL PMC MODELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

A.1
SYSTEM PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Examples of Mnemonic Files (SingleFormat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
282
283
LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
284
A.1.1
A.1.2
A.2
282
B. AUTOMATIC COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

C. CHANGE OF EACH SETTING FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
C.1
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FILE %%% FLSET. CNF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ii
291
Table of contents
B62884EN/01
D. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

D.1
DIFFERENCES FROM FAPT LADDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
294
D.2
CONVERSION FROM FAPT LADDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
297
D.3
CONVERT THE PMC TYPE OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
298
D.3.1
D.3.2
D.3.3
D.4
Converting by System Parameter Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Conversion Using a Signal Address Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Data in a Sequence Program for Another Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
298
299
301
TRANSFER FROM PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
302
Function for Transferring Data between the PG and PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
302
om
D.4.1
E. STANDARD SYMBOL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

F. TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
r.c
G. CAUTIONS FOR USING THE O/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
ce
nt
e
H. DATA TRANSFER CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
.c
nc
I. INQUIRY FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
iii
1. GENERAL
B62884EN/01
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om

1. GENERAL
B62884EN/01
1.1
Thank you for purchasing Ladder Editing Package.
OVERVIEW
Ladder Editing Package is a programming system for developing

FANUC PMC sequence programs.
This software is designed to operate on the FANUC OPEN CNC and
supports both the Japanese and English languages. For details of the
operating conditions, see Chapter 2.
Personal
computer
Name
Specification
Remarks
om
FANUC OPEN CNC Ladder

Editing A08B-9201-J510 Japanese
and
Package
English are both
supported
r.c
The development of a sequence program on a personal computer,

operating independently of the FANUC OPEN CNC, requires the use of
the sequence program development software listed below. For details,
refer to the relevant manuals.
Name
Operators manual
FAPT LADDER Operators Manual (B66131E)
FAPT LADDERII
FAPT LADDERII Operators Manual (B66184EN)
ce
nt
e
FAPT LADDER
nc
This manual explains procedures required to install, activate, and operate

this software about that are specific to the system designed for use with
personal computers.
For PMC operations and how to create PMC sequence programs, refer to
the manuals listed below.
[FANUC PMC-MODEL PA1/PA3/RA1/RA2/RA3/RB/RB2/RB3/RB4
/RB5/RB6/RC/RC3/RC4/NB/NB2 Programming manual (LADDER
language) ] B-61863E
.c
Inquiry form
If you have any questions after reading this operators
manual and the manuals listed above, use the inquiry form
attached at Appendix I to consult us the questions.
1. GENERAL
B62884EN/01
The following abbreviations are used in this manual.

1) For PMC models
Abbreviations
2) Others
Name
r.c
Abbreviations
FANUC PMC-MODEL RA3

FANUC PMC-MODEL RB3
FANUC PMC-MODEL RB4
FANUC PMC-MODEL RB5
FANUC PMC-MODEL RB6
FANUC PMC-MODEL RC3
FANUC PMC-MODEL RC4
om
PMC-R Series
PMC-RA3
PMC-RB3
PMC-RB4
PMC-RB5
PMC-RB6
PMC-RC3
PMC-RC4
PMC Models
OPEN CNC
MMCIV
HSSB
FANUC OPEN CNC

FANUC MMCIV
High Speed Serial Bus
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
MS-DOS and PC-DOS are both referred to simply as DOS, unless it

is necessary to distinguish between the two operating systems.
1. GENERAL
B62884EN/01
1.2
THE MAJOR
FUNCTIONS
1.2.1
The Ladder Editing Package is a software package that enables the use of
the following PMC functions and sequence program development
functions on the OPEN CNC.
<Ladder Editing Package functions>
1) Sequence program input, display, editing, and output
2) Sequence program monitoring/debugging
Signal status monitoring
PMC status monitoring
Ladder monitoring/editing
Alarm display
Cross reference display
3) PMC parameter setting/display
4) Sequence program execution/termination
5) Writing to flash ROM
6) Sequence program printout
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
The Overview of
Ladder Editing
Package
1. GENERAL
B62884EN/01
1.2.1.1
Function Overview
OPEN CNC
Machine
CNC / PMC
Online functions
om
DI/ DO
Sequence program monitoring/debugging

Sequence program execution/termination
Sequence program transfer
r.c
PMC parameter setting/display
ce
nt
e
Floppy disk
Ladder editing
package
Keyboard
Input/editing
Drawing
Hard disk
.c
nc
Printer
1.2.1.2
OPEN CNC System

Configurations
Fig.1.2.1.1 Function Overview
A variety of OPEN CNC system configurations are described below.

1) System with a FANUC NC board, built into a commercially
available personal computer
[Overview]
FANUC NC board
Incorporated
Personal
computer
Fig.1.2.1.2(a)
Machine
1. GENERAL
B62884EN/01
[Program backup destination]

PMC program memory [hard disk] of the personal computer
2) System with a personal computer board (MMCIV), built into
the CNC
[Overview]
CNC with MMCIV
om
Machine
Fig.1.2.1.2(b)
ce
nt
e
r.c
[CRT/MDI operation]
When using this system with the CRT/MDI panel, assign those
keys that are not available on the CRT/MDI panel as described
below. For details, refer to the FANUC MMCIV Operators
Manual (B62494EN).
Key Correspondence
Full keyboard
Custom
Tab
System
Alt
Alter
nc
Ctrl
Can
Esc
HELP
.c
Back
Space
CRT/MDI
Note
The CRT/MDI keys cannot be used to start a system by
means of Japanese input. To enter comments in Japanese,
use the full keyboard.
PMC flash memory
3) System in which the CNC is connected to a commercially
available personal computer via the highspeed serial bus
1. GENERAL
B62884EN/01
[Overview]
CNC
Highspeed
serial bus
Personal
computer
Machine
om
Fig.1.2.1.2(c)
r.c

PMC flash memory
4) System in which the CNC is connected to a FANUC intelligent
terminal via the highspeed serial bus
[Overview]
Intelligent
terminal
CNC
ce
nt
e
Highspeed
serial bus
Machine
Fig.1.2.1.2(d)
nc
[CRT/MDI operation]
See Item 2) above.
PMC flash memory
.c
1.2.2
Supported PMC
Functions
1) Supported PMC models

The following PMC models are supported:
PMCRA3
PMCRB3
PMCRB4
PMCRB5
PMCRB6
PMCRC3
PMCRC4
2) Supported functions for each PMC model
Table 1.2.2 lists the supported functions for each PMC model. For
details of the functions, refer to the sections indicated in the
Reference section column.
1. GENERAL
B62884EN/01
Table 1.2.2 Functions Supported for Each PMC Model

PMC model
Function
Reference
section
RA3
RB3
RB4
RB4 (STEP RB5
SEQ)
RB6
RB6 (STEP RC3
SEQ)
RC4
RC4 (STEP
SEQ)
1.3
3.5.2
Online functions
3.4
Offline functions
3.5
PMC
Handy File
3.5.6
Memory card
Link function
Section A.2 in
Appendix A
: Usable
: Not usable
: May be usable (Whether the functions are supported varies with the series and editions of the PMC and CNC.
For details, refer to the PMC programming manual.)
1.2.3
.c
nc
Sequence Program
Creation
ce
nt
e
r.c
Input/
output
out
ut
device
om
Step sequence
program
1. GENERAL
B62884EN/01
Start control system development
Determine control targets (machine, CNC)
Determine interface specifications (DI/DO assignment)
om
Determine control operation specifications

(calculation of number of DI/DO points, control scale determination)
r.c
Create sequence program (design, address map determination, coding)
Sequence program input, editing, debugging, and printing
New?
NO
Offline functions
ce
nt
e
Online functions
YES
Ladder diagram editing Mnemonic
Ladder diagram monitoring/editing

Signal monitoring
NO
YES
NO
nc
Debugging
completed?
YES
Debugging
completed?
editing
NO
YES
Compile (link)
.c
Print?
NO
Decompile
Sequence program printing
End
End
In online mode, programming/monitoring can be performed during communication with the PMC. In
offline mode, programming is performed on the OPEN CNC without communication. Other PMC programming systems (for use with personal computers) are FAPT LADDER and FAPT LADDERII. For
details, refer to the following manuals:
FAPT LADDER Operators Manual (B66131E)
FAPT LADDERII Operators Manual (B66184EN)
Fig.1.2.3 Sequence Program Creation
1. GENERAL
B62884EN/01
1.3
ABOUT PMC
PROGRAM
1.3.1
om
PMC Programming
Method
The ladder method is most of ten used for programming the sequence
control governed by a PMC. This method was derived from relay-panel
control circuits. Since it has been in use for years, many sequence
engineers are already familiar with it.
The greater the number of functions implemented by the PMC, the larger
and the more complicated the sequence program becomes. And it is hard
to describe such program for ladder method.
To overcome this problem, step sequence method programming has been
introduced.
ce
nt
e
r.c
(1) What is the step sequence method ?

The step sequence is one of the method for programming a sequence
control governed by a programmable controller, this method features
the direct representation of the control flow on a flow chart. Each
block of processing is described as a subprogram, using the ladder
method. Therefore it provides an easy-to-understand visualized flow
of the processes and is well-suited to the control of entire process.
See 1.2.2 Supported PMC Functions for the machines are able to use the
step sequence.
For the details of the step sequence method, refer to the following manual.
[3.5.2.2.(3) STEP SEQUENCE EDITING]
.c
nc
(2) The configuration of a sequence program

A sequence program consists of the following 5
kinds of program unit ;
The 1st level of ladder
The 2nd level of ladder
The 3rd level of ladder
Subprograms of ladder
Subprograms of step sequence
10
1. GENERAL
B62884EN/01
LEVEL 1 ( LADDER)
LEVEL 2 ( LADDER)
LEVEL 3 ( LADDER)
Sub Program P2 (LADDER)
r.c
Sub Program P3 (LADDER)
om
Sub Program P1 (Step Sequence)
Sub Program Pn (Step Sequence)
Source program
Ladder 1st level
Mnemonic
Mnemonic program
conversion
A mnemonic program without
nc
Ladder 2nd level
ce
nt
e
(3) Data flow
Ladder 3rd level
Subprogram P1
.c
Subprogram P2
Compilation/Decompilation
Object code
Memory card format file
CNC
11
step sequence
1. GENERAL
B62884EN/01
1.3.2
You can assign names or add notes to I/O signals, internal relays, and can
add notes to a sequence program.
They are generally called symbol & comment data.
About Symbol &

Comment Data
(1) The definition of terms

The definition of terms are shown below to distinguish between some
symbol & comment data.
Definition and uses
Symbol
Name
assigned
uniquely to each
relay/coil,
to be used in place of
PMC address.
to
to
X0.0
INPUT
X0.0
Y0.0
r.c
Relay comment Text assigned

relays/coils
explain them.
Display
om
Terms
RELAY X
COMMENT
Text assigned to coils

to explain them.
Y0.0
ce
nt
e
Coil comment
Net comment
Text
assigned
between ladder nets
to explain them.
COIL Y
COMMENT
HERE IS COIL
COMMENT
(* HERE IS NET *)
(* COMMENT
*)
(2) Symbol & comment specification list

(a) For input signal and internal relay
Symbol
Relay comment
Coil comment
ASCII characters
(lower-case
alphabetic
characters not
allowed)
ASCII characters
Japanese
kana/kanji
characters
ASCII characters
Japanese
kana/kanji
characters
Maximum cha.
16 byte
16 byte
30 byte
Maximum
number
20,000 entries
(Note)
20,000
Duplicated
definition
Not allowed
Allowerd
nc
Specification
.c
Available
characters
20,000
(Note)
(Note)
Allowerd
Note
Free area size of hard disk drive, EMS and XMS on personal
computer may restrict them.
12
1. GENERAL
B62884EN/01
(b) For ladder sequence program

Net comment
Available characters
ASCII characters
Japanese kana/kanji characters
Line feed
Steps to occupy
2 step/Net comment
Maximum characters/line
64 characters/line
4095 characters/Net comment
(Note 1)
Maximum lines
100 lines/Net commennt
(Note 1)
Maximum number
About 20,000 Net comments
(Note 2)
Notes
om
Specification
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
1. The limitation which is reached first becomes the limitation for the
Net comment.
2. Number of characters in each Net comment effects on maximum
number of Net comments. Free area size of hard disk drive, EMS
and XMS on personal computer may further restrict them.
13
2. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF

PACKAGE
CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF PACKAGE
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
B62884EN/01
14

PACKAGE
B62884EN/01
2.1
To use this software, configurations of hardware and software are required

as follows.
FUNUC OPEN CNC
CPU
386SX or higher
OS
Microsoft Windows 95
(Note 1)
DOS Version 5.0/V or later (to activate Japanese/
English system)
DOS Version 5.0 or later (to activate English system)
Device driver
Extended Drivers and Librarys.

(For DOS : A02B0207K706
For Windows : A02B0207K726)
Drivers and Librarys
(For DOS : A02B0207K707
For Windows : A02B0207K727)
om
Computer
(Note 2)
FANUC OPEN CNC Additional option

EXTENDED DRIVERS AND LIBRARIES
FUNCTION (A02B0207J800)
Ladder Editing Package Function
(A02B0207J820)
Memory
Conventional memory 520 Kbytes or more (Note 3)

EMS and/or XMS of 4 Mbytes or more (recommended)
(Note 4)
r.c
CNC function
ce
nt
e
OPERATING
ENVIRONMENT
Hard disk
5 Mbytes or more space
Graphic adapter
VGA or higher
Printer
EPSON VP1000 and compatible printers
(Note 5)
(Note6)
Japanese language Input system in conormity with MS-KANJI API

input system
.c
nc
Notes
1 When using this saftware under Windows95, Please install
the software by the installation procedure described in
[2.3.1 Registering the software in the Windows [Programs]
menu. ]
2 A device driver tailored to the OPEN CNC system
configuration must be incorporated.
3 Even if the machine has 640 Kbytes memory, the free
memory may be less than 520 Kbytes when an installed
driver, for example, uses a large memory space.
The size of free space in memory can be checked with the
DOS command CHKDSK.
4 The quantity of EMS and XMS memory effects on the
performance to handle Symbol data and Net comment.
Please prepare enough EMS and XMS memory specically
for Symbol data or Net comment of large number.
Moreover, at the system with EMS less than 256 Kbytes, the
maximum number of steps which this software can handle
may be restricted.
Please prepare 256 Kbytes or more EMS if possible.
5 In addition, an space for storing sequence data is required.
6 [NEC PR201H]and[FANUC PRINTER]are also available by
changing system file.
For details, refer to[3.5.3.6 Changing the Printer].
15

PACKAGE
B62884EN/01
About size of Expansion memory to be used :

Expansion memory are used for ladder and symbol & comment data as
an temporary area. Although, Ladder Editing Package runs with no EMS
& XMS, enough size of EMS and/or XMS memory according to the
source program to handle will be necessary for better performance.
om
(1) Expansion memory

When reading ladder programs, Ladder Editing Package uses EMS
if available. If EMS is not available, Ladder Editing Package uses
conventional memory. When only conventional memory is used, up
to 21840 program steps can be created. When 256KB EMS memory
is available, however, up to 32000 program steps can be created. The
size of EMS is 256KB for all PMC models, regardless of the size of
the program to be edited.
ce
nt
e
r.c
(2) Expanded memory for Symbol & Comment data

FAPT LADDER uses EMS and/or XMS memory for Symbol &
Comment data if available.
When neither of them are available, Ladder Editing Package will
make temporary file on the hard diskdrive, and processing large
number of Symbol & Comment data may be slower.
About 200 Kbytes of EMS & XMS memory are used for every 1,000
Symbol data.
.c
nc
(3) Expanded memory for Net comment

Ladder Editing Package also uses EMS and/or XMS memory, or
temporary file as same as Symbol & Comment data. If neither EMS
nor XMS is prepared, use hard disk.
About 200 to 300 Kbytes of EMS or XMS memory are used for every
1,000 Net coment.
16

PACKAGE
B62884EN/01
2.2
PACKAGE
CONFIGURATION
The Ladder Editing Package is distributed on the five system disks listed
below. These disks are of 3.5inch, 2HD type (1.44MB). Check that none
of the system disks is missing.
(1) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.1)/A08B9201J510#ZZ071
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
17

PACKAGE
2.3
B62884EN/01
There are two different installaction procedures to install the software.

One is to register the software in the Windows [Programs] menu.The
other is to invoke this software from the DOS command prompt.
2.3.1
Registering the
Software in the
Windows [Programs]
Menu
The following describes the installation of this software from floppy disk
drive A to hard disk drive C.
(1) Insert Vol. 1 into drive A.
(2) Click the [Start] button, then click the [Run] dialog box.
(3) Enter A:SETUP in the [Open] box of the [Run] dialog box.
om
INSTALLATION
Run
[ ? ] []
A: SETUP
ce
nt
e
Open :
r.c
Type the name of a program, folder, or document, and Windows will open
it for you.
Ok
Cancel
Browse . . .
(4) The message below appears, and the setup program is started.
.c
nc
SETUP
18
Initializing Setup...

PACKAGE
B62884EN/01
(5) Specify the hard disk drive to which the software is to be installed
(Note).
Ladder Editing Package setup

Welcome to Ladder Editing Package.
Install to :
om
Setup will place system files into the following drive.

If you want to install these files in a different disk drive,
select the install disk drive.
[] c:[C_DRIVE]
Exit Setup
r.c
Continue
ce
nt
e
(6) Specify the OPEN CNC interface type. If the OPEN CNC has already
been installed in the personal computer, the installer automatically
identifies the interface type, and the dialog box shown below appears.
If the detected interface type matches that of the Ladder Editing
Package to be installed, click [Ok].
.c
nc
Interface Type 2 is detected.

Ladder Editing Package for Type 2 will be installed.
Ok
Cancel
If the OPEN CNC has not yet been installed in the personal computer,
the dialog box shown below appears. Select the interface type of the
OPEN CNC to be installed.
Interface driver is not detected.

Whitch type Interface driver are you want to use ?
Interface Type
F Interface Type 1
f Interface Type 2
Ok
19
Cancel

PACKAGE
B62884EN/01
(7) Select the language of the messages to be installed. The size of the
files to be installed and the amount of free space available on the hard
disk to which the software will be installed are displayed. If there is
sufficient free space for the installation, click [Ok].
Select language of message to be installed.
Disk information
Ok
7808K
128000K
Cancel
ce
nt
e
Available space:
r.c
Required space:
C:
om
Install Language
F English only
f Japanese only
f English and Japanese
(8) Select a display color type according to the display unit to be used.
After selecting a display color type, click [Test] to check the display
appearance. If the colors are displayed correctly, click [Ok].
nc
Color type
F COLOR
f MONO 1
f MONO 2
.c
Select color type.
Ok
20
Test
Cancel

PACKAGE
B62884EN/01
(9) The dialog box shown below appears during installation. Insert the
requested floppy disk, then click [Ok].
Please insert the following disk (or type the new directory),
and then press <Enter>.
A:
Cancel
r.c
Ok
Floppy
disk
to be inserted
om
Disk 2(Ladder Editing Package Vol.2)
ce
nt
e
(10)Upon the completion of installation, the Ladder Editing Package is

registered in the [Programs] menu.
.c
nc
Note
The configuration of the directory in which the Ladder
Editing Package has been installed cannot be modified.
21

PACKAGE
2.3.2
Installing the Software
to Invoke from the DOS
Command Prompt
B62884EN/01
The following describes the installation of the Ladder Editing Package

from floppy disk drive A to hard disk drive C.
(1) Insert Vol. 1 into drive A.
(2) Enter A:INSTALL at the DOS command prompt.
> A : INSTALL
om
(3) The installer is started, and the title screen appears. Select [Continue].
r.c
(4) Enter the hard disk drive to which the software is to be installed
(Note).
Enter disk drive name to install the

Ladder Editing Package:
ce
nt
e
Install to
Ok
Quit
Fig.2.3.2(a)
Interface Type 1 is detected.

Ladder Editing Package for Type 1 will be installed.
Ok
.c
nc
(5) Specify an OPEN CNC interface type. If the OPEN CNC is already
installed in the personal computer, the interface type is automatically
identified by the installer, and the dialog box shown below appears.
After checking that the interface type detected by the installer is
correct, select [Ok].
Quit
Fig.2.3.2(b)
If the OPEN CNC is not installed in the personal computer yet, the
dialog box shown below appears. Select the interface type
corresponding to the OPEN CNC to be installed.
22

PACKAGE
B62884EN/01
The Interface driver has not been detected.

Which Interface driver will be used?
F Interface Type 1
f Interface Type 2
Fig.2.3.2(c)
Quit
om
Ok
r.c
(6) Select an installation message language.
ce
nt
e
Select language of message to be installed.
English and Japanese
Japanese only
.c
nc
English only
Fig.2.3.2(d)
(7) To set the display color, the dialog box shown below appears. The
dialog box color can be changed by selecting an appropriate display
color option with the
and
keys. Select a color option that
is appropriate for the display unit.
Select color type.
F COLOR
f MONO1
f MONO2
Ok
Fig.2.3.2(e)
23
Quit

PACKAGE
B62884EN/01
(8) The selected options are displayed. After checking that the desired
options are selected, select [Yes]. The installation is started.
Install drive
Interface
Language
: C: FANUCLEP
: Type 1
: English only
om
Are you sure to start installation?
No
r.c
Yes
ce
nt
e
(9) When the installation terminates normally, the message shown below
appears.
Installation is done.
Exit
nc
Fig.2.3.2(f)
.c
Note
The configuration of the installation destination directory
cannot be modified.
24

PACKAGE
B62884EN/01
C:FANUC
LEP
: Ladder Editing Package system

JPN : Japanese message data for the Ladder Editing
Package system
ENG : English message data for the Ladder Editing
Package system
om
DIRECTORY
CONFIGURATION
AFTER
INSTALLATION
The Ladder Editing Package is installed by the installer under the

directory configuration indicated below. The user can freely select the
hard disk drive to which installation is to be performed, but cannot modify
the directory name.
: OPEN CNC system (separate system)

: Basic operation package (separate system)
CNC
BOP
(1) Message file directory
r.c
2.4
ce
nt
e
According to the message language selection made at installation, the

installer creates the subdirectories listed below to enable the installation of
the message files.
a. When the Japanese message option was selected

C:FANUCLEP
JPN : Japanese message data for the Ladder
Editing Package
c. When the Japanese and English message option was selected

C:FANUCLEP
JPN : Japanese message data for the Ladder
Editing Package
ENG: English message data for the Ladder
Editing Package
(2) Work directory

As a work directory, the following subdirectory is created automatically.
A program used online is stored under this directory, and can be edited
offline.
C:FANUCLEP
PMC0000 : Work directory
.c
nc
b. When the English message option was selected

C:FANUCLEP
ENG: English message data for the Ladder
Editing Package
25

PACKAGE
2.5
B62884EN/01
To use the system, make the following modifications to the

CONFIG.SYS file.
CONFIG.SYS
r.c
om
(1) When the system is used under Windows 95 (when Windows 95 is

installed in C:WINDOWS)
DEVICE=WINDOWSANSI.SYS
DEVICE=WINDOWSEMM386.EXE
When the system is used under Windows 95, the Japanese input
system is not specified in the CONFIG.SYS file. The specification
method depends on the Japanese input system being used. When
using the system from the MSDOS prompt, both the Japanese input
system registered in Windows and that of the DOS version can be
used. In MSDOS mode, only the DOSversion Japanese input
system can be used. Additions or modifications to the settings of the
Windows Japanese input system can be made by modifying the
Language item of Keyboard Properties, after doubleclicking the
Keyboard icon on the Control Panel. The DOS version Japanese
input system can be installed by using the ADDDRV command. For
details of the installation method, see DOSIME.BAT under the
COMMAND directory of Windows and DOSIME.SYS under the
root directory of the startup disk.
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
(2) When the system is used under DOS (In the following example, DOS
is already installed in C:DOS.)
DEVICE=C:DOSANSI.SYS
DEVICE=C:DOSEMM386.EXE
DEVICE=C:DOSMSIME.SYS
DEVICE=C:DOSMSIMEK.SYS
(a) ANSI.SYS (required)
The display mode and attributes of the display unit are set. This
setting cannot be omitted.
(b) EMM386.EXE
This device driver enables the use of expansion memory as EMS
memory. When using another EMS driver, refer to the relevant
manual for details of the setting required in CONFIG.SYS.
(c) MSIME.SYS/MSIMEK.SYS
This device driver enables the use of MSKANJI API for
Japaneselanguage input. When using another Japanese
language input system, refer to the relevant manual for details of
the setting required in CONFIG.SYS.
26

PACKAGE
B62884EN/01
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
Notes
1 All of the above device drivers are provided as standard with
Windows 95/MSDOS. The specification of switches and
parameters may be required for the above settings. For
details, refer to the windows 95/the MSDOS online help
or the relevant manual.
2 When using a memory card, refer to the manual provided
with the memory card for details of the setting required in
CONFIG.SYS.
3 Some device drivers may adversely affect the Ladder
Editing Package. If a problem is anticipated, specify only
ANSI.SYS in CONFIG.SYS. Omit the specification of the
other device drivers. When only ANSI.SYS is specified,
Ladder Editing Package will support only English, but allows
any contention with other device drivers to be identified
quickly. Recognized conflicts are listed in Appendix G.
27

PACKAGE
B62884EN/01
2.6
FILE
CONFIGURATION
The files constituting system are described below.
File System
(1) Customizable files

Some functions can be customized by the user. These functions
include setting of the format for printing created ladder programs, and
communication port setting based on the RS-232C standard.
For these functions, the associated data is held in text-format files,
which can be directly edited by the user. These files are listed below.
(a) Printing (For details, see Section 3.5.3.5.)
AMROFTRP.DAT
CROSSINF.DAT
*.INF
(b) Communications (For details, see Section 3.5.6.1.)
FLIO_AT.DAT
(c) Compile/decompile (For details, see Section 3.5.7.3.)
OPTION.CNF
(d) Entire system
FLMNE.DAT (For details, see Section 3.5.8.7.)
FLVIEW.DAT (For details, see Section 3.5.9.)
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
2.6.1
.c
nc
(2) Other files

(a) README.TXT/READMEJ.TXT
These text files contain important information that became
available after the manual was printed.
Use this information in combination with the manual. Note that
READMEJ.TXT contains Japanese text, while README.TXT
contains English text.
(b) *.JPN/*.ENG
A file having either of the above extensions contains most of the
messages (menus, displayed instructions, and error indications)
to be displayed or printed by the system. The location of such a
file is described in Section 2.4.
(c) FLMNE.ERR
The results (including errors) of mnemonic conversion are
written into this text file.
(d) *.EXE
A file having this extension is an executable file. Such files are
not handled by the user.
(3) Files that are not installed
The files under subdirectory APPENDIX on Volume 5 are not
installed by the installer. These files are listed below.
(a) Printing (For details, see Section 3.5.3.6.)
AMROFTRP.ESC
AMROFTRP.PR
(b) Standard symbols (For details, see Appendix E.)
F16&18-M. SYM
F16&18-T. SYM
PM-D.SYM
PM-H.SYM
FS0M-CNV. SYM
FS0T-CNV. SYM
PM-C_CNV. SYM
28

PACKAGE
B62884EN/01
(c) Message conversion tools (For details, see Appendix F.)

_CHGMES.EXE
2.6.2
The Constitution of
Source Program
A sequence program, which is object of editing and printing, is called

source program and managed by storing in files below.
J in case of named C:DATASAMPLE as source program
SAMPLE
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
Source program managing file

System parameter data file
Title data file
Symbol & Comment data file
(Note 2)
Message data file
I/O module data file
1st level ladder data file
2nd level ladder data file
3rd level ladder data file
(Note 3)
Sub-program ladder data file
(Note 4)
Sub-program step sequence data file(Note 4)
Net comment data file
(Note 2)
Memory card format data file
nc
ce
nt
e
CONTROL
SYSPARAM
TITLE
XSYMBOL.xxx
MESSAGE
IOMODULE
LEVEL1. #LA
LEVEL2. #LA
LEVEL3. #LA
Pyyy. #LA
Pzzz. #SS
NETCMT.xxx
MCARD
execution result file

map file
r.c
data
SAMPLE.ERR
SAMPLE.MAP
om
C:
Notes
.c
1. Contain source program compile/decompile results and map

information. These files are not included in a source program, but
are named in accordance with the name of the source program.
These files are stored under the directory one level above the
source program storage directory.
2. xxx is number of multi file managing.
3. Only for using LEVEL-3 ladder.
4. yyy, zzz is number of sub-program.
29
3. OPERATION
OPERATION
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
B62884EN/01
30
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.1
STARTING THE
LADDER EDITING
PACKAGE
1 Starting the Ladder Editing Package from the DOS command line
(1) Move to the drive and directory where the system software of the
Ladder Editing Package is installed.
(2) Key in FLADDER
Enter
A : >C :
Enter
C : >CD FANUCLEP
Enter
Enter
r.c
C : FANUCLEP>FLADDER
om
Example:Starting the Ladder Editing Package when the package

is installed under the FANUCLEP directory of drive
C.
ce
nt
e
(3) The online functions are activated as soon as the Ladder Editing
Package is started.
DOS prompt
Start (command name FLADDER)
Online functions
Offline functions
End
nc
End
.c
Note
If Interface Type 1 is selected at installation, the Ladder
Editing Package will not operate normally if the package is
started from the Windows DOS prompt. If Interface Type
1 is selected at installation, first terminate Windows, then
start the Ladder Editing Package from the DOS command
line.
2 Starting the Ladder Editing Package from Windows

(1) To start the system software of the Ladder Editing Package when
the package is installed under Windows, doubleclick the
corresponding icon. Once the Ladder Editing Package has been
started, the online functions are activated.
31
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(Reference)
OPEN CNC, DOS/Windows, Ladder Editing Package,
extended driver/library
r.c
Incorporate device driver (Modification

of CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT)
om
Install DOS/Windows
ce
nt
e
Install extended driver/library disk or driver library disk installation,

and incorporate driver
Install Ladder Editing Package
Start Ladder Editing Package
nc
Operate Ladder Editing Package
NO
.c
End?
YES
Termination of Ladder Editing Package
Fig.3.1 Flow of Operations Required to Start the Ladder Editing Package
3 Terminating the Ladder Editing Package

The Ladder Editing Package can be terminated in either of the
following two ways.
(1) Select [Exit] from the pulldown menu for [1.File] of the online
functions.
See Section 3.4 for an explanation of online function menu
selection.
(2) Select [Exit] from the offline function menu.
See Section 3.5 for an explanation of offline function menu
selection.
32
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.2
OVERVIEW OF
OPERATION
3.2.1
The menu screens displayed by the system are structured as shown below.
Start
1
Save PMC parameter
Restore PMC parameter
File
r.c
Online function
Offline function
Ladder monitoring/Online editing

Signal trigger/Ladder debug
Signal status
Timer
Counter
PMC parameter
Keep relay
PMC alarm status
Data table control
PMC status
Data table
RUN/STOP the program
Signal Trace
Signal Analysis
System information
Diagnose
nc
I/O
Communication
Load program
Store program
Backup program
Communication
Fig.3.2.1(a) Menu Structure (1)
.c
(1) See Fig. 3.2.1(b)
ce
nt
e
MSDOS
Exit
om
Menu Structure
33
3. OPERATION
F1
Title
EDIT
F2
Title
PRINT
F3
COMPILE
F4
DECOMPILE
F5
I/O
F6
F8
F9
MNEMONIC EDIT
UTILITY
ONLINE
FUNCTION
Source program mnemonic file

Mnemonic file source program
Execute user batch files
Dos
Floadat
View result
Linker
END
nc
F10
Parameter
Symbol
Ladder diagram
Step sequence
I/O module
Message
Cross reference list
Bit address map
FA writer
PMC writer
PMC
Handy File
Memory card
Backup
ROM format file
ce
nt
e
PROGRAM
OPTION SETUP
F7
Ladder diagram/
Step sequence
Symbol & comment
Message
I/O module
System parameter
om
Offline function
r.c
(1)
B62884EN/01
.c
Fig.3.2.1(b) Menu Structure (2)
34
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.3
The operations described below are common operations.
COMMON SYSTEM
OPERATIONS
(1) Function keys

When the menu items shown below are displayed in reverse video,
the user can select the desired menu item by pressing the
corresponding function key.
1 EDIT
2 PRINT
[F1]
3 COMPIL 4 DECOMP 5
[F2]
[F3]
[F4]
I/O
6 SETUP 7 MNEEDT 8 UTILTY
[F5]
[F6]
[F7]
9 ONLINE 10 END
[F8]
[F9]
[F10]
The escape key
Esc
om
(2) Escape key

has the same effect as selecting [END] with the
function key. The escape key terminates the current screen then
returns the display to the previous screen in the menu hierarchy.
(3) Cursor keys
,
, and
are used to move the
r.c
The cursor keys
cursor to select input items.

When two or more cursors can be used on a single screen, the second
Shift
key together
ce
nt
e
or subsequent cursor can be moved by pressing the

with the
or
key.
(4) Scroll keys
The scroll keys
Page
Down
and
Page
Up
display the next page and the previous
page, respectively.
(5) [INS] key

This key switches between the overwrite mode <O> and insert mode
<I>.
nc
(6) [TAB] key
When multipul keys are displayed, press
Tab
key and select one
button.
.c
(7) Status line

A status line is displayed at the top of the screen.
PMCRB3
Main menu
Item name
PMC Model
<O>
[C : FLADDER
Current
directory name
Edit mode (Overwrite/insert)
Note
The indications on the key tops may slightly vary from the
descriptions of this manual, depending on the personal
computer used.
(8) Popup menu
When the following popup menu appears, the desired process can
be selected using any of the three methods described below.
35
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
The file already exists.

F1
F2
F3
Update
Quit
Append
1) Cursor movement
or
To select an item, press the cursor key
, such that
the item to be selected is displayed in reverse video. Then,

Enter
key selects that item.
om
pressing the
r.c
2) Function key
A function key is indicated at the left of each item. To select an
item, press the corresponding function key.
3) Command name
An uppercase letter in (usually, the initial of) an item name is the
command name. In the above case, pressing the letter key U ,
Q , or A can select the Update, Quit, or Append command,
ce
nt
e
respectively.
(9) Pulldown menus

On some screens, the following menu bar is displayed along the top
of the screen
2. Diagnose
nc
I1. File
.c
Pressing the
Alt
3. I/O
4. Communication
Function number.
function name Icon for
PMC status indication
(See the section explaning how to start the on
line functions.)
key displays the pulldown menu for I1. File
The pulldown menu for a function can also be displayed by pressing

the
Alt
I1. File
key and the corresponding function number simultaneously.

2. Diagnose
3. I/O
4. Communication
File save
Exit
Using the cursor keys, position the highlight to the desired item on
a functions pulldown menu. A menu item with an arrow mark ( )
at its right edge has its own pulldown menu, which can be displayed
by pressing the
key.
The target screen is displayed by pressing the

positioning the highlight to a desired menu item.
36
Enter
key after
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.4
ONLINE FUNCTIONS
3.4.1
Overview of the
OnLine Functions
3.4.1.1
om
The online functions are used to perform ladder and signal status
monitoring, display, and modification on the OPEN CNC screen.
[Menu structure]
Outline
r.c
(1) [1.File] menu

With this menu, the user can write to and read from a file on hard disk
or floppy disk, switch between functions, and terminate processing.
(2) [2.Diagnose] menu
With this menu, the user can display the PMC status and perform
editing for PMC status display.
ce
nt
e
(3) [3.I/O] menu

With this menu, the user can write programs to and read programs
from the PMC.
(4) [4.Communication] menu
With this menu, the user can establish communications for PMC
status display and PMC operation.
1) Starting the Ladder Editing Package
PMC
nc
2) Loading programs from the PMC (automatic)

[When programs have already been loaded]
A comparison is automatically made between the PMC programs

and those which have already been loaded.
.c
<When a mismatch is found>
Sequence program
(RAM)
Program load operation
Program store operation
4)
Continuation or end
3)
3) Ladder monitoring
4) Online functions
Sequence program
(RAM)
3)
4)
Diagnosis
I/O (Program load/store, writing to

FROM)
Communication (with the PMC)
Offline function selection
File
Relay comment
Net comment
Fig.3.4.1.1 Overview of OnLine Functions
37
Power ON
Sequence program
(FROM)
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.4.1.2
Starting the OnLine
Functions
The use of the online functions is automatically enabled when the system
is started. Alternatively, the use of the online functions can be selected
in offline mode. For an explanation of online function selection in
offline mode, see Section 3.5.
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
(1) Moving to the ladder monitoring screen

To move from an online function to the ladder monitoring screen,
follow the procedure given below. On the ladder monitoring screen,
select the desired function from the pulldown menu or press the
corresponding function key.
[Moving to the ladder monitoring screen]
Reference section
1) Starting the system/online function selection
2) Work program compilation/decompilation See Appendix B.
(started only when required)
See Section 3.4.5.

3) Communication with the PMC
(automatic)
4) Monitoring method selection

(started only when required)
See Section 3.4.4.1.
Program load operation
See Section 3.4.4.2.
Program store operation
5) Ladder monitoring
Subprogram screen display (automatic)
See Section
3.4.3.1.
Subprogram selection
Ladder monitor screen display

Each screen is explained below. For details, see the related section.
(a) Work program compilation
If a source program that was edited offline has not yet been
compiled, the following message appears.
Source program has updated. Compile it ? (Y/N)
If an online function is to be used for an edited program, enter

Y. For details, see Appendix B.
(b) Work program decompilation
If a source program that was acquired with the offline I/O
function has not yet been decompiled, the following message is
displayed.
Memory card format file has been updated. Decompile it ? (Y/N)
If an online function is to be used for a program acquired with

the I/O function, enter Y. For details, see Appendix B.
38
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(c) Communication with the PMC

Selecting ONLINE FUNCTION causes the online monitor
screen (SET COMMUNICATION dialog box) to appear as
shown below.
Communication with the PMC starts
automatically.
1. File
2. Diagnose
3. I/O
4. Communication
Status
om
Communication
Start
Cancel
r.c
Try to connect with PMC ... 0000 0000
ce
nt
e
F7
F8
F9
F10
Splist Search Symbol Setting
Fig.3.4.1.2 (a)
.c
nc
(d) Selecting a monitoring method

When communication with the PMC starts normally, the
program is compared with that held on the PMC. If the programs
do not match, the dialog box shown below appears.
Select a desired function.
[LOAD]
: A program is loaded from PMC memory
and the program is overwritten.
[STORE]
: The program is stored to the PMC. The
program replaces the program already on
the PMC.
[CONTINUE] : The ladder monitor screen appears, but the
program already on the PMC is not
replaced. Note that ladder monitor
display is not performed correctly.
[END]
: The online function terminates.
39
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
N : E3160
Selected program is not same.
Load from PMC program memory.
Store
Store to PMC program memory.
Disregard
Qiut
Disregard difference.
om
Load
r.c
Quit On Line function.
ce
nt
e
Fig.3.4.1.2 (b)
.c
nc
Note
If the program does not match the program on the PMC the
dialog box shown above appears. This occurs, for example,
when a single program is modified by means of offline
editing.
When the online monitor function is started for a program
that is loaded or stored, the dialog box does not appear.
Instead, the subprogram selection screen appears
immediately.
(e) Loading from the PMC
After communication with the PMC starts normally, the SET
COMMUNICATION dialog box closes automatically and the
LOAD FROM PMC dialog box is opened in its place.
Load Program
Transfer data type
F LADDER
f ALL
100%
0%
Exec
Abort
Fig.3.4.1.2 (c)
40
Cancel
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(f) Displaying the SUBPROGRAM dialog box (Ladder monitor

function)
Once a program is loaded from the PMC, the SUBPROGRAM
dialog box for the ladder monitor function appears. Specify the
subprogram to be monitored in the dialog box as described
below:
om
Note
The online monitoring function of a step sequence
program is not supported.
[Operation]
1) Position the cursor to the desired subprogram by pressing the
2) Press the
key.
Enter
r.c
or
key.
3) The ladder diagram for the selected subprogram appears.
ce
nt
e
Subprogram list
LEVEL 1
LEVEL2
P00001 (OPEN RIGHT DOOR) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMITSWIITR1

P00002 (OPEN LEFT DOOR)
S P00010 (GRIP WORK PIECE)

P00011 (PUT WORK PIECE)
MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMITSWIITL1

PICK UP A WORK ON THE STAND
PUT DOWN A WORK
P00021 (CLOSE RIGHT DOOR) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMITSWTHR2

MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMITSWTH L2
Ok
Cancel
Fig.3.4.1.2 (d)
(2) Displaying the PMC status (icon)

The online function indicates the current PMC statuses, using icons
at the right end of the status line.
(a) Display positions and types of icons
.c
nc
P00022 (CLOSE LEFT DOOR)
Displayed position
of icon
1. File
2. Diagnose
3. I/O
4. Communication
1)
Fig.3.4.1.2 (e)
41
2)
3)
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
1) PMC alarm status

The following icon indicates whether the PMC is in the alarm
state.
Yellow : Alarm exists on PMC
om
Gray : Alarm not exists on PMC
Fig.3.4.1.2 (f)
ce
nt
e
r.c
2) Ladder execution status

The following icon indicates whether a ladder program is
running.
Program on
PMC is stopped.
Fig.3.4.1.2 (g)
3) PMC communication status

The following icon indicates whether a communication link
with the PMC is established.
.c
nc
Program on
PMC is running.
Communication
is active.
Fig.3.4.1.2 (h)
42
Communication
is not active.
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.4.2
File
3.4.2.1
Saving PMC Parameter
While communicating with PMC, PMC parameters can be saved to a file.

To use this function while running a ladder program, turn the CNC to
EDIT mode. If not running, you can use this function at any time.
1. File
om
(1) Menu position

Pull down [1.File] menu, and select [Save PMC parameter] on the
menu.
ce
nt
e
r.c
Save PMC parameter

Off-Line Function
MS DOS
Exit
Fig.3.4.2.1 (a)
(2) Dialog box view
Save PMC parameter
File name
nc
C:\DATA\PMC_PRM
.c
0%
100%
Exec
Abort
Execute saving
Abort saving
Input a
saving
file name.
Cancel
Close dialog box
Fig.3.4.2.1 (b)
(3) Operation
At first, specify the saving file name. PMC_PRM is initially
displayed as a default file name.
It is possible to change the saving directory and the file name.
(a) Select [Exec]
PMC parameter is saved and the dialog box closes.
(b) Select [abort] (during a file saving)
Saving is stopped.
(c) Select [Cancel]
PMC parameter is not saved and the dialog box closes.
43
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(4) Message
Message
File already exists.
Overwrite?
3.4.2.2
Meaning and countermeasure

Same file name exists.
Select [Yes] to overwrite.
Select [No] to cancel saving.
While communicating with PMC, PMC parameters can be restored from

a file.
To use this function while running a ladder program, turn the CNC to
EMERGENCY
STOP and set PWE(CNC parameter) to 1 on the CNC.
If not running, you can use this function at any time.
om
Restoring PMC
Parameter
r.c
(1) Menu position

Pull down [1.File] menu, and select [Restore PMC parameter] on the
menu.
ce
nt
e
1. File
Save PMC parameter

Off-Line Function
MS DOS
Exit
Fig.3.4.2.2 (a)
nc
(2) Dialog box view
.c
File name
C:\DATA\PMC_PRM
0%
100%
Abort
Exec
Execute restoring
Abort restoring
Input a
restoring
file name.
Cancel
Close dialog box
Fig.3.4.2.2 (b)
(3) Operation
At first, specify a restoring file name.PMC_PRM is initially
displayed as a default file name.
It is possible to change the restoring directory and the file name.
44
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(a) Select [Exec]

PMC parameter is restored and the dialog box closes.
(b) Select [Abort] (during a file saving)
Restoring is stopped.
(c) Select [Cancel]
PMC parameter is not restored and the dialog box closes.
(1) Menu position

To use Off-Line Function, pull down [1. File] menu, and select
[Off-Line Function] on the menu.
r.c
Selecting OffLine
Function from OnLine
Function
The Off-Line function can be selected from the On-Line function. For
details, see 3.5 Off-Line Function.
om
3.4.2.3
1. File
ce
nt
e
Save PMC parameter

Off-Line Function
MS DOS
Exit
Fig.3.4.2.3
3.4.2.4
An MSDOS command can be executed without terminating online

mode.
MSDOS
.c
nc
(1) Menu position

To use MSDOS, select [1.File] from the pulldown menu, then
select MSDOS. (The MSDOS prompt appears.)
The user can return to online mode by executing the EXIT command
from the MSDOS prompt.
1. File
Save PMC parameter

Off-Line Function
MS DOS
Exit
Fig.3.4.2.4
45
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.4.2.5
This function is used to finish On-Line Function.
Exit
(1) Menu position

Pull down [1. File] menu, and select [Exit] on the menu.
1. File
om
Save PMC parameter

Off-Line Function
MS DOS
Exit
r.c
Fig.3.4.2.5(a)
ce
nt
e
(2) Dialog box view
Are you sure you want to exit ?
Ok
Cancel
Fig.3.4.2.5(b)
preserved by
F7
[UPDATE] on the online editor, this File
save operation is canceled. And the following dialog box

appears.
Ladder diagram has been modified

Sure to quit ?
.c
nc
(3) Operation
(a) Push [OK] button.
1) Online function ends.
2) When there are any modifications which have not been
Yes
No
Fig.3.4.2.5(c)
[Yes]: The modifications by on-line editor is canceled and On-Line

Function ends.
[No] : Cancel to [Exit].
46
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.4.3
[2. Diagnose] menu contains the menu items as shown below.
Diagnose
2. Diagnose
om
for Ladder Monitor /Online Editor window

for Signal status window
for sub-menu of PMC Parameter windows
for PMC alarm message dialog box
for PMC Status window
for RUN/STOP the program dialog box
for Signal Trace dialog box
for Signal Analysis dialog box
for System Information dialog box
r.c
Ladder Monitor
Signal Status
PMC Parameter
PMC alarm status
PMC Status
Signal Trace
Signal Analysis
System Information
3.4.3.1
ce
nt
e
To select the ladder monitor screen, select [2. Diagnose] to display a pull-down
menu, then select [Ladder Monitor].
For [Ladder Monitor], both the ladder monitor function and on-line edit
function can be used.
Ladder Monitor
3.4.3.1.1
.c
nc
Ladder monitor
(a) Configuration of the ladder monitor screen

The ladder monitor screen is shown below.
On the ladder monitor screen, signal statuses are indicated as shown
below.
1) Displaying signal statuses
STATUS : OFF
(Thin line)
STATUS : ON
(Thick line)
47
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
1. File
2. Diagnose
[LEVEL1]
D000
D000
3. I/O
4. Communication
Ladder Monitor !!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Signal Status
PMC Parameter
PMC alarm status
PMC Status
Signal Trace
Signal Analysis
System Information
NET 0000100006
R0000.1
R0000.0
om
SUB 1
END1
SUB 2
END2
SUB
END
64
ce
nt
e
Shift
r.c
F7
F8
F9
F10
SpList Search Symbol Seting
S+F8
SSet
Fig.3.4.3.1.1(a)
(b) Ladder monitor function

The table below lists the operations performed by the ladder monitor
function.
Operation group
Function
Key to be used
Reference
.c
nc
Cursor movement Moving the cursor up or

down
Moving the cursor to the
beginning of the ladder
program
Home

end of the ladder program
End

previous page
next page

SpList
Listing subprograms and F7 : [SpList]

selecting a subprogram
(c)
Search
Searching for data
(d)
F8 : [Search]
Entering the search data

Shift
F8
(d)
Symbol
Displaying the symbol or F9 : [Symbol]

comment defined at a
specified address
(e)
Setting
Switching between ladder F10 : [Setting]

monitor
and
on-line
editing,
switching
between symbol display
and comment display
(f)
48
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(c) Selecting a subprogram (F7 [SpList])

A ladder program is monitoried and edited in units of subprograms.
This function is uesd to list existing subprograms and to select the
subporgram to be displayed.
Note
om
The online monitoring function of a step sequence program is not

supported.
The subprogram of a step sequence program is not selected.
1) Subprogram list display screen

Pressing F7 [SpList] causes a window to be displayed, as shown
below. Select the program to be displayed by pressing a cursor
Page
Up
Page
Down
keys then the
Enter
key.
r.c
key or the
Subprogram list
ce
nt
e
LEVEL 1
LEVEL2

P00011 (PUT WORK PIECE)
PUT DOWN A WORK
P00021 (CLOSE RIGHT DOOR) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMITSWTHR2
.c
nc
P00022 (CLOSE LEFT DOOR)
MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMITSWTH L2
Ok
Cancel
Fig.3.4.3.1.1(b)
2) Display information
The following information appears on the subprogram screen.
Ladder (No mark)
Step Sequence
(S mark)

LEVEL 1
LEVEL2

Subprogram No.
Symbol
Fig.3.4.3.1.1(c)
49
Coil comment
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(d) Searching for data (F8 [SEARCH])/Entering the search data (

F8
Shift
1) Searching for data (F8 [SEARCH])

A search for a net starts when the
key is pressed after the
F8
search data has been entered.

If the
F8
key is pressed without specifying any search data, a
om
search is made for the data set specified in 2) below, Entering

search data (see (b)).
A search can be made for several types of data, as described
below:
D Address/symbol
Searching for an address: address +
r.c
F8
Example) X0000.0+
Searching for a symbol:
F8
symbol +
F8
ce
nt
e
Example) SYMBOL1+
F8
D Functional instruction number/name

Searching for a number: S+functional
instructionnumber+
Example) S1+
F8
F8
Searching for a name: functionalinstruction
nc
name +
Example) END1+
.c
D Net number:
2) Entering search data (
F8
F8
netnumber+
Example) 10+
Shift
F8
F8
F8
Data for which a search is to be made by means of operation 1),

described above, can be registered. To repeatedly search for
identical data, use this function. While this function is active, the
following dialog box appears.
To position the cursor to another item, press the
change the setting, press the
50
or
key.
Tab
key. To
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
Search
Search Data :
X0000. 0
Cancel
r.c
OK
om
Data Kind
F ADDR/SYMBOL
f WRTCOIL
f FUNCTION
f NETNO
Fig.3.4.3.1.1(d)
ce
nt
e
D SEARCH DATA Enter the search data:

address, symbol, net number, functional instruction
name, functional instruction number (number only,
without S)
D DATA TYPE
Select the type of the search data.
(e) Displaying a symbol (F9 [SYMBOL])

This function displays the symbol or comment defined at a specified
nc
address. When
.c
w
OK
w
w
is pressed, the following dialog box appears.
Symbol & Comment Display
Address [
Symbol
F9
Relay Comment [
Coil Comment
Cancel
Fig.3.4.3.1.1(e)
D ADDRESS :
Enter the address of the symbol or

comment to be displayed.
D SYMBOL :
The symbol at the specified address
is appears.
D RELAY COMMENT : The relay comment at the specified
address appears.
D COIL COMMENT :
The coil comment at the specified
address appears.
51
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
F10
key is pressed, the dialog box shown below appears:
r.c
When the
om
(f) Setting a function (F10 [SET])

This function includes the following:
D LADDER MODE:
Switching between ladder monitor and online editing.
For details of the online function, see (2), Online
editing in this section.
D SYMBOL & COMMENT DISPLAY:
Selecting the address display mode in ladder monitoring
or online editing
Three types of data can be displayed: address, symbol,
and relay comment.
D FUNCTION PARAMETER:
Selecting whether the parameters of functional
instructions are to be displayed
To move the cursor to another item, press the

or
key. To change
key.
ce
nt
e
the setting, press the
Tab
Display setting
Ladder Mode
F Ladder Monitor
f Signal Trigger
f Online Editor
f Debug Ladder
Function Paramareter
V Display
.c
nc

F Symbol
f Address
f Relay Comment
f Symbol & Address
f Relay Comment & Address
f Relay Comment & Symbol
Fig.3.4.3.1.1(f)
52
OK
Cancel
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.4.3.1.2
To select the Online Editor screen, select [Ladder monitor] from the [2.
Diagnose] pulldown menu, then press F10 : [Setting]. The Display
setting dialog box appears. In the dialog box, select [Online Editor].
Online editing
Display setting
F Online Editor
f Debug Ladder
r.c

F Symbol
f Address
f Relay Comment
f Symbol & Address
om
Ladder Mode
f Ladder Monitor
f Signal Trigger
ce
nt
e
V Display
OK
Cancel
Fig.3.4.3.1.2(a)
.c
nc
(a) Configuration of the online edit screen

The configuration of the online edit screen is as shown below:
53
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
1. File
2. Diagnose
3. I/O
4. Communication
Online Editor
[LEVEL1]
NET 0000100006
X0000.0
Y0000.0
X0000.1
X0000.2
Y0000.1
Y0000.2
(S)
X0001.1
Y0000.2
(R)
om
X0001.0
SUB 1
END1
SUB
END
64
(*1)
ce
nt
e
X0000.0
r.c
SUB 2
END2
F1
Shift
F3
(S)
S+F2
S+F3
(R)
nc
.c
w
w
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
Functn Update Search Symbol Seting
S+F7
Undo
S+F8
SSET
C+F1N
etIns
F4
S+F1
Ctrl
F2
C+F2L C+F3
C+F4
inIns ElmIns Select
C+F5
Cut
C+F6
Copy
C+F7
paste
Fig.3.4.3.1.2(b)
1) Key input line display(*1)

The most recently entered contact or coil is displayed. If the
display of an address and a contact or coil is selected, pressing
the
Enter
key causes a single contact or coil to be set in the ladder
diagram.
(b) Online editing
Online editing operations (1)
Operation
group
Input mode
modification
Function
Key to be used
Insert mode
Enabling/Cancelling
Insert
Insert mode
Enabling/Cancelling
Delete
Contact/coil
input
(C) 1)
(C) 2)
input
(d) 1)
F1
54
Reference
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
Operation
group
Function
Contact/coil
input
Key to be used
input
Shift
Reference
(d) 2)
F1
input
(d) 3)
F2
input
Shift
(d) 4)
F2
input
(S)
(d) 5)
input
(R)
(d) 6)
Shift
Tab
F3
(d) 7)
r.c
Selecting a contact/coil
om
F3
Shift
ce
nt
e
Changing an address
address +
only
Tab
(d) 8)
Enter
Entering a contact/coil
(d) 9)
Enter
Functional
Entering a
instruction input instruction
functional functional
(d) 10)
instructionnumber
+
Line connection
F6
input
(e) 1)
F4
nc
.c
Line deletion
Net, line,
element
insertion
input
(e) 2)
F5
deletion
Delete mode +
F4
Delete mode +
F5
deletion
(e) 2)
Inserting a net
Ctrl
Inserting a line
Ctrl
Inserting a element
Cut and paste Specifying a range
function
F1
(f) 2)
(f) 3)
F3
Ctrl
F4
Ctrl
F5
Ctrl
F6
Ctrl
F7
Copying a net
Pasting a net
(f) 1)
F2
Ctrl
Cutting a net
55
(e) 1)
(g) 1)
(g) 2)
(g) 3)
(g) 4)
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
Online editing operations (2)

Operation
group
Function
Moving the cursor up or
down

left or right

beginning of the ladder
program
end of the ladder
program

next page
Search
(h) 3)
(h) 4)
End
Searching for data
Page
Down
F8 : [Search]
ce
nt
e
F8
(h) 6)
See
(1),
Ladder
monitor.
Displaying the symbol or F9 : [Symbol]

comment defined at a
specified address
See
(1),
Ladder
monitor.
Setting
Switching between
F10 :[Setting]
ladder monitor and
online editing, switching
between symbol display
and comment display,
etc.
See
(1),
Ladder
monitor.
Updating the ladder

program
(i) 1)
nc
Symbol
.c
Others
(h) 5)
Page
Up
Shift
(h) 2)
Home
Entering the search data
(h) 1)
r.c

previous page
Reference
om
Cursor
movement
Key to be used
F7 : [UPDATE]
Restoring the ladder

program to the state
existing prior to editing
Shift
(i) 2)
F7
(c) Changing the input mode

To change the input mode on the edit screen, use the following keys.
The current input mode is displayed at the bottom right corner of the
screen. When nothing is displayed, it indicates that overwrite mode
is selected (default).
1) Insert mode
Key
Insert
Function : When a contact or coil is entered in this mode,the

contact or coil is inserted at the cursor position.
Cancel
: Press the
Insert
key in insert mode.
2) Delete mode
Key
Delete
Function : When the line connect function is used in this

mode,data at the cursor position is deleted.
56
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
Cancel
: Press the
Delete
key in delete mode.
(d) Input Contact/Coil

To input a contact or coil, register the input element in the key input
line, then press the
Enter
key.
Key
om
The registered element is added to the ladder diagram. The following

keys are used for this operation:
[Keys used for registration]
1) Set
F1
Function : Set
at the input line.
An addressed
is input to the key input line by entering
2) Set
:
Shift
F1
ce
nt
e
Key
key.
F1
r.c
an address and pressing the
Function : Set
at the input line.
An addressed
Shift
and
keys.
F1
3) Set
Key
F2
nc
Function : Set
An addressed
at the input line.

key.
F2
.c
4) Set
Key
Shift
F2
Function : Set
An addressed
at the input line.


5) Set
and
keys.
F2
(S)
Key
F3
Function : Set
An addressed
at the input line.

(S)
(S)

6) Set
Shift
F3
key.
(R)
Key
Shift
Function : Set
An addressed
+
(R)
(R)
F3
at the input line.

an address and is pressing the
57
Shift
and
F3
keys.
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
7) Select Contact/Coil
Key
Tab
Shift
Tab
Function : Select Contact/Coil at the input line.

Tab
changes Contact/Coil in the input line to the
forward direction.
Shift
changes reverse.
Tab
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
The contacts and coils are displayed in the order

indicated below:
(S)
(R)
8) Change address only
: address+
Enter
.c
nc
Key
Function : Change address on ladder diagram without changing

input line.
The contact or coil at the cursor position is modified.
[Input Key]
9) Input Contact/Coil
Key
Enter
Function : Write Contact/Coil which is set at input line to ladder

diagram.
(e) Connect/delete line
1) Input ___
Key
F4
Function : Input horizontal line. If in the delete mode, delete

Contact/Coil or horizontal line.
2) Entering |
Key
F5
Function : A vertical line is entered to the right of the cursor

position. In delete mode, a vertical line is deleted.
58
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(f) Inserting a net, line, or element

1) Inserting a net
Key
Ctrl
F1
[Netlns]
Function : Inserts a single blank net after the net at the cursor
position.
2) Inserting a line
Key
Ctrl
F2
[Lilns]
Key
Ctrl
F3
om
Function : Inserts a single blank line under the line to which the
cursor is positioned.
3) Inserting an element
[Elmlns]
(g) Cut and paste function

1) Specifying a range
:
Ctrl
F4
[Select]
ce
nt
e
Key
r.c
Function : Inserts a single blank element at the cursor position.
Function : Specifies the range to be cut or copied. The range is

specified by means of the following procedure:
i) Position the cursor to the first net in the desired
range.
.c
nc
ii) Press the
Cancel
Ctrl
and
F4
keys. (SEL is displayed
at the bottom right corner of the screen.)

iii) Position the cursor to the last net in the desired
range.
Cutting and copying of a specified net range is
explained in 2) or 3) below.
: Press the
Ctrl
and
F4
keys in range mode.
2) Cutting a net
Key
Ctrl
F5
[Cut]
Function : Cuts a net. When a net range is specified, the

specified net range is cut. The cut portion is saved in
the buffer for subsequent pasting.
3) Copying a net
Key
Ctrl
F6
[Copy]
Function : Copies a net into the buffer for subsequent pasting.

When a net range is specified, the specified range is
copied.
4) Pasting a net
Key
Ctrl
F7
[Paste]
Function : Writes a net that was previously cut or copied and

saved into the buffer.
59
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(h) Cursor
1) Move cursor Up/Down
Key
Function : Up/Down cursor, When press
screen scrolls.
2) Move cursor to Left/Right
Key
at the bottom of the screen, the
om
screen or press
at the top of the
Function : Move cursor to the left/light. When pressing
at
r.c
the left end of the screen, the cursor moves to one line
above and right end. When pressing
at the right
ce
nt
e
end of the screen, the cursor moves one line below and
left end.
At the top.bottom of the screen, the screen scrolls.
3) Move to the top of ladder
Key
Home
Function : Move cursor to the top of ladder.

4) Move cursor to the bottom of ladder
Key
End
nc
Function : Move cursor to the bottom of ladder.

5) Previous page
.c
Key
Page
Up
Function : Go to the previous page.

6) Next page
Key
Page
Down
Function : Go to the next page.

(i) Others
1) Update
Key
F7
Function : Update the modification to the ladder diagram on

PMC.
Note
When the [UPDATE] function is used, the ladder program
on the PMC is modified.
Before executing this function, check whether modification
of the ladder program is permitted.
60
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
2) Undo
Key
Shift
F7
Function : Restore ladder diagram just before the last update

F7
Signal trigger function
(1) Outline of Signal Trigger Function

The ladder monitor display is stopped when the specified signal
changes. And the signal state of the ladder can be confirmed.
r.c
3.4.3.1.3
om
Note
Applying the [Undo] function causes the effects of editing
since the last update to be lost.
ce
nt
e
(2) Operations
(a) Selection of Signal Trigger Screen
Please select Signal Trigger of Ladder Mode by Displaying
setting dialog (F10 key) of the Ladder Monitor screen.
Display setting
Ladder Mode
f Ladder Monitor
F Signal Trigger
f Online Editor
f Debug Ladder
V Display
.c
nc

F Symbol
f Address
f Relay Comment
f Symbol & Address
61
OK
Cancel
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
1. File
2. Diagnose
3. I/O
4. Communication
Signal Trigger
[LEVEL1]
NET 0000100006
X0000.0 X0000.1 X0000.2 X0000.3 X0000.4 X0000.5 X0000.6
Y0000.1 COMM
ENT
G0500.3
R0900.0
X0010.7
Y0065.7
SUB 1
END1
SUB 2
END2
* MODE:ON : X0000.0 : 0 : 65535/65535
F1
Exec
F2
F3
Trgsrc Trgprm
Stop
F7
F8
F9
F10
Splist Search Symbol seting
ce
nt
e
[Display of setting trigger]
* 1996/05/07 15:00:00
r.c
TRIGGER
Y0014.2
om
X0012.5
TRIGGER * MODE:ON : X0000.0: 0 :0000/12345 * 1995/12/20 13:20:59

Stop time
COUNT:Trigger checking count
(default 1)
ADR: Trigger setting address

ON:Rising edge detection
OFF:Falling edge detection
Fig.3.4.3.1.3 (a) Screen of Signal Trigger Function
(b) Setting of signal trigger parameter

Trigger Parameter dialog is displayed by pressing the
F3Trgprm.
.c
nc
POINT:Trigger checking point (default 0)

0 the top of the 1st level (Default)
1 after END1 execution
62
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
[Trigger Parameter DIALOG]
Trigger Parameter
CheckPoint
F Level1
f END1
f END2
f END3
ce
nt
e
TriggerMode
f ON
F OFF
r.c
65535
Count
om
X1000.0
Address
OK
Init
Please set the following items by Trigger Parameter dialog.

1) Address: Trigger address (Symbol is possible.)
2) Check Point: Trigger check point
LEVEL1(Default)
the top of the 1st level (Default)
END1
after END1 execution
END2
END3
3) Count: Trigger count(1 to 65535)
4) Trigger Mode: Trigger condition
ON
Rising edge detection
OFF
Falling edge detection
When [Init] is selected, parameter and the display data are
initialized.
Please select [OK] when setting is completed.
Please select [Cancel] or press the Esc key when you cancel
setting.
(c) Starting or stopping signal trigger function
Please press F1Exec or Stop in Fig.3.4.3.1.3 (a).Screen of
Signal Trigger Function.
(d) Search of the instruction when the trigger condition was satisfied
Please press F2T.Srch.
The instruction when the trigger condition was satisfied is
displayed in blue.
nc
.c
w
w
w
Cancel
63
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.4.3.1.4
(1) Outline of function

Using this function, Step Operations and Stop Operations listed
below are possible. Step Operations are to execute ladder by
specified step (single instruction, single net, and specified block).
Stop Operations are to stop the execution of ladder when specified
condition becomes true.
(1) Step Operation to execute one instruction from current position.
(2) Step Operation to execute one net (one circuit) from current
position.
(3) Step Operation to execute from current position to specified
contact or coil instruction.
(4) Stop Operation to execute from the first step and stop the
execution at specified contact or coil instruction.
(5) Stop Operation to stop the execution of ladder by a trigger of
signal condition. (Optionally, a trigger counter can be specified.)
(6) Stop Operation to stop the execution of ladder after executing one
scan. (Optionally, a scan counter can be specified.)
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
Ladder debugging
function
Warning
When executing or stopping a ladder program, special care
is necessary. If this function is applied incorrectly, the
machine may act unpredictably.
Avoid using this function if personnel are present near the
machine.
.c
nc
(2) Operations
(a) Selection of Ladder Debugging Screen
Please select Ladder Debug of Ladder Mode by Displaying
setting dialog (F10) of the Ladder Monitor screen.
Display setting
Ladder Mode
f Ladder Monitor
f Signal Trigger
f Online Editor
F Debug Ladder

F Symbol
f Address
f Relay Comment
f Symbol & Address
V Display
64
OK
Cancel
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
1) Step Operation to execute one instruction from current position.

1. File
2. Diagnose
3. I/O
4. Communication
Ladder Debug
[LEVEL1]
NET 0000100006
Y0000.1 COMM
ENT
G0500.3
R0900.0
X0010.7
Y0065.7
X0012.5
om
X0000.0 X0000.1 X0000.2 X0000.3 X0000.4 X0000.5 X0000.6
Y0014.2
SUB 2
END2
r.c
SUB 1
END1
ACC : 1
F2
F3
F4
B.Srch Dbgprm Sync.B
STACK : 0000 0000
SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0
F7
F8
F9
F10
Splist Search Symbol Seting
ce
nt
e
F1
Step
[Displaying of Step]
ACC=1
: result of operation
: contents of stack
: overflow
: sign
: zero
( 1 byte )
( 0=NO, 1=YES )
( 0=NO, 1=YES )
( 0=NO, 1=YES )
nc
ACC
STK
OF
SF
ZF
STK=0000 0011 OF=0 SF=0 ZF=1
.c
2) Step Operation to execute one net (one circuit) from current position.
F1
Step
ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0

F2
F3
F4
F7
F8
F9
F10
3) Step operation to execute from current position to specified contact

or coil instruction.
ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0
F1
F2
F3
F4
Exec B.Srch Dbgprm Sync.B
(Stop)
F5
B.Strt
F7
Splist
F8
F9
F10
Search Symbol Seting
Fig.3.4.3.1.4 (a) Screen of Step Operation
65
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
1) Stop operation to stop the execution of ladder when a trigger condition specified by signal becomes true.
1. File
2. Diagnose
3. I/O
4. Communication
Ladder Debug
[LEVEL1]
NET 0000100006
Y0000.1 COMM
ENT
G0500.3
R0900.0
Y0065.7
X0012.5
SUB 1
END1
SUB 2
END2
TRIGGER
* MODE:ON : X0000.0 : 0 : 00000/65535

F3
Dbgprm
* 1995/12/20 13:20:59
F7
F8
F9
F10
ce
nt
e
F1
Exec
(Stop)
Y0014.2
r.c
X0010.7
om
X0000.0 X0000.1 X0000.2 X0000.3 X0000.4 X0000.5 X0000.6
[Display of setting trigger]
TRIGGER * MODE:ON : X0000.0: 0 :0000/12345 * 1995/12/20 13:20:59
.c
nc
Stop time
COUNT:Trigger checking count
(default 1)
POINT:Trigger checking point (default 1)

0 the top of the 1st level (Default 0)
ADR: Trigger setting address
ON:Rising edge detection
OFF:Falling edge detection
2) Stop operation to stop the execution of ladder after executing a scan.

SCAN COUNTER : 00000/65535 1995/12/20 13:20:59
F1
Exec
(Stop)
F3
Dbgprm
F7
Splist
F8
F9
F10
[Display of setting scan]

SCAN COUNT : 00000/00003 1995/12/20 13:20:59
Stop time
COUNT:Scan checking count
Fig.3.4.3.1.4 (b) Screen of Stop Function of Break with Condition
66
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(b) Setting of Ladder Debug Parameter

Ladder Debug Parameter DIALOG is displayed by pressing
F3Dbgprm.
[Ladder Debug Parameter DIALOG]
Ladder Debug Mode

F Step
f Break Control
Step
om
Ladder Debug Parameter
Break Control
Mode
F Trigger
Address
V Subprogram
f Scan
r.c
Mode
F Element
f Net
f Block
X1000.0
CheckPoint
ce
nt
e
F Level1
f END1
Count
f END2
f END3
65535
TriggerMode
.c
nc
F ON
OK
Cancel
f OFF
Init
Please set the following items by Ladder Debug Parameter

dialog.
Step operations . . . . 1), 2), 3)
Stop function of break with condition . . 1), 4), 5), 6), 7), 8)
1) Ladder Debug Mode
Ladder Debug Mode
F Step
f Break Control
Step
: Step operations (Default)
Break Control : Stop function of break with condition
67
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
2) Step/Mode
Step
Mode
om
F Element
f Net
f Block
: Step Operation to execute one instruction

from current position. (Default)
Net
: Step Operation to execute one net (one circuit)
from current position.
Block
: Step operation to execute from current
position to specified contact or coil
instruction.
3) Step/SubProgram
ce
nt
e
r.c
Element
Step
V SubProgram
(NoCheck) : The step operations in SubProgram
nc
is not displayed.
.c
(Check)
: The step operations in SubProgram
is displayed.
* When b) Step/Mode is Element or Net, it is possible
to set this item.
4) Break Control/Mode
Break Control
Mode
F Trigger
Trigger
Scan
68
f Scan
: Stop operation to stop the execution of ladder

when a trigger condition specified by signal
becomes true. (Optionally, a trigger counter can
be specified to stop after the trigger becomes true
specified times.)
: Stop operation to stop the execution of ladder
after executing a scan. (Optionally, a scan
counter can be specified to stop after executing
specified times of scans.)
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
5) Break Control/Address
Break Control
Address
X1000.0
Break Control
CheckPoint
f END2
f END3
ce
nt
e
F Level1
f END1
r.c
om
Address
: Trigger setting address
* When d) Break Control/Mode is Trigger, it is possible
to set this item.
6) Break Control/Check point
nc
LEVEL1 : the top of the 1st level

END1
: after END1 execution
END2
END3
* When d) Break Control/Mode is Trigger, it is possible
to set this item.
7) Break Control/Count
.c
Break Control
Count
65535
Default=1
Count
: Trigger Count or Scan Count(1 to 65535)
8) Break Control/Trigger Mode
Break Control
TriggerMode
F ON
f OFF
ON
: Rising edge detection
OFF
: Falling edge detection
* When Break Control/Mode is Trigger, it is possible
to set this item.
69
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
Ladder Debug Mode

StepMode
SubProgram
om
When [Init] is selected, Parameter of Ladder Debugging

Function is initialized.
setting.
(c) Execution of step operation
1) Step Operation to execute one instruction from current
position.
Setting of Ladder Debug Parameter Dialog
: Step
: Element
: No Check or Check
r.c
* Setting other than the abovementioned item are invalid.

When F1Step is pressed, the execution of step operation is
started.
ce
nt
e
ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0
F1
Step
F2
F3
F4
F7
F8
F9
F10
Step Operation to execute one instruction
nc
2) Step Operation to execute one net (one circuit) from current

position.
.c
Ladder Debug Mode

StepMode
SubProgram
: Step
: Net
: No Check or Check

When F1Step is pressed, the execution of step operation is
started.
ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0
F1
Step
F2
F3
F4
F7
Splist
F8
F9
F10
Step Operation to execute one net (one circuit) from current position.
3) Step operation to execute from current position to specified

contact or coil instruction.(Block operation)
70
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01

Ladder Debug Mode
StepMode
: Step
: Block
r.c
om

If F5B.Strt is pressed after the cursor is moved, the cursor
position becomes a position where the block operation
begins.
The block operation begins from the instruction which is
stopping now when the block operation begins without
specifying the beginning position. (If the step operation or
the block operation is never done after the Ladder Debug
Screen is displayed, the top of LEVEL1 becomes a beginning
position.)
ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0
F5
B.Strt
F7
Splist
F8
F9
F10
ce
nt
e
F1
F2
F3
F4
(Stop)
Cursor position becomes a beginning position of block operation.
When F1Exec is pressed, the execution of block operation

is started from the beginning position to the cursor position.
While executing block operation, block operation is stopped
by pressing F1Stop
nc
ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0
.c
F1
F2
F3
F4
(Stop)
F5
B.Strt
F7
Splist
F8
F9
F10
Executing (/Stopping) block operation
4) Search of the instruction at which the execution is currently

stopped
Please press F2B.Srch.
The instruction at which the execution is currently stopped
is displayed in BLUE.
ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0
F1
Exec
(Stop)
F2
F3
F4
F5
B.Srch Dbgprm Sync.B B.Strt
F7
Splist
F8
F9
F10
Search of the instruction at which the execution is stopped
5) Transfer the current status of input signals to the synchronous

buffer
71
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
F4Sync.B is used to transfer the current status of input

signals to the synchronous buffer so that succeeding
instructions could operate on refreshed inputs when the
execution is continued from current position.
om
Notes
Normally, transferring to the synchronous buffer is
automatically performed at the beginning of the 2nd level
ladder.
ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0

F2
F3
F4
F7
Splist
F8
F9
F10
r.c
F1
Step
Press F4Sync.B
ce
nt
e
SYNCHRONOUS BUFFER TRANSFER COMPLETED

ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0
F1
Step
F2
F3
F4
F7
Splist
F8
F9
F10
.c
nc
(d) Execution of stop function of break with condition

1) Stop operation to stop the execution of ladder when a trigger
condition specified by signal becomes true.
Ladder Debug Mode
BreakMode
Address
CheckPoint
Count
TriggerMode
:
:
:
:
:
:
Break Control
Trigger
Trigger address
Level1 or END1 to 3
1 to 65535
ON or OFF

When F1Exec is pressed, the execution of stop operation
(trigger) is started.
While executing stop operation (trigger), stop operation
(trigger) is stopped by pressing F1Stop
TRIGGER * MODE:ON : X0000.0 : 0 : 00000/65535 * 1995/12/20 13:20:59
F1
Exec
(Stop)
F3
Dbgprm
F7
Splist
F8
F9
F10
Starting (/Stopping) the execution of stop operation (trigger)
2) Stop operation to stop the execution of ladder after executing

a scan.
72
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01

Ladder Debug Mode
BreakMode
Count
: Break Control
: Scan
: 1 to 65535
om

When F1Exec is pressed, the execution of stop operation
(scan) is started.
While executing stop operation (scan), stop operation (scan)
is stopped by pressing F1Stop
SCAN COUNTER : 00000/65535 1995/12/20 13:20:59
F3
Dbgprm
F7
Splist
F8
F9
F10
r.c
F1
Exec
(Stop)
3.4.3.2
Signal Status Window
ce
nt
e
Starting(/Stopping) the execution of stop operation (scan)
Signal Status window displays the status of signals on PMC in real

time. You can examine the signal status of any PMC address, and you can
also change the signal status on this window.
.c
nc
(1) Menu position

To activate Signal Status window, pull down [2. Diagnose] menu,
and select [signal Status] on the menu.
2. Diagnose
Ladder Monitor
Signal Status
PMC Parameter
PMC alarm status
PMC Status
Signal Trace
Signal Analysis
System Information
(2) Window view

When [SIGNAL STATUS] is selected, the window shown below
appears.
73
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(a) Window view without symbols :
Signal Status
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
01
80
00
1C
00
00
AA
55
00
00
ON
1
01
om
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
r.c
R00000
R00001
R00002
R00003
R00004
R00005
R00006
R00007
R00008
R00009
Fig.3.4.3.2 (a)
ce
nt
e
(b) Window view with symbols :

Cursor
Signal Status
OFF
0
R00001
80
.c
nc
WORK1
R00000
R00002
TOOL1
R00003
00
1C
R00004
PMC Address
Byte symbol
Hexadecimal expression
00
Fig.3.4.3.2 (b)
Bit Symbols
F8
Search
F4
Symbol
or
or
F4
Adress
F10
WrtOff
Fig.3.4.3.2 (c)
74
F10
Wrt On
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(3) Operations
Operations on the signal status window is described.
Basic operation
Function
Cursor keys
/
Page
Down
Tab
Shift
Move address area on window.
Skip to next/previous kind of address.

Tab
om
Page
Up
Move cursor.
Alternate signal status.
Enter
Enter
key turns the signal
status ON which was OFF, and turns OFF which

was ON.
Enter
key is effective only when the
F4
address+[Search]
F8
Display/Hide symbols.
Search address (address can be symbol).
ce
nt
e
[Symbol]/[Adress]
r.c
write-protection is unlocked.
[Wrt On]/[WrtOff]
F10
Unlock write-protection/Re-protect. When the

protection is effective the cursor is yellow, and
becomes red when unlock.
.c
nc
Warning
Signal status changes and PMC parameter changes should
always be made with extreme care. Signal status changes
and PMC parameter changes can have serious and
unforeseen results on a control system, and on the process
to which it applies, if they are improperly used. It is
recommended that these functions not be used with people
near the equipment.
Note
Attempts to change some signal statuses may fail. At an
address to which sequence programs, the CNC, MMC, I/O
Link and other external I/O devices write repeatedly, the
signal status cannot be changed. (The CNC repeatedly
writes to F addresses, the MMC to M addresses, and
external I/O devices to X addresses.
(4) Message
Message
Sure to modify ?
75

You tried to change signal status although
write-protected. If the attempt is intended, answer
[Yes]. Otherwise, answer [No] to cancel change.
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.4.3.3
PMC Parameter sub-menu consists of the menu items for the windows
below.
1) Timer window
2) Counter window
3) Keep relay window
4) Data table control window
5) Data table window
PMC Parameter
om
To display the Parameter submenu, display the [2. Diagnose]

pull-down menu, then select [PMC Parameter] from the menu.
The submenu can be displayed by pressing the
2. Diagnose
key with the
r.c
cursor positioned to [PMC Parameter].
or
ce
nt
e
Ladder Monitor
Signal Status
PMC Parameter
PMC alarm status
PMC Status
Signal Trace
Signal Analysis
System Information
Timer
Counter
Keep relay
Data table control
Data table
.c
nc
Warning
When changing a signal status or PMC parameter, extreme
care is necessary. If the function for modifying the signal
status or PMC parameter is applied incorrectly, the machine
may act unpredictably. Avoid using the function if personnel
are present near the machine.
Note
If you can not write PMC parameter, it might be protected.
For the detail, please refer PMC programing manual.
(1) Timer window
Timer window displays the contents of PMC Timer address. You
can examine the contents of PMC Timer address, and you can also
change the values for TMR instruction.
(a) Menu position
To active Timer window, pull down [2. Diagnose] menu, and
select [PMC Parameter] on the menu. Then sub-menu appears
which contains item [Timer] which activates Timer window.
76
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
2. Diagnose
Ladder Monitor
Signal Status
PMC Parameter
PMC alarm status
PMC Status
Signal Trace
Signal Analysis
System Information
om
Timer
Counter
Keep relay
Data table control
Data table
r.c
(b) Window view

1) Window view without symbols:
Timer
T00000
T00002
T00004
T00006
T00008
T00010
T00012
T00014
T00016
T00018
600000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1000
0
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
nc
ce
nt
e
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
T00020
T00022
T00024
T00026
T00028
T00030
T00032
T00034
T00036
T00038
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Fig.3.4.3.3 (a)
.c
2) Window view with symbols:

Cursor
Timer
TEN_MINUTES
1. T00000
600000
6. T00010
2. T00002
7. T00012
3. T00004
4. T00006
8. T00014
0
ONE_SECOND
9. T00016
1000
5. T00008
10. T00018
Byte symbol
PMC Address
Fig.3.4.3.3 (b)
77
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3) Function keys:
F4
Symbol
F8
Search
F10
Wrt On
or
F4
Adress
F10
WrtOff
om
or
Fig.3.4.3.3 (c)
Basic operation
Cursor keys
/
Function
Move cursor.
Page
Down
ce
nt
e
Page
Up
r.c
(c) Operations
The following table lists the operations supported by the
[TIMER] window.
number +
nc
[Symbol]/[Address]
.c
address + [Search]
Change timer value. Enter new timer value in

milliseconds.
You can enter new value only when the
writeprotection is unlocked.
The valid timer values are :
03,145,680 ms for timer No. 18
0523,280 ms for timer No. 9150
Enter
F4
F8
number + [Search]
F8
[Wrt On]/[Wrt Off]
F10

You cannot search any other address than PMC
parameter address, T, C, K, and D, at the Timer
window. When C, K or D address is specified to
search, Timer window is closed and the special
window for the address is opened with the address
at top of window.
Search timer address by timer number.
Unlock writeprotection/Reprotect. When the
becomes red when unlocked.
(d) Message
Message
Sure to modify?

You tried to change timer value although
writeprotected.
If the attempt is intended, answer [Yes].
Otherwise, answer [No] to cancel change.
(2) Counter window

Counter window displays the contents of PMC Counter address.
You can examine the contents of PMC Counter address, and you can
also change the values for CTR instruction.
78
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(a) Menu position

To activate Counter window, pull down [2. Diagnose] menu,
and select [PMC Parameter] on the menu. Then submenu
appears which contains item [Counter] which activates
Counter window.
2. Diagnose
om
Ladder Monitor
Signal Status
PMC Parameter
PMC alarm status
PMC Status
Signal Trace
Signal Analysis
System Information
r.c
Timer
Counter
Keep relay
Data table control
Data table
ce
nt
e
(b) Window view

When [COUNTER] is selected, the following window uppears.
1) Window view without symbols :
Counter
Address
C00000
C00004
C00008
C00012
C00016
C00020
C00024
C00028
C00032
C00036
.c
nc
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Preset/Current
1000 /
347
256 /
129
0/
0
0/
0
0/
0
0/
0
0/
0
36 /
0
0/
0
0/
0
No.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Address
C00040
C00044
C00048
C00052
C00056
C00060
C00064
C00068
C00070
C00076
Fig.3.4.3.3 (d)
79
Preset/Current
0/
0
0/
0
0/
0
0/
0
0/
0
0/
0
0/
0
0/
0
0/
0
0/
0
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
2) Window view with symbols:

Cursor
Counter
No. Address
Preset/Current
WORK COUNTER
1. C00000 1000 /
347
No. Address
Preset/Current
0/
om
6. C00020
256 /
129
7. C00024
0/
3. C00008
0/
8. C00028
36 /
4. C00012
0/
9. C00032
0/
5. C00016
0/
10. C00036
0/
r.c
2. C00004
Current counter value
Symbol
ce
nt
e
Preset counter value
Counter number and Address
Fig.3.4.3.3 (e)
3) Function keys :
.c
nc
F4
Symbol
F8
Search
F10
Wrt On
or
or
F4
Adress
F10
WrtOff
Fig.3.4.3.3 (f)
(c) Operations
The table below lists the operations supported by the [COUNTER]
window.
Basic operation
Cursor keys
Page
Up
number +
Function
Move cursor.
Page
Down
Change timer value. You can enter new value only

when the writeprotection is unlocked.
The valid counter values are :
065,535 for binary counter
09,999 for BCD counter
Enter
[Symbol]/[Address]
80
F4
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
Basic operation
F8
number + [Search]
F8
[Wrt On]/[Wrt Off]
F10

parameter address, T, C, K, and D, at the Counter
window. When T, K or D address is specified to
search, Counter window is closed and the
special window for the address is opened with the
address at top of window.
Search counter address by timer number.
om
address + [Search]
Function
(d) Message
Message
You tried to change counter value although

r.c
Sure to modify ?
ce
nt
e
(3) Keep relay window

Keep relay window displays the status of PMC Keep relay address.
You can examine the signal status of PMC Keep relay address, and
you can also change the status of Keep relays.
(a) Menu position
To activate Keep relay window, pull down [2. Diagnose] menu,
and select [PMC Parameter] on the menu. Then submenu
appears which contains item [Keep relay] which activates Keep
relay window.
Ladder Monitor
Signal Status
PMC Parameter
PMC alarm status
PMC Status
Signal Trace
Signal Analysis
System Information
.c
nc
2. Diagnose
81
Timer
Counter
Keep relay
Data table control
Data table
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(b) Window view

When Keep relay is selected following window is displayed.
Address
Cursor
Keep relay
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
K00010
K00011
K00012
K00013
K00014
K00015
K00016
K00017
K00018
K00019
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
om
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
r.c
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ce
nt
e
K00000
K00001
K00002
K00003
K00004
K00005
K00006
K00007
K00008
K00009
Fig.3.4.3.3 (g)
F8
Search
F10
Wrt On
or
F10
WrtOff
Fig.3.4.3.3 (h)
(c) Operations
Basic operation
Cursor keys
Page
Up
Function
Move cursor.
Page
Down
Alternate signal status.
Enter
.c
nc
1) Function Keys :
Enter
key turns the signal
status ON which was OFF, and turns OFF which

was ON.
Enter
key is effective only when the write
protection is unlocked.
82
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
Basic operation
Function
F8
[Wrt On]/[Wrt Off]
F10

parameter address, T, C, K, and D, at the Keep
relay window. When T, C or D address is specified
to search, Keep relay window is closed and the
om
address + [Search]
(d) Message
Message

r.c
Sure to modify ?
ce
nt
e
(e) Data for PMC control software

Keep relay data can not use in sequence program because some
keep relay data are used by PMC control software.
In this manual, the addresses related to the operation of the
On-line function are described.
For the detail, please refer PMC programming manual.
(The addresses marked * do not effect the operation of the
On-line function but used by PMC control software.)
K17
or
K900
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
DTBLDSP
MEMINP
#1
#0
PRGRAM LADMASK
1 : Can not display data table control data

in PMC parameter.
#4 MEMINP
0 : Can not change signal status.
#1 PRGRAM
0 : Can not activate On-line Editing and
the functions in I/O menu.
#0 LADMASK 1 : Can not display Ladder monitor.
.c
nc
#7 DTBLDSP
K19
or
K902
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
FROM-WRT
#0 FROM-WRT 1 : Displaying dialog box of program

back-up when exiting On-line editing.
(4) Data table control window
Data table control window displays the informations of Data
groups for PMC Data table address. You can examine the Data group
attributes, and you can also change the attributes on this window.
(a) Menu position
To activate Data table control window, pull down [2. Diagnose]
menu, and select [PMC Parameter] on the menu. Then sub-menu
appears which contains item [Data table control] which activates
Data table control window.
83
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
2. Diagnose
Ladder Monitor
Signal Status
PMC Parameter
PMC alarm status
PMC Status
Signal Trace
Signal Analysis
System Information
om
Timer
Counter
Keep relay
Data table control
Data table
r.c
(b) Window view

1) Window view with symbols :
Cursor
ce
nt
e
Data table control
No. Start address
DATATAABLETOP
D00050
TOOLTABLE
D00200
BCDCONVTABLE
Type
Format
8000
10
20
100
10
byte
word
word
byte
word
Hex
Dec
Dec
Dec
BCD
nc
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Number
.c
Start address/
Data size
symbol of the group
Data group number
Number of element
Data format
Protection
on
off
off
off
off
Write-protection
Fig.3.4.3.3 (i)
2) Function keys:
F1
New
F2
Delete
F3
G. Data
F4
Symbol
F8
Search
or
or
F4
Adress
F10
WrtOff
Fig.3.4.3.3 (j)
84
F10
Wrt On
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(c) Operations
The table below lists the operations supported by the Data table
control window. Table of the data table control display (1).
Basic operation
Cursor keys
Move cursor.
D-address+
number+
Page
Down
Change Start address with the cursor on the

item. You can enter new address only when the
write-protection is unlocked. You can omit the
leading character D of the address.
Enter
om
Page
Up
Function
Change Number with the cursor on the item. You

can enter new number only when the
Enter
Change Type, Format and Protection with the

cursor on the item. When the cursor is on Type or
Format, small dialog box is displayed to choose
the item. You can change them only when the
r.c
Enter
ce
nt
e
Table of the data table control display (2).

Basic operation
[New]
Make new data group. [New] duplicates the data

group on the cursor. A hundred data groups can
be created at most.
F1
[Delete]
Delete data group on the cursor. You cannot

delete all the data groups because one data group
must exist at least.
F2
Switch to Data table window. The data group

which the cursor was on is displayed.
F3
nc
[G.Data]
[Symbol]/[Adress]
F4
F8
.c
address+[Search]
Function
number+[Search]
[Wrt On]/[WrtOff]
F10
F8
parameter address, T, C, K and D, at the Data
table control window. When T, C, K or D address
is specified to search, Data table control window
is closed and the special window for the address is
opened with the address at top of window.
Search data group by data group number.

(d) Messages
Message
Sure to modify ?
85

write-protected.
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
om
(5) Data table window

Data table window displays the contents of PMC Data table address
according to Data groups defined by Data table control data. You can
examine the contents of Data table, and you can also change the
values of Data table on this window.
(a) Menu position
To activate Data table window, pull down [2. Diagnose] menu,
and select [PMC Parameter] on the menu. Then sub-menu
appears which contains item [Data table] which activates Data
table window.
2. Diagnose
ce
nt
e
r.c
Ladder Monitor
Signal Status
PMC Parameter
PMC alarm status
PMC Status
Signal Trace
Signal Analysis
System Information
Timer
Counter
Keep relay
Data table control
Data table
(b) Window view

When [Data table] is selected, the following window appears.
1) Window view without symbols :
nc
Data table
Group 1 : D00000 - D07999, 8000 bytes, hexadecimal, protected

F6
FF
EC
FF
D8
FF
B0
FF
60
FF
.c
D00000
D00001
D00002
D00003
D00004
D00005
D00006
D00007
D00008
D00009
D00010
D00011
D00012
D00013
D00014
D00015
D00016
D00017
D00018
D00019
C0
FE
80
FD
00
FB
00
F6
00
EC
D00020
D00021
D00022
D00023
D00024
D00025
D00026
D00027
D00028
D00029
00
D8
00
B0
00
00
00
00
00
00
Fig.3.4.3.3 (k)
Data group information:

Group 1 : D0000D07999, 8000 bytes, hexadecimal, protected
Area of Data group

Data group number
Data format
Number of element
and data size
86
Write-protection
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
2) Window view with symbols :

Data group information
Data table
Group 1:D00000 - D07999, 8000 bytes, hexadecimal, protected
D00001
FF
D00006
D00002
EC
D00007
D00003
FF
D00008
D00004
D8
D00009
Cursor
D00010
C0
B0
D00011
FE
FF
D00012
80
60
D00013
FD
FF
D00014
00
ce
nt
e
Symbol
Address
FF
om
D00005
r.c
DATTABLETOP
D00000
F6
Fig.3.4.3.3 (l)
3) Function keys:
.c
nc
F3
F4
C. Data Symbol
F8
Search
F10
Wrt On
or
or
F4
Adress
F10
WrtOff
Fig.3.4.3.3 (m)
(c) Operations
The following table lists the operations supported by the [DATA
TABLE] window.
Operations supported by [DATA TABLE] window
Basic operation
Function
Cursor keys
Move cursor.
Page
Up
Page
Down
Tab
Shift
number+
Enter
Tab
Skip to next/previous data group.

Change data value. You can enter new value only
when the write-protection is unlocked. The valid
data values are :
For details of the values that can be input, see the
table of input data values below.
87
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
Basic operation
Function
Changes the keep relay signal status. Pressing
Enter
the
Enter
key toggles the signal status between off
and on. The
Enter
key is enabled only in the write
enabled state.
[Symbol]/[Adress]
F4
address+[Search]
F8
number+[Search]
om
Switch to Data table control window.

The displayed data group is displayed at top of the
window.
F3
Search data group by data group number.
ce
nt
e
F8

parameter address, T, C, K and D, at the Data
table window. When T, C or K address is specified
to search, Data table window is closed and the
r.c
[C.Data]
[Wrt On]/[WrtOff]
F10

Data table
byte
Decimal
word
-128 to 127 -32,768 to 32,767
BCD
-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647
0 to 99
0 to 9,999
0 to
99,999,999
00 to FF
0000 to FFFF
00000000 to
FFFFFFFF
nc
Hexadecimal
double-word (dword)
(d) Messages
Message
.c
Sure to modify ?
88

You tried to change data table value although
write-protected.
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.4.3.4
The PMC ALARM MESSAGE dialog box displays a PMC alarm

message.
PMC Alarm Status
(1) Menu position

To activate PMC alarm message dialog box, pull down [2.
Diagnose] menu, and select [PMC alarm status] on the menu.
om
2. Diagnose
ce
nt
e
r.c
Ladder Monitor
Signal Status
PMC Parameter
PMC alarm status
PMC Status
Signal Trace
Signal Analysis
System Information
(2) Window view

When [PMC alarm status] is selected, the following dialog box
appears.
PMC alarm message
.c
nc
ALARM NOTHING
OK
Fig.3.4.3.4 (a)
(3) Operation
Press
Enter
Space
or
key to close PMC alarm message dialog
box.
(4) Messages
The alarm messages same as PMCs are displayed in this window.
See the manual of PMC for detail of the messages.
For details of messages, refer to the following manual:
FANUC PMC MODEL PA1/PA3/RA1/RA2/RA3/RB/RB2/
RB3/RB4/RB5/RB6/RC/RC3/RC4/ NB/NB2 Ladder
Language Programming Manual (B61863E)
89
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.4.3.5
PMC Status window displays the status of program on PMC.
PMC Status Window
(1) Menu position

To activate PMC Status window, pull down [2. Diagnose] menu,
and select [PMC Status] on the menu.
2. Diagnose
r.c
om
Ladder Monitor
Signal Status
PMC Parameter
PMC alarm status
PMC Status
Signal Trace
Signal Analysis
System Information
ce
nt
e
(2) Window view

When PMC Status is selected, following window is displayed
Status
Series/Edition
****/**
****/**
SCAN TIME
CUR
MAX
MIN
Date/Time
00/00/00
00:00:00
.c
nc
PMC TYPE
PMC-***
0ms
0ms
0ms
Series/Edition of PMC
Series/Edition of ladder Editing Card
Connected PMC type
Current scan time

Maximum scan time
Minimum scan time
Month/Date/Year
Hour:Minute:Second
Fig.3.4.3.5 (a)
90
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
Executing or Stopping a
Program
The program execution status can be changed from RUNNING to

STOP or from STOP to RUNNING.
(1) Position of menu
To display the [RUN/STOP the program] dialog box, display the [2.
Diagnose] pulldown menu, then select [RUN/STOP the program]
from the menu.
2. Diagnose
om
3.4.3.6
ce
nt
e
r.c
Ladder Monitor
Signal Status
PMC Parameter
PMC alarm status
PMC Status
Signal Trace
Signal Analysis
System Information
nc
(2) Displaying the dialog box

When [RUN/STOP the program] is selected, the dialog box shown
below appears.
(a) Program running state
While a program is being executed, the following dialog box
appears.
.c
STOP the program
Yes
No
Fig.3.4.3.6 (a)
[YES] : Stop the program.

[NO] : Closes the dialog box without stopping the program.
(b) Program stop state
While a program is in the stop state, the following dialog box
appears.
91
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
RUN the program ?
No
om
Yes
Fig.3.4.3.6 (b)
r.c
[YES] : Executes the ladder program.

[NO] : Closes the dialog box without executing the ladder
program.
3.4.3.7
(1) Outline of Signal Trace Function

This function checks the signal history which cannot be checked in
the status display. Using onebyte or two byte addressing, the
function records a state when the signal changes. In twobyte
addressing, discontinuous address can be set.
nc
Signal Trace Function
ce
nt
e
Warning
When executing or stopping a program, special care is
necessary. If a program is applied incorrectly, the machine
may act unpredictably.
Avoid using the function if personnel are present near the
machine.
.c
(2) Operations
(a) Selection of Signal Trace Screen
Please select Signal Trace from the menu of 2.Diagnose.
2. Diagnose
Ladder Monitor
Signal Status
PMC Parameter
PMC alarm status
PMC Status
Signal Trace
Signal Analysis
System Information
92
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
Signal Trace
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
6
F
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
X0000(01111111)
4
3
2
5
F
f
F
f
f
f
f
f
F
F
F
f
f
f
f
f
F
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
F
F
f
f
f
f
f
f
Signal Trace Start Time ::
F1
EXEC
STOP
F
F
f
f
f
f
f
f
0
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
Value
F
F
F
f
f
f
f
f
FDH
2DH
60H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
om
No.
Signal Trace End Time ::
r.c
F3
PARAM
@@@The latest data, f @@@OFF , F @@@ ON
The display of trace data can be scrolled by
Page
Up
, and
Page
Down
key
ce
nt
e
Fig.3.4.3.7 Screen of signal trace function
(b) Setting of signal trace parameter

Signal Trace Parameter dialog is displayed by pressing the
F3Param key.
[Signal Trace Parameter DIALOG]
nc
Signal Trace Parameter
.c
MODE
f 1 BYTE
f 2 BYTES (Consecutive Address)
F 2 BYTES (Two Address not Consecutive)
ADDRESS 1
ADDRESS 2
F PMC ADDRESS
f PHY ADDRESS
f PMC ADDRESS
F PHY ADDRESS
X0000
FFE480
7654 3210
MASK
7654 3210
1111 1111
V MAX DISPLAY
MASK
OK
1111 1111
Cancel
Please set the following items by Signal Trace Parameter

dialog.
93
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
1) MODE . . . . . . . . . Sets a mode used for reading signals

2) ADDRESS 1,2 . . . Sets address type, trace address and
mask data
r.c
om
Address type
PMC address (symbol is also
acceptable)
Physical address
Trace address
Sets address at which a signal is
traced by specifiedaddress type.
Mask data
Sets a masked bit or bits (signals can
be read with unnecessary bits
masked)
ce
nt
e
Notes
When the trace address type is specified as a physical
address, if an illegal memory address is specified to execute
the trace, a system error may occur. About the legal range
of a physical address which can be specified, a knowledge
of programming PMC by C language is needed.
Refer to PROGRAMMING MANUAL(C LANGUAGE)/
B61863E1 and operate carefully not to specify an illegal
memory address.
.c
nc
3) MAX DISPLAY . . . The screen display size can be

changed.
(No check)
Half screen display (8 lines)
X
(Check)
All screen display (20 lines)

Please select [Cancel] or press Esc key when you cancel
setting.
(c) Starting or stopping signal trace function
Please press F1EXEC or STOP in Fig. 3.4.3.7 Screen Of
Signal Trace Function.
(d) Automatic tracing function at power on
When the trace parameters have been specified and bit 5 of keep
relay K17 or K900 has been set to 1, the trace automatically starts
at power on.
94
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.4.3.8
Signal Analysis Function
(1) Outline of Signal Analysis Function

The changes in a PMC ladder signal can be traced on the specified
trigger conditions. Displaying the results of tracing signals on a time
axis enables checking the relationship between the signals.
D Maximum number of signals traced at the same time : 16
D Maximum sampling period : 10 sec
D Sampling interval : 8 msec
om
(2) Operations
(a) Selection of Signal Analysis Screen
2. Diagnose
ce
nt
e
r.c
Ladder Monitor
Signal Status
PMC Parameter
PMC alarm status
PMC Status
Signal Trace
Signal Analysis
System Information
Signal analysis
Condition
: TriggerON
Trigger Mode : ABOUT
nc
Sampling Time : 10 (sec)

Trigger Address : *ESP
R0901.0
.c
R0901.1
R0901.2
R0901.3
512
Start Time
F1
Exec
STOP
1024(msec)
1996/01/30 10:11:12
F2
F3
T.Srch Sgnprm
Stop Time
1996/01/30 10:11:22
F6
Exchg
F10
SgnSet
Fig.3.4.3.8 Screen of Signal Analysis Function
(b) Setting of Analysis Parameter

Analysis Parameter dialog is displayed by pressing F3Sgnprm.
95
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
[Analysis Parameter DIALOG]
Analysis Parameter
Condition
f Start
F TriggerON
f TriggerOFF
(sec)
Trigger Address
TriggerMode
f AFTER
F ABOUT
f BEFORE
f ONLY
SignalAddress
2:
X0000.1
3:
X0000.2
5:
R0900.0
r.c
X0000.0
6:
R0900.1
7:
R0900.2
ce
nt
e
1:
4:
X0000.3
8:
R0900.3
Cancel
Init
nc
OK
*ESP
om
10
Sampling Time
(Next Page)
.c
SignalAddress
9:
X0000.4
13:
R0900.4
10:
X0000.5
14:
R0900.5
11:
X0000.6
15:
R0900.6
12:
X0000.7
16:
R0900.7
Please set the following items by Analysis Parameter dialog.

1) Sampling Time . . . Specify the maximum trace time in a
range of 1 to 10 sec.
2) Trigger Address . . Specify a trigger address from which the
tracing starts on the PMC address.
A symbol name can be used.
96
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3) Condition . . . . . . . Specify the conditions at which the

tracing starts.
0 : When F1Exec key is pressed.
1 : When F1Exec key is pressed
and the trigger address signal rises.
2 : When F1Exec key is pressed
and the trigger address signal falls.
om
Notes
1 Condition 1 and 2 are effective when a trigger address is
specified.
r.c
4) Trigger Mode . . Sampled data for up to 10 seconds is

stored in the trace buffer.
A signal is stored in the buffer within 8 ms.
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
0 : AFTER
In this mode, signal status are
obtained in the period specified in
the SAMPLING TIME from the
time when the trigger conditions
are satisfied.
1 : ABOUT
the SAMPLING TIME with the
time at the middle when the trigger
conditions are satisfied.
2 : BEFORE
the SAMPLING TIME before the
trigger conditions are satisfied.
3 : ONLY
In this mode, the signal states are
obtained only when the trigger
conditions are satisfied.
Notes
2 Trigger mode 1 is effective when condition 1 is set.
Trigger mode 2 is effective when condition 2 is set.
5) Signal Address . . . Specify up to 16 addresses at which the
tracing is performed with PMC
addresses or symbol names.
setting.
When [Init] is selected, parameter and trace data of Signal
Analysis Function is initialized.
(c) Setting of Signal Analysis Screen
Analysis setting dialog is displayed by pressing F10SgnSet.
97
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
[Analysis setting DIALOG ]
Analysis setting
Scale
f 8 msec
F 16 msec
f 32 msec
om
Address/Symbol
F Symbol
f Address
r.c
DisplayMode
V Max Display
ScrollMode
V Scale(msec/Times)
Cancel
ce
nt
e
OK
8 8 msec/divisions
16 16msec/
32 32msec/
2) Address/Symbol . . Displaying symbols for trigger and

trace addresses When symbols are
defined for trigger and trace addresses,
the symbols and addresses are
displayed.
3) Display Mode . . The screen display size can be changed.
Max Display :
.c
nc
Please set the following items by Analysis setting DIALOG.

1) Scale . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the time division.
When displaying the signal waveform,
the time division can be changed.
(No check)
Half screen display (four points)
X
(Check)
All screen display(eight points)

4) Scroll Mode . . . The unit of a right and left scroll can be
changed.
(No check)
Scrolls in each graduation
X
(Check)
Scrolls in each page

98
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
with
or
om
setting.
(d) Starting or stopping of data sampling
Please press F1Exec or Stop in Fig.10.1.Screen of Signal
Analysis Function.
(e) Displaying traced data by specifying period
Enter a period in ms in which traced data is to be displayed.
Pressing F2T.SRCH key displays the trace data.
(Example) Entering 800, then pressing F2T.SRCH key
displays the waveform from 512 ms to 1024 ms.
(f) Exchanging positions at which traced data is displayed.
Pressing the F6Exchg key moves the cursor to the first traced
address.
Move the cursor to an address to be displayed at different position
key and press SELECT key. Move the cursor
ce
nt
e
r.c
to an address to be displayed at the position of the specified

address and press TO key.
Pressing EXEC key exchanges the positions of the traced data
items.
After TO key is pressed in the above procedure, Only EXEC key
is effective.
Pressing CANCEL key restores the exchange trace data to
original positions.
[Changing of Function key]
.c
nc
F6
Exchg
F6
F7
Select Cancel
F6
To
F7
Cancel
F6
Exec
F7
Cancel
(g) Reading signals automatically at power on

Since parameter and sampling data is stored in nonvolatile
memory, data is retained when the power is turned off.
When the parameters for sampling have been specified and bit 6
of keep relay K17 or K900 have been set to 1, the data sampling
automatically starts at power on.
99
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.4.3.9
The system software information such as specifications, version, and etc

can be referred.
Display System
Information
(1) Menu position

To display System Information dialog box, pull down [2.
Diagnose] menu, and select [System Information] on the menu
om
2. Diagnose
ce
nt
e
r.c
Ladder Monitor
Signal Status
PMC Parameter
PMC alarm status
PMC Status
Signal Trace
Signal Analysis
System Information
(2) Displaying dialog box

When [System Information] is selected, the following dialog box
appears.
Press
Enter
Space
or
key to close System Information dialog
box.
.c
nc
System Information

A08B9201J510
Version 01.0
Copyright(C) 1996. FANUC LTD
Fig.3.4.3.9 (a)
Notes
1 The online monitor driver occupies the line while it is
operating.
In this state, other input/output functions cannot use the
line.
If other input/output functions use the line, it is necessary to
display the abovementioned parameter and stop the
online monitor driver.
2 While the online monitor driver is operating, the following
functions cannot be used.
[PMCLAD], [I/O], [EDIT], and [SYSPRM] functions on
CRT/MDI.
[EDIT], [SYSTEM PARAM], and [I/O] functions on
DPL/MDI.
100
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.4.4
The [3. I/O] menu provides the following options:
Input/Output
3. I/O
Load program
Store program
Backup program
om
1. For the [Load program] dialog box

2. For the [Store program] dialog box
3. For the [Backup program] dialog box
3.4.4.1
A program held on the PMC can be transferred to the personal computer.

LOAD OF PROGRAM is used to transfer a ladder program from the
PMC to the personal computer when, for example, using the program with
the online function.
nc
Loading of Program
ce
nt
e
r.c
Notes
1 In case of operating NC, the screen display of NC (Position,
etc.) might slow when using input/output functions (Load
from PMC, Store to PMC, etc.).
There is no problem in the operation of NC. It is
recommended to using input/output functions while NC is
not operating.
2 When screen made by C language executor is displayed,
the communication speed decreases. It is recommended
to use input/output functions after moving to other screens
(Position, etc.).
.c
(1) Menu position

To display the Load program dialog box, display the [3. I/O]
pulldown menu, then select [Load PROGRAM] from the menu.
3. I/O
Load program
Store program
Backup program

Selecting [Load of program] causes the following dialog box to
appear.
101
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
Load program
Transfer data type
F LADDER
f ALL
100%
Exec
Abort
Abort loading
Execute loading
Load
program
size
indicator
om
0%
Cancel
r.c
Close dialog box
Fig.3.4.4.1 (a)
ce
nt
e
(3) Operation
Select a desired button by pressing the
Tab
key, then press the
Enter
key.
Once the program has been loaded normally, the dialog box closes
automatically.
3.4.4.2
nc
Storing to the Program
A program held by the personal computer is transferred to the PMC.

Use Store program to transfer a ladder program from the personal
computer to the PMC to enable, for example, the use of the program with
the online function.
.c
(1) Menu position

To display the Store program dialog box, display the [3. I/O]
pulldown menu, then select [Store program] from the menu.
3. I/O
Load program
Store program
Backup program

Selecting [Store program] causes the following dialog box to appear.
102
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
Store program
Transfer data type
F LADDER
f ALL
100%
Exec
Abort
Abort storing
Cancel
Close dialog box
r.c
Execute storing
Loading
program
size
indicator
om
0%
Fig.3.4.4.2 (a)
ce
nt
e
(3) Operation
Select a desired button by pressing the
Tab
key, then press the
Enter
key.
Once the program has been stored normally, the dialog box closes
automatically.
.c
nc
Notes
S While Online Editor is in progress, a program cannot be
stored to the PMC. To enable storing to the PMC, move to
Ladder Monitor.
S If the CNC is turned off after an edited program is stored to
the PMC but before the program is backed up, the results
of editing will be lost. When storing a program to the CNC,
therefore, backup the program (see Section 3.4.4.3).
3.4.4.3
Program Backup
A program stored in the PMC or which has been edited with the online
function need to be backed up so that the program is not lost when the
power to the CNC is turned off.
Caution
A program being edited or which is currently stored will be
lost if the power to the CNC is turned off before the program
has been backed up. Always back up such a program
before turning off the power to the CNC.
(1) Menu position
To display the program backup dialog box, first display the
pulldown menu for [3.I/O], then select Backup program
103
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3. I/O
Load program
Store program
Backup program
r.c
om

When [Backup program] is selected, a dialog box is displayed
according to the backup destination. See Section 1.2.1.2 for
information about the backup destination for each CNC system
configuration.
(a) CNC system on which a program is backed up to PMC flash
memory
Backup program
ce
nt
e
Set CNC to Emergency Stop status and select EXEC to backup

program to F-ROM.
Exec
nc
Executes backup.
Cancel
Closes the dialog

box.
Fig.3.4.4.3 (a)
Backup program
Sure to backup the program into the OpenCNC system ?
.c
(b) CNC system on which a program is backed up to PMC program

memory on the personal computer
Exec
Executes backup.
Cancel
Closes the dialog

box.
Fig.3.4.4.3 (b)
(3) Operation
1) Click the [Exec] button. The message [Now backup] appears,
and backup is started.
Provided backup is completed
successfully, the message Backup complete appears.
104
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
2) Close the dialog box by clicking the [Cancel] button or pressing

the
Esc
key.
om
Caution
In the case of a CNC system in which programs are backed
up to PMC flash memory, place the CNC in the emergency
stop state before starting backup.
3.4.5
This function establishes or disconnects a communication link between

open CNC and PMC. The online function can be used only while a
communication link is established.
The communication link is established automatically as soon as the
computer is executed.
r.c
Communication
ce
nt
e
(1) Menu position

To display the Communication dialog box, display the [4.
Communication] pulldown menu, then select [Communication]
from the menu.
4. Communication
Communication
.c
nc

(a) Displaying the Communication dialog box
Selecting [Communication] causes the following dialog box to
appear:
Communication
status
Start
Cancel
Fig.3.4.5 (a)
105
Start or stop
communication
Close
communication dialog
box
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.4.6
Examples of Operation
This section provides the following examples of using the online

function:
3.4.6.1
(1) Starting the online functions
When the system is started, the online functions, and
communication are automatically started.
1. File
2. Diagnose
3. I/O
om
Monitoring a Ladder
4. Communication
Communication
r.c
Status
Start
ce
nt
e
Try to connect with PMC . . . 0000 0000
Cancel
F7
F8
F9
F10
Fig.3.4.6.1 (a)
(2) Program loading
.c
nc
If a match with a program on the PMC is confirmed, the subprogram screen

appears. If no match is found, the dialog box shown below appears. From
the dialog box, select [Load] to load a program from the PMC.
N : E3160 selected program is not same.
Load
Load from PMC program memory.
Store
Store to PMC program memory.
Disregard
Quit
Disregard difference.
Quit OnLine function.
Fig.3.4.6.1 (b)
106
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(3) Selecting a subprogram

(a) After a program is loaded from the PMC, the Subprogram list
dialog box appears as shown below:
Subprogram list
om
MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMITSWTHR1

MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMITSWTHL1
PUT DOWN A WORK
MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMITSWTHR2
MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMITSWTHL2
r.c
LEVEL 1
LEVEL 2
P00001 (OPEN RIGHT DOOR )
P00002 (OPEN LEFT DOOR )
S P00010 (GRIP WORK PEICE )
P00011 (PUT WORK PIECE )
P00021 (CLOSE RIGHT DOOR)
P00022 (CLOSE LEFT DOOR )
Cancel
ce
nt
e
OK
Fig.3.4.6.1 (c)
(b) By pressing the
or
key, position the cursor to the
subprogram to be displayed.
(c) Press the
Enter
key.
(d) The ladder diagram for the specified subprogram is displayed.
nc
(4) Monitoring action of ladder diagram

The Ladder Monitor window is displayed as following.
(a) Displaying the Ladder Monitor window
.c
1. File
2. Diagnose
3. I/O
4. Communication
Ladder Monitor
[LEVEL1]
NET 00001-00006
R0000.1
D000
R0000.0
D000
SUB 1
END
F7
F8
F9
F10
SpList Search Symbol Seting
Fig.3.4.6.1 (d)
(b) Monitoring contact and coil status

Contacts and coils are displayed to indicate their status: ON (1)
107
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
or OFF (0). They are displayed with thick or thin line according
to their status as follows.
OFF (0)
Thick
Thin
Thin
Thick
Thick
Thin
om
ON (1)
Thick
Thick
(R)
Thick
Thin
Thin
r.c
(S)
Thin
(c) Moving in the ladder

The area displayed on the window can be moved by
cursor-up/down key and
Page
Up
Page
Down
Function key
F8
ce
nt
e
[Search] is useful to jump directly to your destination.

(d) Searching for a net
To move to a desired position, enter the number of the net to be
displayed, its address, or functional instruction number (Sxxx).
Then, press function key F8 [SEARCH].
(e) Opening the Display setting dialog box
Pressing function key F10 [SET] causes the Display setting
dialog box to appear.
nc
Display setting
Ladder Mode
F Online Editor
F Symbol
f Address
f Relay Comment
f Symbol & Address
OK
Function Parameter
j Display
.c
f Ladder Monitor
Cancel
Fig.3.4.6.1 (e)
(f) Displaying functional instruction parameters

Position the cursor to Function Parameter and check
Display. Then, press the
108
Enter
key to close the Display
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
setting dialog box. The functional instruction parameters

appear as shown below:
-OFF
-
RST
SUB 36
0002
ADDB
TCTRL-1
ACT
TCNT-1
[
12]
om
0000000001
NXT-TCNT
[
TCNT-1
r.c
Contents of address
13]
Contents of address
NXT-TCNT
ce
nt
e
Fig.3.4.6.1 (f)
(g) Changing the symbol/comment display mode

Open the Display setting dialog box again. Position the cursor
to Address in the Symbol & Comment Display field. Press
the
Enter
key to close the Display setting dialog box. The
contact, coil, and functional instruction parameters appear,

together with PMC addresses, as shown below:
RST
nc
R9091.0
ACT
R0112
[
12]
0000000001
R0114
[
w
w
0002
ADDB
.c
R0103.2
SUB 36
13]
Fig.3.4.6.1 (g)
(5) Checking the PMC status

(a) Displaying the Status window
Select [2. Diagnose] from the menu bar. Then, select PMC
status. The Status window appears as shown below:
109
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
Status
Series/Edition
4066/10
SCAN TIME
CUR
MAX
MIN
0ms
0ms
0ms
ce
nt
e
r.c
Date/Time
00/00/00
00:00:00
om
PMC TYPE
PMC-RB4
Fig.3.4.6.1 (h)
nc
(b) Checking the alarm state

When the PMC enters the alarm state, the color of the PMC alarm
icon changes from gray to yellow. Should this occur, select [2.
Diagnose] and open the PMC alarm message dialog box. Then,
check the details of the alarm state. (For details of icons, see (2),
Displaying the PMC status (icon) in Section 3.4.1.2.)
PMC alarm message
.c
ER32 NO I/O DEVICE
Ok
Fig.3.4.6.1 (i)
(c) Checking whether a program is running

While a ladder program is running, the icon shown in Fig. 3.4.6.1
(j) is visible. When no ladder program is running, the icon
indicated in Fig. 3.4.6.1. (k) is visible. (For details of icons, see
(2), Displaying the PMC status (icon) in Section 3.4.1.2.)
110
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
Program on
PMC is running.
Program on
PMC is stopped.
Fig. 3.4.6.1 (j)
Fig. 3.4.6.1 (k)
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
To change the ladder program execution status, select [2.

Diagnose] then use the RUN/STOP the ladder dialog box.
(d) Displaying the communication status
While communication with the PMC is being performed, the icon
shown in Fig. 3.4.6.1 (l) is visible. When communication with
the PMC has not been established, the icon indicated in Fig.
3.4.6.1 (m) is visible. (For details of icons, see (2), Displaying
the PMC status (icon) in Section 3.4.1.2.)
Communication
is active.
Fig. 3.4.6.1 (l)
Communication
is stopped.
Fig. 3.4.6.1 (m)
When changing the status of the communication being performed

with the PMC, use the [4. Communication] dialog box.
.c
nc
(6) Monitoring signals

(a) Opening Signal Status window
Pull down the [2. Diagnose] menu, select [Signal Status] from the
menu, the Signal Status window is displayed,
Signal Status
G00000
G00001
G00002
G00003
G00004
G00005
G00006
G00007
G00008
G00009
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Fig.3.4.6.1 (n)
and the functions of function keys change as following.
111
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
F4
Symbol
F8
Search
F10
Wrt On
or
or
F4
Adress
F10
WrtOff
om
Fig.3.4.6.1 (o)
(b) Searching Address
Enter R0.0 and press function key
[Search], the address
F8
r.c
R00000 is displayed at top of the window, and the cursor moves

onto signal of R00000.0.
ce
nt
e
Signal Status
R00000
R00001
R00002
R00003
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
:
:
:
42
00
00
00
R00009
00
nc
Fig.3.4.6.1 (p)
(c) Displaying symbol
.c
Function key
[Symbol] displays symbols of addresses on
F4
the window, just above the corresponding signal. Symbols

defined for byte address are also displayed just above their
addresses on the window. When the symbols are displayed, the
function key
changes to [Adress] which hides the symbols.
F4
bit symbols
byte symbol
Signal Status
ON OFF
1
0
:
CONST
R00000
R00001
00
R00004
00
Fig.3.4.6.1 (q)
112
42
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(d) Unlocking write-protection

Press function key
[Wrt On] to unlock write protection of
F10
the contents of addresses displayed on the window. The color of

cursor changes to red from yellow. And the function key
F10
changes to [WrtOff].
r.c
om
Warning
Signal status changes should always be made with extreme
care. Signal status changes can have serious and
unforeseen results on a control system, and on the process
to which it applies, if they are improperly used. It is
recommended that these functions not be used with people
near the equipment.
(e) Changing status
Move the cursor in the window by the cursor keys,

to the signal you want to change, then press
ce
nt
e
Page
Down
make the signal status change.
Enter
Page
Up
Enter
and
key to
key turns a signal status ON
which was OFF, and turns a signal status OFF which was ON.
Signal Status
nc
CONST
R00000
42
R00001
02
R00004
00
.c
w
w
w
ON OFF
1
0
:
Fig.3.4.6.1 (r)
Note
Some signals may not change their status even if you
change them, because the Ladder diagram writes the
signals frequently, or the signals are frequently updated by
NC, MMC, or the external I/O devices such as I/O-Link: NC
writes signals on F-address, MMC on M-address, and the
external I/O devices on X-address.
(f) Enabling write-protection again
Press function key
F10
[WrtOff] to re-protect the contents of
addresses on the window from unforeseen changes. The color of

cursor returns to yellow from red. And the function key
returns to [Wrt On].
113
F10
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(g) Hiding Signal Status window

Pull down the [2. Diagnose] menu, select [Ladder Monitor] from
the menu, then the Signal Status window disappears.
Note
Non-volatile PMC address T, C, K and D which is called
PMC parameter has special window to display and modify
them (see 3.4.3.3 for detail).
r.c
om
(7) Backing up a program

Back up the results of editing performed with the online function to
prevent the results from being lost when the power to the CNC is
turned off. The results of editing will be lost if the power to the CNC
is turned off without performing backup.
(a) Displaying the program backup dialog box
Open [3.I/O] on the pull down menu, then select Backup
program. The dialog box shown below appears. (The message
displayed in the dialog box varies with the CNC system.)
ce
nt
e
Backup program
Set CNC to Emergency Stop status and select EXEC to

backup program to FROM.
Exec
Cancel
.c
nc
Fig.3.4.6.1 (s)
(b) Performing backup

Click the [Exec] button. The message Now backup... appears,
and backup is started.
Provided backup is completed
successfully, the message Backup complete appears.
(c) Closing the dialog box
Close the dialog box by clicking the [Cancel] button or pressing
the
Esc
key.
(8) Ending the on-line function

(a) Ending the on-line function
Select [1. FILE] from the menu bar. Then, select [Exit].
A message dialog box appears as shown below. Select [OK] to
end the on-line function.
Are you sure you want to exit ?
OK
Fig.3.4.6.1 (t)
114
Cancel
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.5
OFF-LINE FUNCTION
3.5.1
When OffLine Function is selected from the online function menu, the
following offline menu screen appears.
General
om
Press the function key corresponding to the desired function. The

corresponding screen will appear.
OFFLINE MENU
RB4 (STEP SEQ)
[C: DATASAMPLE ]
EDIT
PRINT
COMPILE
DECOMPILE
I/O
PROGRAM OPTION SETUP
MNEMONIC EDIT
UTILITY
ONLINE FUNCTION
END
ce
nt
e
r.c
F1 KEY :
F2 KEY :
F3 KEY :
F4 KEY :
F5 KEY :
F6 KEY :
F7 KEY :
F8 KEY :
F9 KEY :
F10 KEY :
[C: FLADDER]
EDIT 2 PRINT
3 COMPIL 4 DECOMP5
I/O
6 SETUP 7 MNEEDT8 UTILTY 9 ONLINE 10
END
Fig.3.5.1 Off-line Menu Screen
3.5.2
nc
The source file of a sequence program is edited.
Editing
.c
(1) Start
[Operation]
1) Select [EDIT] from the main menu indicated below.
OFFLINE MENU
RB4 (STEP SEQ)
[C: FLADDER]
[C: DATASAMPLE ]
F1 KEY :
F2 KEY :
F3 KEY :
F4 KEY :
F5 KEY :
F6 KEY :
F7 KEY :
F8 KEY :
F9 KEY :
F10 KEY :
EDIT 2 PRINT
EDIT
PRINT
COMPILE
DECOMPILE
I/O
PROGRAM OPTION SETUP
MNEMONIC EDIT
UTILITY
ONLINE FUNCTION
END
3 COMPIL 4 DECOMP5
I/O
Fig.3.5.2 (a) Off-line Menu
115
END
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
2) The following editing menu screen appears:

EDIT
RB4 (STEP SEQ)
1 TITLE
om
TITLE
LADDER DIAGRAM
SYMBOL & COMMENT
MESSAGE
I/O MODULE
SYSTEM PARAMETER
END
r.c
F1 KEY :
F2 KEY :
F3 KEY :
F4 KEY :
F5 KEY :
F6 KEY :
F10 KEY :
[C: FLADDER]
2 LADSEFC 3 SYMBOL4 MESSAG5 MODULE6 SYSPRM7
10
END
Fig.3.5.2(b) Editing Menu
ce
nt
e
3) Select data to be edited with the corresponding function key.

4) The editing screen for the selected data appears. For example, the
screen below is displayed when [TITLE] is selected.
EDIT (TITLE)
1)
2)
3)
4)
RB4 (STEP SEQ)
MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME :

MACHINE TOOL NAME
: FANUC PMCMODEL RC4 & F16MB
PMC & NC NAME
:
PMC PROGRAM NO
:
5) EDITION NO
6) PROGRAM DRAWING NO
7) DATA OF PROGRAMMING
:
:
:
8) PROGRAM DESIGNED BY
9) ROM WRITTEN BY
:
:
10) REMARKS
nc
.c
w
w
w
[C: FLADDER]
10
END
Fig.3.5.2(c) Editing Title
(2) Termination
[Operation]
1) Select [END] or press the
Esc
key on the editing screen.
2) The following message appears:

F1
F2
F3
Save (update) & quit

Quit
Edit
3) Press the desired function key.
116
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(i) When UPDATE is selected, the editing operation is

terminated after the results of editing are written to a file.
(ii) When QUIT is selected, the editing operation is terminated
without writing the results of editing to a file.
(iii) When EDIT is selected, the editing is continued.
4) When UPDATE or QUIT is selected, the display returns to the
editing menu screen.
(i) To continue editing, select the appropriate function key.
om
(ii) To terminate editing, select [END]. The display returns to the

main menu.
3.5.2.1
Title data represents the titles of sequence programs generated by a

machine tool builder.
r.c
Title Data Editing
ce
nt
e
(1) Start
[Operation]
1) Select [TITLE] on the editing menu screen.
2) The following title editing screen appears:
EDIT (TITLE)
1)
2)
3)
4)
RB4 (STEP SEQ)
MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME :

MACHINE TOOL NAME
: FANUC PMCMODEL RC4 & F16MA
PMC & NC NAME
:
PMC PROGRAM NO
:
:
:
:
.c
nc
5) EDITION NO
6) PROGRAM DRAWING NO
7) DATA OF PROGRAMMING
[C: FLADDER]
8) PROGRAM DESIGNED BY
9) ROM WRITTEN BY
:
:
10) REMARKS
10
END
Fig.3.5.2.1
(2) Input
[Operation]
1)
Select an input item (displayed in reverse video) with the

and
keys.
2) Enter data.
The maximum number of characters usable for each title data
item is listed below.
MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME : 32 characters
MACHINE TOOL NAME
: 32 characters
CNC & NC NAME
: 32 characters
PMC PROGRAM NO
: 4 characters
EDITION NO
: 2 characters
117
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
PROGRAM DRAWING NO
DATE OF PROGRAMMING
PROGRAM DESIGNED BY
ROM WRITTEN BY
REMARKS
:
:
:
:
:
32 characters
16 characters
32 characters
32 characters
32 characters
(3) Termination
[Operation]
Esc
key to return to the editing menu
screen.
2) The following message appears.
F1
F2
F3

Quit
Edit
om
1) Select [END] on press the
r.c
3) Press the desired function key. The system returns to the editing
menu.
Ladder Diagram/Step
Sequence Editing
(1) A program configuration screen

This screen lists subprograms, and supports the selection and editing
of a target subprogram.
ce
nt
e
3.5.2.2
EDIT (LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) PMCRC4 (STEP SEQ) [C:FLADDER

PROGRAM: (STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)
LEVEL1 j
P1
j
P8
j
P21
j
j
j
P101 j
LEVEL2 j LEVEL3
P2
j P4
j P5
P9
j P14
j P15
P22
j P24
j P25
j
j
j
j
P202 j]P304 j]P405
j P6
j P16
j P26
j
j
j]P406
j P7
j P17
j P27
j
j
j]P407
.c
nc
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
SprogP1
1 ADRESS 2
(a) Screen display

Screen display
6 DELETE 7
9 NEW
10 ZOOM
(Pxxx represents a subprogram number)

Meaning
Display by [ZOOM] or
LEVEL1
the 1st ladder level
ladder diagram
LEVEL2
the 2nd ladder level
ladder diagram
LEVEL3
the 3rd ladder level (Note 1) ladder diagram
Pxxx
a subprogram
ladder diagram
j] Pxxx
a subprogram
step sequence diagram
Pxxx (Note 2) a subprogram in editing
Pxxx
a duplicate subprogram
118
Enter
step sequence diagram

ladder or step seqence
diagram
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
Notes
1 The 3rd ladder level can be omitted.
2 If the [ZOOM] key was used to nest a program to a certain
depth, and if the subprogram configuration screen is
displayed upon a single press of the [MAIN] key, the editing
of the subprograms for which the [ZOOM] key was pressed
is suspended. Such subprograms are marked with ].
r.c
om
Following keys are useful in this screen.

Function key
[ADRESS] : Switching address/symbol display
[DELETE] : Deleting a subprogram
[NEW ] : Creating a new subprogram
[ZOOM ] : Modifying a subprogram
Other keys
:
Displaying previous screen
Page
Down
Displaying next screen
ce
nt
e
Page
Up
Meaning of display
EDIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) RC4(STEP SEQ) [C:FLADDER]
nc
EDIT
:
(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) :
PMC-RC4 (STEP SEQ)
:
[A:FLADDER
:
Editing screen
The list screen of subprogram
Setting a model
Current directory
.c
PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)
PROGRAM: Remarks which is one of the title data
jLEVEL1
jLEVEL2
jLEVEL3
LEVEL1 : The 1st level of ladder

LEVEL2 : The 2nd level of ladder
LEVEL3 : The 3rd level of ladder
j P0001
j]P0002
j P0004
j P0005
j P0006 j P0007
j : a subprogram of the ladder

j] : a subprogram of the step sequence
(b) Creating a new subprogram
Press the [NEW] key.
New program name ?
119
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
Enter the number of the subprogram to be created (P200, for

example).
Program Type ?
F1
F2
Ladder
Step sequence
(c) Modifying a subprogram

Key in the number of the subprogram to be modified (P200, for
Enter
key. Alternatively,
om
example), then press the [ZOOM] or
position the cursor to P200 then press the [ZOOM] or
Enter
key.
r.c
If a subprogram number marked with ] (P21, for example) is

selected, the following message is displayed:
Editing this subprogram is not completed.
Continue to select it ?
(Yes/No) [Y]
ce
nt
e
To continue the editing session using the results obtained from

suspended previous editing session, press the
Enter
key. To
cancel the results of the previous editing session and edit the
subprogram from its original state, enter N .
(2) Editing a ladder diagram

(a) Start
Display the program list screen. Position the cursor to the
program indicated by j, then press the [ZOOM] or
Enter
key.
nc
The ladder diagram editing screen, shown below, appears.
EDIT (LADDER) ORIGinal RC4
.c
[C: DATASAMPLEP1.#LA]PMCRC4
SUB71
SP
NET 0000100003 STEP 00010/32000 EMS
P0001
R000.0 ACT
SUB 8
MOVE
1100
0111
D000
D010
AD=X0.0
CCO=TEST DATA NO.1
CO=SAMPLE
00001 RC0=RELAY SAMPLE
1
5 function 6
(a)
(b)
(c)
P0001
Y000.0
X000.0
w
w
<0>[C:FLADOER]
000014/000014
000012
8
(d)
10 comand
Fig.3.5.2.2 (a) Ladder Diagram Editing Screen
(i) When the [View] command is used, a different line is shown.

(For the [View] command, see (j) Combining a sequence
program
120
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(ii) The line shows the name of the file which is being edited,
number of the net which is displayed on the screen, and the
number of program steps/maximum number of steps that can
be edited.
(iii) The line shows a sub-program number (P address) or label
number (L address).
(iv) The lines show a symbol and comment added to the data at
the address selected by the cursor.
AD=X000.0 :
Address on which the cursor is

placed
2)
SY=SAMPLE:
00001
Symbol data
Total number of symbols
3)
RCO=RELAY
SAMPLE
:
00012
r.c
Relay comment data

Total character numbers of relay
comment
CCO=TEST DATA No.

1 :
Coil comment data
0030/00030
Total character number of coil
comment output to object file/Total
character number of coil comment.
ce
nt
e
4)
om
1)
(b) Function key indications and selection

The ladder diagram editing functions correspond to the function
keys as indicated below.
1)
2
2) [COMAND]
2 Delnet
5)
5 function
3 Insert
4 Adress
5 Search
.c
1 insnet
nc
6)
6 Copy
7)
7 Move
8)
or
8 File
8)
or
10 comand
[comand]
9 syEdit
9)
10 Zoom
10)
(R)
5 netcmt
6 page
10
(S)
3) Under condition 1), holding down [SHIFT] lets you select the following items.
1
4) Under condition 2), holding down [SHIFT] lets you select the following items.
5 Gsrch
10 List
3 search
4 cdown
5 cup
7 exclud
10
3 Inselm
10
5) [Delnet]
1 exec
2 cancel
6) [Insert]
1 Insnet
2 Inslin
121
2)
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
7) [Search]
1 top
2 bottom
3 srch
4 wsrch
5 nsrch
6 ssrch
7 cdown
8 cup
10
4 cdown
5 cup
10
8) [Copy] / [Move]
2 cancel
3 search
1 to
*
2 cancel
3 search
4 cdown
5 cup
6 to[1]
7 toorg
* [to-org] is displayed in the [File] command mode only.
om
1 until
10
2 cancel
ce
nt
e
1 exec
r.c
9) [File]
Opens a window in which the name of an input program can be specified. Select desired processing from
a POP-UP menu.
10)[syEdit]
9
10
(c) Ladder program input

For ladder program input, select [LADDER] from the editing
menu. The function key programmer menu is displayed. When
no sequence program has been entered, the screen displays only
the right and left vertical rails of a ladder diagram.
At this stage, program input can be started.
Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to any location in the
ladder diagram.
Examples of basic instruction program input and function
instruction program input are shown below.
.c
nc
Notes
While the function keys of 1) are displayed in ladder diagram editing, a command of 2) can be
executed. For example, entering A and [COMAND] on the 1) screen has the same effect
as selecting F4 [Adress] on the 2) screen. To select a command of 2) in this way, enter the
upper-case letter (not necessarily initial letter) in the corresponding command name shown on
the 2) screen.
122
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(i) Example of basic instruction program input
X0.1
D30.2
F14.2
Y52.7
om
X2.4
ce
nt
e
r.c
[Operation]
1) Move the cursor to the start position, then press
].
[
The [
] symbol appears on the screen. The
message HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL appears
at the lower-right corner of the screen. This message
warns the user that horizontal ladder diagram line
creation is not completed. Enter an address and bit data.
2) Enter X0.1 on the keyboard and press the
Enter
key. The
address is set at the contact, and the cursor moves right.

3) As in 1) and 2), enter contact A of D30.2.
4) Enter contact B of F14.2.
Press [
] and enter address F14.2, then press the
Enter
key. The address is set on contact B and the cursor
.c
nc
moves right.
5) Without moving the cursor, press [
].
A horizontal line segment extending to the right is drawn
automatically and a relay coil symbol appears near the
right vertical rail.
6) Enter address Y52.7, then press the
Enter
key.
The cursor automatically moves to the input start

position on the next line.
7) Next, enter an OR condition.
Press [
] and enter address X2.4, then press the
Enter
key.
The address is set at contact B and the cursor moves right.

8) Press [
] to enter a horizontal line.
To enter a horizontal line, enter a number and press the
horizontal line key [
]. The line segment will be
entered as many times as the number entered. Note,
however, that such a line never exceeds the right vertical
rail.
9) A vertical line extending upward is required for OR.
Press [
] to enter a vertical line extending upward.
(ii) Example of function instruction program input
For function instruction input, press the function key
123
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
[functn]. Next, enter a SUB number, then press the
Enter
key.
MOVE
fff.f
(1)
ffff
(2)
ffff
(3)
ffff
(4)
ffff
r.c
ACT
om
A function instruction can also be entered by entering the

function instruction name or SUB number and pressing the
[functn] key.
If the user does not remember a certain instruction name or
SUB number, a function instruction table that lists function
instructions and corresponding SUB numbers can be
displayed on the screen.
The table can be displayed just by pressing the [functn] key
without entering any data. Then the function instruction
table is automatically displayed.
Press the [functn] key to return to the ladder diagram screen
from the function instruction table.
(SUB 8)
Control condition
ce
nt
e
Output address
Input data address
Loworder 4bit logical
multiplication data
Highorder 4bit logical multiplication data
When entering a function instruction with this function,

enter the parameters of the function instruction vertically
as shown below.
MOVE
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
.c
nc
SUB 8
[Operation]
1) Enter a control condition.
Press [
]. Next, enter an address and bit data, then
press the
Enter
key. The cursor moves right.
2) Enter a function instruction.

Press the [functn] key. Next, enter SUB number 8, then
press the
Enter
key. The function instruction diagram
shown above appears.

3) Enter the parameters of the function instruction.
First, enter the highorder 4bit logical multiplication
data of the first parameter, then press the
Enter
cursor automatically moves downwards.

remaining three parameters one by one.
key. The
Enter the
(iii) Restrictions and notes on ladder editing

[Restrictions]
1) Restrictions related to the ladder 1 net (corresponding to
the portion between the RD and WRT instructions)
124
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
a) When the ladder 1 net exceeds 256 steps (as counted

as steps in the corresponding mnemonic program),
the following message appears:
A limit of 256 steps per net was exceeded.
If there are more than 256 steps, no net is displayed.
2) Restrictions related to a ladder diagram display per
screen
If an attempt is made to display more than 70 ladder net
lines per screen, the error described below occurs.
a) Symptom
(a1) When there are more than 70 lines per net, the
following message appears.
The NET being created is too large.
If 70 lines are exceeded, the following message
appears, and no net is displayed.
A limit of 70 lines per net was exceeded.
(a2) When there are more than 70 lines totaled over two
or more nets, the following message appears.
If 70 lines are exceeded when totaled over two or
more nets, the following message appears for a net
that is the current net when 70 lines are exceeded,
and the display of the current net is discontinued.
The NET is larger than the editing buffer.
In this case, specify the net to be displayed, using
the ladder diagram search function (such as net
number search).
b) How to obtain the number of lines per screen
Even if part of a net is displayed on a screen, all lines
of the net are included in the total for that screen. In
addition, a space line between nets is counted as a
valid line.
The number of lines in each net to be displayed is
determined as follows:
(b1) Basic instructions
One line is comprised of one basic instruction.
.c
1 line
2 lines
(b2) Function instructions

The number of lines in a function instruction is:
The number of control conditions or parameters,
whichever is greater, plus 1
Examples of calculation follow.
When the number of control conditions < number
of parameters
125
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
RST
ACT
SUB 36
ADDB
1004
R000
Number of control conditions = 2

Number of parameters = 4
Number of lines = number of
parameters + 1 = 5 lines
R010
om
R020
When the number of control conditions > number

of parameters
RST
SUB 11
PARI
R100
nc
ce
nt
e
ACT
Number of control conditions = 3

Number of parameters = 1
Number of lines = number of
control conditions + 1 = 5 lines
r.c
O.E
SUB 49
DISP
0011
0003
.c
ACT
(b3) Data table section of function instructions

The data table section of the COD, CODB, or
DISP instruction is calculated as follows:
When the data table is one or two bytes
Number of lines =
number of data tables/6 (+ 1 if there is a
remainder)
D300
000
003
006
009
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
Number of lines in the data table

section = 11/6
= 1 with remainder 5
= 2 lines
When the data table is four bytes

Number of lines =
number of data tables/4 (+ 1 if there is a
remainder)
126
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
RST
SUB 27
CODB
ACT
0005
0007
D300
000
002
004
00000000
00000000
00000000
om
D320
00000000
00000000
Number of lines in the data table

section = 5/4
= 1 with remainder 1
= 2 lines
ce
nt
e
r.c
(b-4) Example of calculating the number of lines per

screen
For the ladder shown below, the number of lines in
the screen display section is obtained as follows:
- The valid nets on the display
screen are nets A and B.
- Number of lines in net A
Function instruction section +
8 lines
data table section = 6 lines
(3+1) (11/6)
- The number of lines in net B is 2.
ACT
SUB 49
DISP
nc
Net A
0011
0003
D300
000
003
006
009
Net B
.c
Screen display section
Net C
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000
c) Examples of symptoms
Example of symptom (a-1)
- The ladder diagram can be edited only when the
total number of message data steps parameter of
the DISP instruction (SUB 49) is less than or equal
to 396. This is because when the total number of
steps is 396, the net consists of 70 lines.
127
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
r.c
om
If a net that consists of a total of 396 steps or more

is created during mnemonic editing, the following
message appears, and the display of the net is
discontinued.
The data table is too large.
Example of symptom (a-2)
- If an attempt is made to enter the net of a function
instruction on the same screen as that of a basic
instruction, the following message is displayed,
and the attempt is rejected.
For example, if the basic instruction net has 68
lines, the MOVE instruction (SUB 8) cannot be
entered, (because the total number of lines exceeds
70). The results of calculation are described
below.
ce
nt
e
Display
screen
RST
SUB 8
.c
nc
MOVE
Number of MOVE
instruction lines =
number of parameters
(4) + 1 = 5
68 + 5 = 73 lines
<Measure>
If the display of the 68-line net is not scrolled, the
MOVE instruction can be entered.
- A basic instruction net cannot be entered together
with another basic-instruction net, if the total
number of lines is greater than 70.
For example, if a 68-line basic-instruction net is
followed by another basic-instruction net, the
element of the third line of the latter net cannot be
entered.
Display
screen
68-line net
68-line net
No more lines
can be entered.
<Measure>
If the display of the 68-line net is not scrolled, the
latter basic instruction can be entered.
128
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
SUB 27
ACT CODB
000 00000000 00000000

002 00000000 00000000
&
Number of CODB
instruction lines = 55
ce
nt
e
Display
screen
0004
0200
4 bytes
200 data tables
r.c
RST
om
- When the CODB instruction (SUB 27) and DISP

instruction (SUB 49) are edited on the same
screen, if an attempt is made to enter 396 as the
total number of message data steps for the DISP
instruction (SUB 49), the following message
appears, and the attempt is rejected.
This symptom also occurs in a combination of two
DISP instructions and a combination of CODB and
COD instructions.
For example, if the number of tables for the CODB
instruction is 200, the total number of steps for the
DISP instruction can be only 66 at maximum. The
calculation results are shown below.
.c
nc
196 00000000 00000000

198 00000000 00000000
ACT
SUB 49
DISP
Function instruction section

=4 parameters + 1
Data table section
=200/4 = 50
Calculation of DISP
instruction data items that
can be entered
Function instruction sections

=3 parameters + 1
Number of remaining lines
=70 - 55 - 4
= 11 lines
Data tables
=11*6 = 66
<Measure>
Moving the DISP instruction to the top of the display
screen makes it possible to set the total number of
steps to 396.
3) Restriction on the maximum number of steps
The maximum number of ladder steps that can be edited is as
follows:
Without EMS : 21840 steps
With EMS
: 32000 steps
Note, however, that the maximum allowable number of steps
can decrease, depending on how memory is used.
If a ladder being edited exceeds the maximum allowable
number of steps, editing is disabled and the following
message is displayed:
MNEMONIC BUFFER OVER
129
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
r.c
om
Notes
1 An attempt to scroll a program on the screen with a scroll key
or other keys fails if the ladder program is incomplete (for
example, without addresses) or invalid.
A correct ladder program must be created before the screen
can be scrolled.
2 Up to eight contacts and one coil can be entered in one line
on the screen.
However, this restriction does not apply to a sequence
program created in mnemonic format. When a sequence
program created in mnemonic format exceeds this limit, it is
displayed over several lines with a continuation symbol.
This continuation symbol cannot be deleted with
[
]. Use [Delnet] (net deletion) to delete this
symbol. (See Item (6) in this section.)
ce
nt
e
(d) Replacing sections of a sequence program

Lines in an already created sequence program can be replaced in
the same way as described in Item (c) above.
Move the cursor to a program section to be changed, then enter
new data.
(e) Sequence program addition
Press the [comand] soft key of the function key programmer
menu and use the function keys indicated below.
To terminate the programmer menu, press the
1 insnet
2 Delnet
nc
[Insert]
3 Insert
.c
1 insnet
2 inslin
Esc
key.
4 Adress
5 Search
6 Copy
7 Move
8 File
9 syEdit
10
10
3 inselm
As described below, there are four types of sequence program

addition in a ladder diagram.
(i) Example: when a relay contact is added on a line
D Addition on a line
To be added
Move the cursor to the position to add item(s), then enter

item(s) in the way described in Item (c) above.
D When a vertical line affects addition
130
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
To be added
Cursor
om
[Operation]
1) Move the cursor to the position shown above.
ce
nt
e
r.c
2) Press [
] to delete the vertical line to the left
extending upward. This disappears.
3) Press [
] to create a vertical line extending upward
]. A
to the right of the cursor, then press [
horizontal line and vertical line are created.
4) Move the cursor to the point on the line where a contact
is to be added.
5) Press [
] to add a contact.
(ii) When a line is added vertically
.c
nc
To be added
To add a line vertically, an area is required for the addition.

To create such an area, the lower part of the ladder diagram
must be shifted down by one line. To do this, move the cursor
to any point in the ladder diagram enclosed in dashed lines,
then press the [insnet] key.
Each time the [insnet] key is pressed, the lower part of the
ladder diagram is shifted one line down to create an area for
addition. Make an addition in this area.
After line addition, any remaining area (as in the case where
two lines are added in an area large enough for three lines) can
be left as it is.
[Operation]
1) Move the cursor to any point in the ladder diagram
enclosed in dashed lines.
2) Press [insnet].
The lower part of the ladder diagram is shifted down by
one line.
3) When the [insnet] key is pressed without entering a
numeric value, one line is inserted.
4) When the [insnet] key is pressed after entering a numeric
value, the number of lines specified is inserted.
131
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
5) Move the cursor to the desired position and press

[
]. Then set address data and press the
Enter
key.
The cursor moves right.

] soft key to create an OR circuit.
6) Press the [
om
(iii) Line insertion in a single-net sequence program

Blank lines are inserted one by one.
[Operation]
1) Enter the number of lines to be inserted, then press the
[inslin] key. The entered number of lines is inserted.
(When the [inslin] key is pressed without entering a
number, just one line is added.)
r.c
ce
nt
e
Cursor
If the [inslin] key is pressed when the cursor is positioned

as shown in the left-hand figure, a blank line is inserted
as shown in the right-hand figure.
.c
nc
(iv) Element insertion in a single-net sequence program

Elements are added one by one.
[Operation]
1) Enter the number of elements to be inserted, then press
the [inselm] key. The entered number of elements is
inserted.
If the character
is prefixed to the number of
elements to be inserted and the [inselm] key is pressed,

elements are inserted after the cursor.
(If the [inselm] key is pressed without entering the
number of elements to be inserted, just one element is
inserted.)
Cursor
If the [inselm] key is pressed when the cursor is placed

as shown in the left-hand figure, an element is inserted
as shown in the following figure. The element is inserted
before the cursor.
Cursor
132
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
If the character A is entered and the [inselm] key is

pressed when the cursor is placed as shown in the
left-hand figure, an element is inserted as shown in the
right-hand figure. The element is inserted after the
cursor.
(f) Deletion in a sequence program
] :
] :
Deletes a vertical line extending upward to

the left of the cursor.
Deletes a vertical line extending upward to
the right of the cursor.
r.c
om
(i) A program can be partially deleted by positioning the cursor

at the location to be deleted and pressing one of the below
three soft keys
[
] : Deletes a horizontal line, relay contact, relay
coil, etc.
(ii) Use the [Delnet] key to delete a program net (section from an
RD instruction to a WRT instruction).
ce
nt
e
(iii) Multiple nets can be deleted one by one.

1 Insnet
[Delnet]
1 exec
2 Delnet
3 Insert
4 Adress
5 Search
6 Copy
7 Move
8 File
9 syEdit
10
3 search
4 cdown
5 cup
7 exclud
10
2 cancel
.c
nc
[Operation]
1) Deletion
Move the cursor to the net to be deleted, then press the
[Delnet] key. The net to be deleted is displayed in red.
2) Deleting multiple nets
Move the cursor by using keys such as the cursor down
key, [c-down] key, or [search] key, then display the nets
to be deleted in red. If the [c-down] key is pressed after
a numeric value is entered, the cursor moves as many
times as the entered numeric value.
3) Execution :
Press the [exec] key.
Cancellation:
Press the [cancel] key.
Deletion except: Press the [exclud] key. Exclude nets
except specified nets in 2).
4) When the nets to be deleted are known beforehand, move
the cursor to the first net to delete, enter the number of
nets to delete, then press the [Delnet] key. With this
operation, steps 1) and 2) can be omitted.
(g) Searching in a sequence program
A sequence program can be searched using the following soft
keys:
1 Insnet
[Search]
1 top
2 Delnet
3 Insert
4 Adress
5 Search
6 Copy
7 Move
8 File
9 syEdit
10
3 srch
4 wsrch
5 nsrch
6 scrch
7 cdown
8 cup
10
2 bottom
133
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(i) [top]
When this key is pressed, the start of the sequence program
is displayed on the screen and the cursor is moved to the start
of the program.
(ii) [bottom]
When this key is pressed, the end of the sequence program is
displayed on the screen and the cursor is moved to the end of
the program.
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
(iii) [srch]
Search operation using this key searches the program for a
specified address from the current location for the cursor on
the screen to the end of the program. When an address is
found, it is displayed on the screen. An address to search for
can be specified in one of two ways.
1) Address specification using the cursor
Move the cursor to the relay contact of the address to
search for, then press the [srch] key. This operation
searches the program for the specified address from the
current location of the cursor on the screen to the end of
the program.
If the specified address is found, the section of the
program containg the address is displayed on the screen.
The cursor is automatically positioned at the found
address.
If the search operation fails to find the specified address,
the cursor does not move.
To terminate searching, press the
F54.1
nc
X2.0
D35.3
.c
G17.2
X4.2
X14. 0
F54.1
X0. 4
X0. 5
Y52.3
Esc
key.
G11.6
Y49.1
D32.0
When the same address

as this address is to be
searched for, move the
cursor to this position,
then press the [srch] key.
G43.1
D21.2
When the same address

is found, the cursor
moves to this location.
2) Address specification by address input

Enter the address to find with the keyboard, then press
the [srch] key.
This operation searches the program for the specified
address from the current location of the cursor on the
screen to the end of the program.
When the specified address is found, the section of the
program containing the address is displayed on the
screen. The cursor is automatically positioned at the
found address.
If the search operation fails to find the specified address,
an error indication appears.
134
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
(iv) [w-srch] (WRT coil search)

This key is used to search the program for a relay coil with
a specified address from the current location of the cursor on
the screen to the end of the program. When a relay coil is
found, it is displayed on the screen. If multiple relay coils are
found, the coil which is the closest to the cursor is displayed.
The address of a relay coil to search for can be specified in
one of two ways.
1) Address specification using the cursor
Move the cursor to the relay coil with the address to
search for, then press the [w-srch] key.
This operation searches the program for relay coils with
the specified address from the current location of the
cursor on the screen to the end of the program.
When a relay coil with the specified address is found, the
section of the program containing it is displayed on the
screen and the cursor is positioned at the relay coil.
If the search operation fails to find a relay coil with the
specified address, an error indication appears.
2) Address specification by address input
Enter the address of relay coils to search for with the
keyboard, then press the [w-srch] key.
This operation searches the program for relay coils with
the specified address from the current location of the
cursor on the screen to the end of the program.
When a relay coil with the specified address is found, the
section of the program containing it is displayed on the
screen and the cursor is positioned at the relay coil.
If the search operation fails to find a relay coil with the
specified address, an error indication appears.
.c
nc
(v) [n-srch] (net-number search)

This key displays those ladders that have a specified net
number, starting from the top of the screen. If the [n-srch] key
is pressed without entering a number, the display is advanced
by one net.
(vi) [s-srch] (function-instruction search)
This key searches for function instructions. Searching is
performed by entering a function instruction name or
number, then pressing the [s-srch] key. If the [s-srch] key is
pressed while the cursor is on a function instruction, function
instructions with the same number as that function
instruction are searched for.
(vii) Search operation using the cursor keys (
D Enter an address or symbol, then press a cursor key. The

address is searched for.
D Enter a NET No., then press a cursor key. The NET No. is
searched for.
D Enter a function instruction name, or enter S followed by
a function instruction number, then press a cursor key. The
function instruction is searched for.
Example: Enter S1, then press a cursor key. The function
instruction END1 is searched for,
(viii) Searching in all main/sub-programs(G-SRCH)
Global searching in all main/sub-programs is enabled.
135
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
om
D The range of search

All programs, which include a currently displayed
subprogram, are searched for.
The subprogram is searched for in the ascending order of
P address.
a) From the current cursor position to bottom of currently
opening subprogram.
b) From next numbered subprogram to last numbered one.
c) From LEVEL1 to subprogram of which P address is
small next to a).
d) From top to cursor position in subprogram of a).
G-SRCH mode continues unless pushing the
r.c
or the [cancel] key.
key
Esc
1st net of LEVEL1

5)
ce
nt
e
6)
7)
8)
cursor
1)
displaying on
the screen
Whole
program
one of
subprograms
2)
3)
Final net of the maximum numbered

subprogram
nc
4)
(Searching in the order of 1) to 8))
D Searching result
.c
When the object of search is found, the cursor will move

to the position.
In case of finding in another program, the program which
is currently displayed will be closed.
Then, the program which contains the object, will be
opened to display the object position with the cursor.
At this time, whether to save or quit modifications is
inquired, in case there are modifications in the program to
be closed.
When two or more objects exist, the result of search are

displayed in order of 1) one by one.
D Operation
The global search is operated with the following function
key.
1)
1
5 function
or
or
10 comand
[comand]
136
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
2) [comand]
1 insnet
2 Deinet
3 Insert
4 Adress
5 Search
6 Copy
7 Move
8 File
9 syEdit
10
3) Select the [G-srch] with pushing the [SHIFT] (the following

will be displayed) in state of 2)
1
5 Gsrch
10 List
4)
1
3 srch
4 wsrch
6 ssrch
9 cancel
10
+ [COMMAND])
r.c
(Shortcut command is G
om
[Gsrch]
ce
nt
e
a) Starting of G-SRCH mode

It switches to the mode of G-SRCH by the operation
of 1) 3).
After that, all programs are searched unless quitting
G-SRCH mode.
b) Execution of search
Refer to (c) [search]/(d) [w-srch]/(e) [s-srch] in
(7)Searching in a sequence program, for how to
specify the target of global search.
c) End of G-SRCH mode
G-SRCH mode is ended by pushing
Esc
or [cancel]
key. The end method is different individually.
w
w
w
Esc
- [cancel]=
.c
nc
Only G-SRCH mode is ended. The

program on the opening now is the state
as it is.
It returns to the program which was

opened at beginning the G-SRCH
mode. The program on the opening now
closes.
Whether will save or quit modifications
is inquired, in case there are
modifications in the program which is
currently displayed.
(h) Copying sections of a sequence program

A multiple-net sequence program can be copied net by net.
Specify the net to be copied. The net can be copied in the same
file that is being edited or into another file. The selected net
remains as it was.
137
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
File which is being edited
om
[to fil]
r.c
[Copy]
Range to be
copied
[until]
Specified file
Fig.3.5.2.2 (b)
2 Deinet
3 Insert
4 Adress
5 Search
6 Copy
7 Move
8 File
9 syEdit
10
ce
nt
e
1 insnet
[Copy]
1 until
2 cancel
3 search
4 cdown 5 cup
10
1 to
2 cancel
3 search
4 cdown 5 cup
6 tofil
7 toorg
10
.c
nc
[Operation]
1) Copying a net
Place the cursor on the net to be copied and press the [Copy]
key. The selected net is displayed in yellow.
2) Copying two or more nets
To select the nets to be copied, first move the cursor to the
first net of the range to be copied, then move the cursor to the
net at the other end of the range to be copied by pressing the
cursor up, cursor down, [cup], [cdown], or [search] key.
The selected nets are displayed in yellow.
Alternatively, enter a numeric value and press the [cup] or
[cdown] key. The cursor moves according to the specified
value.
3) Setting the net or nets to be copied
Press the [until] key.
4) Specifying the copy destination using the [to] key (Copying
the net or nets in the same file)
Move the cursor to the copy destination in the same file and
press the [to] key. The selected net or nets are copied
immediately above the copy destination specified by the
cursor. To copy the selected net or nets two or more times,
enter the number of times they are to be copied before
pressing the [to] key.
5) Specifying the copy destination using the [tofil] key
(Copying the net or nets into another file)
1) Press the [tofil] key. The following message is
displayed.
138
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
If no program is specified, LATMP is created.
(LATMP file: Temporary work file used in editing)
2) Enter the name of the file into which the net(s) is to be

copied and press the
Enter
key.
3) Select desired processing from the following POPUP

menu:
Exec
Cancel
om
F1
F2
The file already exists.

F1 Update
Quit
Append
Updates the selected file. The new copy

replaces the previous data of the file.
Cancels output to the selected file.
Appends the copy to the selected file.
ce
nt
e
F2
F3
r.c
4) If the selected destination file is present, the following

POPUP menu is displayed. Select desired processing
from the menu.
6) If the nets to be copied are known beforehand, place the

cursor on the first net to be copied, enter the number of nets
to be copied, then press the [Copy] key. Steps 1), 2), and 3)
can be skipped.
Note
Incorrect nets cannot be copied.
.c
nc
(i) Moving sections of a sequence program

A multiplenet sequence program can be moved net by net.
Specify the net or nets to be copied. The selected net or nets can
be moved to another place in the same file that is being edited or
output to another file. The selected net or nets are deleted.
The only difference between copying and moving is that the
selected net or nets are deleted in moving.
1 insnet
2 Delnet
3 Insert
4 Adress
5 Search
6 Copy
7 Move
9 syEdit
10
[Move]
1 until
8 File
2 cancel
3 search
4 cdown 5 cup
10
2 cancel
3 search
4 cdown 5 cup
6 tofil
7 toorg
10
1 to
[Operation]
Substituting [Move] for [Copy], follow steps 1) to 6) for
copying.
Note
Incorrect nets cannot be moved.
139
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(j) Combining a sequence program

A source program can be combined to another source program
that is being edited.
The source program to be combined can be displayed and edited
separately, then combined to the original source program that is
being edited.
Original screen
View screen
[VIEW]
File to be
combined
Input
Edit
[TO]
Combine
r.c
Section to be
edited
File to be
combined
(view file)
om
[TO]
Combine
File being
edited
(original file)
Source
file
Edited file
to be
combined
ce
nt
e
Fig.3.5.2.2 (C) Combining a Sequence Program
nc
Programs of model which is different from the specified model

can be specified to the files of connection [TO] or enter [VIEW].
(If a disagreement is found, a warning message is displayed.)
In this case, no errors will be detected even if the file to be
combined contains an address range or function instruction
format that does not agree with the specified model. (The error
will be detected in compilation.) When ignoring the warning
message, be extremely careful to continue the operation.
i) Function keys
2 Delnet
.c
1 Insnet
3 Insert
4 Adress
5 Search
6 Copy
7 Move
8 File
9 syEdit
10
ORIGINAL=Initial display at opening the file

VIEW=Display opened by [File] command
Model of PMC edited in VIEW screen
EDIT (LADDER) View
RC4
[C: DATASAMPLEP1.#LA]PMCRC4
SUB71
SP
<0>[C:FLADOER]
NET 0000100003 STEP 00010/32000 EMS
P0001
P0001
Y000.0
X000.0
AD=X0.0
CCO=TEST DATA NO.1
CO=SAMPLE
00001 RC0=RELAY SAMPLE
1
5 function 6
000014/000014
000012
8
10 comand
Fig.3.5.2.2 (d) Screen Displayed when a File is Opened by the [File]

Command
140
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
ii) Operation flowchart for combining a sequence program
Start ladder diagram

editing (original screen)
om
Specify an insertion point (The data is

inserted immediately above the cursor.)
Specify a view file
<POPUP menu>
(View)
Shows the ladder diagram
of the file to be combined
(View screen)
Cancels file input
Combines the file with the

Ladder program on the
original screen
1. The file is
immediately
combined. The data
of the file is not
displayed.
nc
1. Check the displayed

data of the file to be
combined
2. Edit the data of the file
to be combined and
combine it
(To)
ce
nt
e
(Cancel)
r.c
Press the [File] key
.c
Edit the Ladder program

on the view screen
(Normal editing)
Press the
<POP UP menu>
(Save)
key to terminate editing

(Quit)
Cancels the
edited data
Saves the Ladder

program shown on the
view screen
Esc
*1
(Edit)
(Temp)
Saves the data in

a provisional
work file
Returns to the
ladder diagram
screen (The view
screen is continued.)
*1: The name of the temporary work file is LATMP.

Fig.3.5.2.2 (e) Operation Flowchart for Combining a Sequence Program
141
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
iii) Examples
Example 1. Combining a sequence program file
[Operation]
1) Place the cursor on the insertion point on the original
screen.
2) Select [File].
3) Enter the name of the file to be combined and press the
Enter
key.
F1
F2
F3
To
View
Cancel
om
4) From the following menu, select F1 (To).
ce
nt
e
r.c
5) The file is inserted immediately above the net specified

in step 1). (Original screen)
Example 2. Combining a modified sequence program
[Operation]
screen.
2) Select [File].
3) Enter the name of the file to be combining and press the
Enter
key.
4) From the following menu, select F2 (View).
nc
F1
F2
F3
To
View
Cancel
terminate editing, press the
w
w
Esc
To
key. (Ladder editing
can be performed and terminated in the conventional

way.)
6) From the following menu, select F1 (Save).
.c
5) Edit the Ladder program on the view screen.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
To
View
Rename & Save
Edit
Create Latemp file
7) Return to the screen of step 4) and check the name of the

file output in step 6). Then, select F1 (To).
8) The file is inserted immediately above the net specified
Example 3. Combining a specified section of a sequence
program
[Operation]
screen.
2) Select [File].
142
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3) Enter the name of the file to be combined and press the

Enter
key.
4) From the popup menu, select F2 (View).

5) Select [Copy] or [Move] on the view screen and specify
a desired range with [until].
6) From the following function menu, select [toorg].
(Specify insertion into the original screen.)
2 cancel
3 search
4 cdown
5 cup
6 tofil
7 toorg
10
om
1 to
7) From the following menu, select F1 (Exec).

Exec
Cancel
r.c
F1
F2
ce
nt
e
8) The data is inserted immediately above the net specified

(k) Editing a symbol and comment from the ladder diagram editing
screen
On the ladder diagram editing screen, a symbol and comment
added at the specified address can be edited.
1 Insnet
2 Delnet
3 Insert
4 Adress
5 Search
6 Copy
7 Move
8 File
9 syEdit
[syEdit]
2 cancel
3 search
4 cdown
5 cup
6 tofil
7 toorg
10
[Operation]
1) Specifying an address
To edit a symbol and comment in a ladder diagram, place the
cursor on the corresponding address and press the [syEdit]
key.
2) Editing the symbol and comment
The cursor moves to the symbol editing section in the bottom
.c
nc
1 to
10
right part of the screen. Edit the symbol and press the
Enter
key. The cursor moves to the comment field.

3) Terminating editing
[exec] key
: Terminates editing after modifying the data.
[cancel] key : Terminates editing without modifying the
data.
(l) Abbreviated input with the [comand] key
Each function key can be directly selected with the [comand] key.
Enter one of the character strings below, then press the [comand]
function key. Those portions that are enclosed in brackets can be
omitted.
I (nsert)
D(elnet)
(sy)E (dit)
S (earch)
C (opy)
M (ove)
F (ile)
The function keys in the menu above can be used for program
creation and search operations.
143
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
Note
The keys [
or
] and [
or
] are used to create
or delete a vertical line extending upward to the left or right
of the cursor in a ladder diagram. The solid vertical line is
for creation and the dashed vertical line is for deletion. The
menu item applying to a function key depends on the ladder
diagram and cursor position.
om
(m) ZOOM
Subprograms called by the currently selected programs issuing
of a CALL/CALLU instruction can easily be referenced and
edited.
r.c
(i) Start up of zoom

1) Moved the cursor to the parameter of the CALL/CALLU
instruction and push the
key.
ce
nt
e
Enter
R001.0 ACT
SUB65
CALL
P001
2) The program now on opening hides from the editing

screen. Then the subprogram which is specified by the
parameter in mentioning above appears on the screen.
.c
nc
(ii) Start up under editing

When ZOOM is attempted while editing the program, the
preservation of modifications will be inquired. Select either.
Close the current program.
F1
Save & zoom
F2
Cancel
(iii) End of ZOOM

When the end operation with the
Esc
key is attempted in the
program editing screen by ZOOM, it will return to the state

when ZOOM is started. Moreover, it is possible to return to
the program configuration screen all at once.
End menu of editing screen (pop-up screen)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
144
Save(update) & quit

Quit
Rename,save & quit
Edit
Main
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
om
1) F1:Save(update) & quit

It returns to the program screen where ZOOM was
started, after the content of current program screen is
preserved.
2) F2:Quit
cancelled.
3) F3:Rename, save & quit
preserved into specified subprogram name.
(n) List of subprograms in use
The list of subprograms called from currently displayed program
is displayed.
5 function
ce
nt
e
r.c
(i) Operation
The command List is operated with the following function
key.
1)
8
or
or
10 comand
[comand]
2) [comand]
1 insnet
2 Delnet
3 Insert
4 Adress
5 Search
6 Copy
7 Move
8 File
9 syEdit
10
nc
3) Select the [List] with pushing the [SHIFT] (the following

will be displayed) in state of 2)
5 Gsrch
.c
(Shortcut command is
10 List
+ [COMMAND])
(o) To edit Net comment

It is able to write the comments between ladder nets. These
comments are called Net comment, and each of them occupies
two steps in sequence program.
(i) To enter Net comment
1) Move the cursor to the position you want to write a net
comment.
And then press
R100.1.0 R1000.2
R120.3
R100.1.0 R1000.2
Shift
+[netcmt].
Y2000.4
Y23.4
2) Lines at the cursor and after are shifted down, and the
area for comment enclosed by (* and *) is inserted.
145
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
Then the cursor changes into character-size cursor, and

type comment sentence onto the area.
The area for Net comment expands and shrinks by two
lines (four lines at four lines display mode) automatically
according to the comment sentences. Every Net
comment can expands up to a hundred lines.
Y2000.4
R100.1.0 R1000.2
R120.3
Y23.4
r.c
R100.1.0 R1000.2
om
character cursor
(* Net comment is written in here.

*)
(* All characters you can enter are available.
*)
(ii) To determine or cancel the editing Net comment

1) To determine the editing Net comment, press [ end ] or
. Then the editing comment is fixed, and the Net
ce
nt
e
Esc
comment editing mode is finished.

2) To cancel the editing Net comment, press [cancel]. The
new Net comment will be cancelled and erased.
.c
nc
Note
The number of characters in a Net comment is limited to
4095 bytes: counting one ASCII character as one byte, one
Japanese kana as one byte, one kanji character as two
bytes.
Line feed is also available on Net comment. Line feed is
helpful to save memory for Net comment.
(iii) To modify Net comment
1) Place the cursor on the Net comment which you want to
modify and press
Shift
+[netcmt] or
Enter
. The Net comment editing
mode becomes active, and the Net comment will be

ready to modify its contents.
2) At Net comment editing mode, to insert a blank line into
Net comment, press [inslin].
*)
*)
[inslin] will shift lines at the cursor and after down by one
line, and make a blank line at the cursor position.
(*
(*
146
*)
*)
*)
*)
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3) At Net comment editing mode, to delete by line, press

[dellin].
(* Net comment will expand or shrink automatically.
(*
*)
*)
*)
*)
om
[dellin] will delete whole one line at the cursor and shift
lines after the cursor up by one line.
*)
*)
or
Esc
r.c
4) To exit from Net comment editing mode, press [ end ]
ce
nt
e
5) To cancel the modifications you have just made, press

[cancel]. [cancel] will abandon the modifications and the
Net comment will be restored as it was before the
modifications.
(iv) To delete Net comment

There are two ways to delete Net comment.
1) Use [Delnet] as same as deleting normal ladder nets.
[command] [Delnet] specify area to delete
[exec]
2) Entering
Net
comment
editing
mode
by
.c
nc
Shift
+[netcmt] or
Enter
with the cursor on the Net
comment which you want to delete, and then press

[delete].
(v) Lost Net comment

A Net comment consists of the information of position in
sequence program which is called Net comment pointer,
and Net comment string data which is comment sentences
themselves. These two elements are usually combined one
to one to make a Net comment, but the partner might be lost
by illegal file operations or something, such as copying the
ladder file *.#LA or modifying the Net comment data file
NETCMT.000 by user. When a Net comment pointer loses
its Net comment string data, the Net comment is called Lost
Net comment.
Lost Net comment is displayed as blank Net comment
enclosed by (* and *) which is displayed in purple or
dimly on monochrome display. Lost Net comment can be
normalized by editing operation. Lost Net comment can be
edited as a normal Net comment, such as deletion, copying
and so on.
(p) To edit New page
It is able to specify the position to feed page at printing ladder
diagram. This specification of the position is called New page,
and each of them occupies two steps in sequence program.
147
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(i) To enter New page

1) Move the cursor to the position you want to feed page.
And then press
Shift
+[ page ].
Y2000.4
R100.1.0 R1000.2
R120.3
Y23.4
om
R100.1.0 R1000.2
2) Lines at the cursor and after are shifted down, and the
mark of New page is inserted.
R100.1.0 R1000.2
r.c
Y2000.4
R120.3
ce
nt
e
<New page>
R100.1.0 R1000.2
Y23.4
nc
(ii) Other operation to edit New page

New page can be handled as same as other ordinary ladder
nets. The operations such as copying [ Copy ], moving [
Move ], and deleting [Delnet] ladder nets are also effective
on New page.
(q) Terminating editing of a sequence program
[Operation]
.c
1) Press the
Esc
key on the following editing screen.

5 function
or
or
10 comand
2) The following editing end menu(pop-up menu) appears.

F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
Save(update) & quit

Quit
Rename,save & quit
Edit
Main
a) F1:Save(update) & quit

After current content of the editing is preserved, the
editing screen will be ended.
b) F2:Quit
After current content of the editing is cancelled, the
editing screen will be ended.
148
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
c) F3:Rename,save & quit

After current content of the editing is preserved into
specified subprogram name, the editing screen will be
ended.
d) F4:Edit
The
Esc
key operation is canceled and it returns to the
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
editing screen of former.

e) F5:Main
With the operation a),b) or c), it returns to the
program screen where ZOOM was started. But with this
operation, it returns to a program configuration screen at
all once from the nested state.
3) Either the above-mentioned is selected and it returns to the
program configuration screen, the main menu or the program
screen where ZOOM was started.
4) When error net exists
When the error net exists, ERROR NET NO. is displayed
and the end menu is not displayed. Cope this case by the
following.
a) After the error net is corrected or deleted and the state of
the error is released, the end operation will be done.
b) When pressed
Esc
key in the state of 1) after CAN is
typed (meaning of CANCEL), the menu of 2) will be

displayed.
- When Save is ordered, it will be preserved after
removing the error net.
- When Quit is ordered, it will be able to return to the
state before editing by cancelling the content of the
editing.
nc
(3) Step sequence diagram

Position the cursor to a program marked with j], then press the
[ZOOM] or
Enter
.c
as shown below:
149
key. The step sequence editing screen is displayed
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
EDIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) RC4(STEP SEQ) [A:FLDATASFC01]

L1
[
]S1
P2
P10
S3
P3
S4
S11
P11
S15
P13
S13
P14
S14
P15
S20
P20
L2
S21
P21
S23
P22
S24
L4
S30
P30
om
S10
S31
P23
P31
L2
S23
r.c
]S2
11
ce
nt
e
(Note )
11
21
31
12
22
32
On the step sequence screen, different soft keys are displayed,

depending on the position of the cursor.
When the cursor is on the step line, following softkey menu is
displayed.
L4
.c
nc
Note
The current position of the cursor on the screen is indicated.
The entire screen consists of 32 elements across the screen
and 64 elements from top to bottom. The cursor is
positioned to any element on the screen.
]S2
[
j
[
[j]
[
j]
[
|
[ JMP
]
]
]
]
]
[V]
:
:
:
:
:
S10
V]
S20
5 JMP
Step subprogram
Initial step subprogram
Block step subprogram
Line for link
Jump to label
6 LBL
[
[
[
[
[
LBL
FUNC
CHK
ZOOM
S30
]
]
]
]
]
8 FUNC
:
:
:
:
:
9 CHK
10 ZOOM
Label for jump

End of block step
Various functions
Grammatical checking
Zooming into a subprogram
When the cursor is on the transition line, following softkey menu is

displayed.
150
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
P2
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
= =
|
= =
FUNC
CHK
ZOOM
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
==
P13
==
P20
L2
P30
8 FUNC
9 CHK
10 ZOOM
Transition
Divergence of selective sequence
Divergence of simultaneous sequence
Line for link
Convergence of selective sequence
Convergence of simultaneous sequence
Various functions
Grammatical checking
Zooming into a subprogram
om
P10
ce
nt
e
r.c
(i) Entering a step

Position the cursor to the desired input position, then press the
[j] key.
Then, enter a step number and subprogram number.
Pressing the [j] key causes a step to be created, as shown below.
A free step number is automatically assigned.
S1
STEP : S1
ACTION :
[V]
nc
V]
5 JMP
6 LBL
11
8 FUNC
9 CHK
10 ZOOM
.c
The specified subprogram number (P10 in this example) is

displayed below S1.
S1
P10
STEP : S1
ACTION : P10
11
To change the step number, press the

character cursor
the number.
151
Enter
on STEP and use the
key to position the

Back
Space
key to change
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
S1
STEP : S10
ACTION : P10
11
om
(ii) Entering a transition

Position the cursor to the desired input position, then press the [+]
key.
Enter a subprogram number
Press the [+] key.
]S1
r.c
P100
ce
nt
e
ACTION :
==
==
8 FUNC
9 CHK
12
10 ZOOM
Enter a subprogram number.
]S1
ACTION : P100
12
(iii) Divergence of selective sequence

Position the cursor to the desired input position and press the
[] key.
.c
nc
P100
]S1
==
==
8 FUNC
9 CHK
10 ZOOM
[] key.
152
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
]S1
om
(iv) Convergence of selective sequence

[] key.

]S1
S3
ce
nt
e
S2
r.c
ACTION : P100
==
==
24
8 FUNC
9 CHK
10 ZOOM
nc
(v) Divergence of simultaneous sequence

Position the cursor to the desired input position (transition line)
and press the [==] key.
.c
P100
= = = =
w
w
w
]S1
12
==
==
8 FUNC
9 CHK
10 ZOOM
(vi) Convergence of simultaneous sequence

[==] key.
153
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
]S1
= = = = = = = = =
S2
S3
om
= = = = = = = = =
==
r.c
24
==
8 FUNC
9 CHK
10 ZOOM
ce
nt
e
(vii) Specifying a label for jump destination

Position the cursor to the desired input position (step line), then
press the [ LBL] key. Then, enter a label name.
Press the [ LBL] key.
]S1
P10
P100
nc
LABEL : L10
[V]
V]
5 JMP
6 LBL
11
8 FUNC
9 CHK
10 ZOOM
.c
Enter a label name.
L10
]S1
P100
STEP : S1
ACTION : P10
11
(viii) Specifying a label jump

Position the cursor to the desired input position (step line), then
press the [ JMP] key. Then, enter a label name.
Press the [ JMP] key.
154
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
L10
]S1
P100
P100
]S2
LABEL :
om
P100
[V]
V]
Enter a label name.
5 JMP
6 LBL
8 FUNC
9 CHK
10 ZOOM
ce
nt
e
L10
]S1
r.c
23
P100
P100
L10
]S2
.c
nc
P100
LABEL : L10
23
(ix) Deleting an element

Position the cursor to the element to be deleted, then press the
Delete
key.
]S1
P100
In the example shown above, two figures (elements) of a selective

branch and transition are selected. Specify the element to be
deleted with the narrow cursor, displayed in reverse video. To
position the cursor displayed in reverse video, press the
To restore the state shown above, press the
155
Esc
key.
Delete
key.
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
]S1
P100
If the
Enter
key is pressed in the state shown above, the selective
om
branch is deleted and the following screen is displayed:
]S1
r.c
P100
ce
nt
e
To specify another figure, press the
Delete
key again.
]S1
nc
P100
(x) Inserting an element

Position the cursor to the desired insertion position, then press the
.c
Insert
key. To create an empty row, press the
To create an empty column, press the
Shift
Insert
and
key.
Insert
keys.
]S1
P1
= = = = = = = = =
]S2
S10
P2
P10
S3
S11
S20
P20
S21
STEP : S2
ACTION : P200
13
156
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
Press the
Insert
key.
]S1
P1

S10
S20
ce
nt
e
r.c
]S2
om
= = = = = = = = = = = = =
Press the
Shift
and
Insert
13
key.
]S1
P1
.c
nc
= = = = = = = = = = = =
]S2
S10
S20
P2
P10
P20

S3
S11
STEP : S2
ACTION : P102
w
w
w
S21
13
(xi) Search
P1
= = = = = = = = = = =
]S2
S10
P1
P11
]S2
S10
157
S20
P21
S20
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
If the [F8] (FUNC) key is pressed in the state shown above, a

pop-up menu is displayed as shown below:
P1
= = = = = = = = = = =
Search
Copy
Move
mAin
List

]S3
S11
S21
om
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
r.c
Press the [F1] (Search) key. A pop-up menu is displayed, as

shown below:
P1
= = = = = = = = = = =
ce
nt
e
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
Se
Co
Mo
mA
Li
]S3
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
Step
Action
Label
sYmbol
Position
Top
Bottom
.c
nc
Then, press the [F1] (Step) key.

displayed, as shown below:
Another pop-up menu is
P1
= = = = = = = = = = =
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
Se
Co
Mo
mA
Li
]S3
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
Step
Ac
La
search string:A
sY
Position
Top
Bottom
Enter the step number to be searched for (S20, for example), then
press the
Enter
key. The system starts searching through the part
subsequent to the cursor.
158
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
P1
= = = = = = = = = = =
Se
Co
Mo
mA
Li
]S3
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
Step
Ac
La
search string:S20
sY
Position
Top
Bottom
P1
r.c
(xii) Copying or moving an element

Press the [F8] (FUNC) key.
om
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
= = = = = = = = = = =
S10
S20
ce
nt
e
]S2
P1
P11
P21
When the [F8] (FUNC) key is pressed, a pop-up menu is

displayed as shown below:
P1
.c
nc
= = = = = = = = = = =
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
Search
Copy
Move
mAin
List
Press the [F2] (Copy) key. The system prompts the operator to
enter a start point.
P1
= = = = = = = = = = =
]S2
P1
S10
S20
P11
P21
ACTION :
Specify Start position
159
12
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
Position the cursor to the desired start point (position 2-3 in the
example shown below), then press the
Enter
key. The system
prompts the operator to enter the end point.

P1
]S2
S10
P1
P11
= = = = = = = = = = =
P21
ACTION :
Specify End position
om
S20
r.c
23
Position the cursor to the desired end point (position 3-4 in the
example shown below), then press the
Enter
key. The system
ce
nt
e
prompts the operator to specify a copy destination.

P1
]S2
S10
S20
P1
P11
P21
= = = = = = = = = = =
ACTION :
Specify End position
nc
34
Position the cursor to the desired copy destination (position 4-3

Enter
key. The
specified part is copied.

P1
= = = = = = = = = = =
]S2
S10
S20
P1
P11
P21
.c
in the example shown below), then press the
STEP : S10
ACRTION : P100
P11
P21
43
When a part is copied,

The S address is not copied. Assign a free number.
The P address is copied. If required, change the address.
160
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
P1
= = = = = = = = = = =
]S2
S20
P11
P21
r.c
P1
S10
om
(xiii) Returning from the ZOOM destination to the program

configuration screen (MAIN).
To return to the program configuration screen, displayed when
editing was started, follow the procedure below. The system
assumes that the editing of the step sequence subprogram, from
which the [ZOOM] key was pressed, is suspended.
The edited subprogram is not saved in the source program file.
ce
nt
e
After pressing the [F8] (FUNC) key

P1
= = = = = = = = = = =
Search
Copy
Move
mAin
List
nc
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
.c
After pressing the [F4] (MAIN) key
EDIT (LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) PMCRC4(STEP SEQ) [C: FLADDER

]
LEVEL
V P0001
V P0008
]P0021
S
S
V P0101
LEVEL2 LEVEL3
V P0002
V P0004
V P0009
V P0014
V P0022
V P0024
S
S
S
S
V P0202
V]P0304
V P0005
V P0015
V P0025
S
S
V]P0405
V P0006
V P0016
V P0026
S
S
V]P0406
V P0007
V P0017
V]P0027
S
S
V]P0407
If the subprogram whose previous editing session was suspended

(marked with ]) is selected again for editing, the following
message is displayed:
Editing this subprogram is not completed.
Continue to select it ?
(Yes/No) [Y]
To continue the previous editing session, press the [Enter] key.

Otherwise, enter N. (The result of the previous editing session
is cancelled.)
161
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(xiv) LIST
The list of subprograms referenced by the stepsequence
subprogram that is currently being edited is displayed.
P1
]S2
S10
S20
P11
P21
P1
om
= = = = = = = = = = =
P1
r.c
After pressing the [F8] (FUNC) key
= = = = = = = = = = =
Search
Copy
Move
mAin
List
ce
nt
e
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
nc
After pressing the [F5] (LIST) key
.c
EDIT (LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) PMCRC4(STEP SEQ) [C: FLADDER

]
V]P200
V P0008
V P0021
V P0009
V P0022
V P0014
V P0024
V P0015
V P0025
V P0016
V P0026
8 MAIN
V P0017
V]P0027
9 CHANGE 10 ZOOM
Following keys are useful in this screen.

Function key
[ MAIN ] : Displaying the subprogram configuration
screen
[CHANGE] : Creating a new subprogram
[ ZOOM ] : Modifying a subprogram
Other keys
Page
Up
: Displaying previous screen
Page
Down
: Displaying next screen
162
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
Screen display
V] P200
V P0008
V P0009
om
The subprogram which is being edited is displayed. If the

[ZOOM] key is pressed to nest the program to a certain depth, the
subprogram numbers are arranged from the left in the order in
which they are nested. The subprogram for which the [ZOOM]
key was pressed first is displayed at the left end.
V P0014
V P0015
V P0016
V P0017
ce
nt
e
r.c
Subprograms referenced by the subprogram that is currently

being edited are listed with the following mark:
j
: Ladder subprogram
j] : Step sequence subprogram
(xv) Checking the syntax
Press the [CHK] key.
P1
= = = = = = = = = = =
]S2
P1
S10
S20
P11
P21
nc
If the step sequence is satisfactory, the following message is

displayed:
P1
.c
= = = = = = = = = = =
]S2
P1
S10
P11
S20
Check completed
If the step sequence is invalid, the following message is

displayed:
P1
= = = = = = = = = = =
]S2
P1
163
S10
P11
S20
Chart Sequence error
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(xvi) Modifying a subprogram (ZOOM)

Press the [ZOOM] key.
P1
= = = = = = = = = = =
P1
S10
S20
P11
P21

]S2
S10
S20
om
]S2
r.c
When the [ZOOM] key is pressed, the figure pointed by cursor

decides the type of subprogram which is to be edited.
Figure
Meaning of the figure
Subprogram to be edited
Step sequence subprogram
Ladder subprogram
[V]
Initial step sequence subprogram
Ladder subprogram
V]
Block step sequence subprogram
step sequence subprogram
Transition
Ladder subprogram
ce
nt
e
(xvii) End of modifying

Press the
ESC
key.
P1
nc
= = = = = = = = = = =
.c
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5

Quit
Edit
Rename, save & quit
Optimize
Menus
Menu
Editing
Result of editing
Display
Save
End
Updated
Optimized
Quit
End
Discarded
Edit
Continue
Continued
Not optimized
Rename
End
Updated
Optimized
Optimize
Continue
Optimized and continued Optimized
164
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.5.2.3
Symbol & Comment
Editing
D Moving the cursor

,
Shift
Moves the cursor to another field to be edited.
Moves the cursor to another position within the field

to be edited.
om
D Entering a comment in Japanese

When a front-end processor for Japanese word input is used, a comment
can be entered in Japanese. When a comment containing kana
characters or m-type alphanumeric characters is compiled (an object file
is created), all the kana characters and m-type alphanumeric characters
are replaced with spaces.
ce
nt
e
r.c
(1) Start
[Operation]
1) Select [SYMBOL] (symbol and comment) from the editing
menu.
2) The following symbol and comment editing screen appears:
EDIT (SYMBOL & COMMENT) RB4 (STEP SEQ) <0>[C: FLADDER
SYMBOL 000000/000001 COIL_COMMENT 00000000/00000014

NO.
ADDRESS SYMBOL
RELAY COMMENT
COIL COMMENT
RELAY COMMENTA COIL COMMENTA
.c
nc
000001 X00000.0 SYMBOLA
2 SEARCH 3 AREA
4 ADD
6 DELETE 7
8 COPY
9 PASTE
10 END
Fig.3.5.2.3 Symbol and comment editing screen
(2) Entering a new symbol and comment

A new symbol and comment can be added at an address to which no
symbol or comment is assigned.
[Operation]
1) Select [ADD] on the symbol and comment editing screen.
2) An input window opens on the screen.
Address field
Symbol field
165
] [
Relay comment field
Coil comment field
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
om
3) Enter an address in the address entry field.

4) The cursor is positioned to the symbol entry field.
5) Enter symbol data.
6) The cursor is positioned to the relay comment entry field.
7) Enter relay comment data.
8) The cursor is positioned to the coil comment entry field.
9) Enter coil comment data.
10)The entered data is stored, clearing the previous address, symbol
data, and comment data from the window.
When no symbols and comments are entered, the system is
automatically set to receive new data.
r.c
(3) Editing a symbol and comment

A symbol and comment assigned to an address can be edited.
[Operation]
1) If the system is set to receive new data, select [QUIT] to exit from
that state.
ce
nt
e
2) Move the cursor by pressing the
, or
key
and edit the data.
To move the cursor within a field, while pressing the

the
or
Shift
key press
key.
.c
nc
(4) Moving a comment

A comment assigned to an address can be moved to another address.
[Operation]
1) Place the cursor on the comment to be moved.
2) Select [DELETE].
3) The following message appears on the screen.
Comment data copied to paste buffer
4) Place the cursor at the place the comment is to be moved.

5) Select [PASTE].
(5) Copying a comment

A comment assigned to an address can be copied into another address.
[Operation]
1) Place the cursor on the comment to be copied.
2) Select [COPY].
3) The following message appears on the screen.
Comment data copied to paste buffer
4) Place the cursor at the place the comment is to be copied.

5) Select [PASTE].
(6) Searching for a symbol or address
166
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
[Operation]
1) Select [SEARCH] on the symbol and comment editing screen.
2) The following input window appears on the screen.
SEARCH :
om
3) Enter the symbol or address to be searched for and the data

number.
4) The system searches for the symbol or address and the data
number in that order. The cursor is moved to the searched data.
ce
nt
e
r.c
(7) Deleting a symbol and/or comment

(a) Deleting both a symbol and a comment
[Operation]
1) Place the cursor on the NO field.
2) Select [DELETE]. Both the symbol and the comment are
deleted.
(b) Deleting either a symbol or a comment
[Operation]
1) Place the cursor on the SYMBOL or COMMENT field.
2) Select [DELETE]. Only the selected symbol or comment is
deleted.
(c) Deleting two or more symbols and comments simultaneously
[Operation]
1) Place the cursor at the top of the range to be deleted.
2) Select [AREA]. The entire line is displayed in reverse video,
and the following message appears on the screen.
nc
Selecting the area ...
3) Move the cursor to the end of the range to be deleted.

4) Select [DELETE]. All the data displayed in reverse video is
deleted.
.c
(8) Terminating the symbol and comment editing

[Operation]
1) On the edit screen, select [END] or press the
Esc
key.
2) The following message appears on the screen:

F1
F2
F3

Quit
Edit
3) Specify a desired option and return to the edit menu.
167
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(9) Editing screen

Symbol entry number
Output Number to object file / Total
EDIT ( SYMBOL &
COMMENT )
<O>[A:FLDATARB4
COIL_COMMENT 0000030/00000090
RELAY COMMENT
COIL COMMENT
(Note)
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
CCCCC
CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
r.c
00001 X00000.0
00002 X00000.1
00003*X00000.2
PMC-RB4
om
SYMBOL 000001/000003
NO.
ADDRESS
SYMBOL
Coil comment size (byte)

Output Number to object file / Total
* means a symbol data which can be displayed on CRT/MDI.
2 SERCH
3 AREA
4 ADD
6 DELETE 7
ce
nt
e
8 COPY
9 PASTE
10 END
Note
It is the indicator. Symbol/comment are displayed with
turning at this point in ladder diagram editing screen.
1 NO.
2 ADRS
3 SYMBOL 4 RELAY
5 COIL
10
2) Input strings and specify the data kind for searching by

function-key.
A part of strings is available only in case of [RELAY]/[COIL].
3) If search is success, cursol moves to the found place.
.c
nc
(10)Searching by a part of stringsSearch function is active for specified

field, LINE NO./ADDRESS/SYMBOL/RELAY or COIL
COMMENT.
Especially you can find relay/coil comment, which is too long, by
specifing a part of data strings.
1) Press [SEARCH] and the pop-up menu apears to specify strings
for search.
Furthermore, the display of function-key changes as the
undermentioned.
168
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.5.2.4
Message Editing
An arbitrary message can be displayed on the screen, using the DISPB

instruction (SUB 41), which is one of the function instructions. Such a
message is created as described below.
r.c
om
(1) Types and quantity of characters that can be used The types of
characters usable in message data vary from one CNC/PMC model
to another. Refer to the PMC programming Manual.
The half-size kana and alphanumeric characters can be entered using
the kana and alphanumeric keys on the keyboard. Similarly to
symbols and comments, Japanese-language text can be edited using
the Japanese-language input FEP (front-end processor). The number
of characters is limited as follows:
1) When only full-size Japanese-language characters are used
: 62 characters
2) When only half-size kana characters are used
: 127 characters
3) When only alphanumeric characters are used
: 256 characters
ce
nt
e
(2) Edit procedure

The edit method that can be used varies between the CNC/PMC
model in which Japanese language (excluding half-size characters)
can be used and other models. This section describes the procedure
common to all models (only alphanumeric characters are entered),
using the PMC-RC4 as an example.
(a) Startup
[Operation]
1) Select [MESSAG] from the edit menu.
2) The following message data edit screen appears.
nc
EDIT (MESSAGE)
PMCRC4
MESSAGE
001
A00. 0
002
A00. 1
003
A00. 2
004
A00. 3
1234567890ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
.c
NO ADDRESS
[C: FLADDER]
2 TOP
3 BOTTOM 4 CMODE 5 DISP
10 END
Fig.3.5.2.4 (a) Message Data Edit Screen
(b) Input
[Operation]
1) Place the cursor on the message address where message data is
to be entered.
2) Key in the desired message data.
169
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(c) Modification
[Operation]
1) Place the cursor on the message address where message data is
to be entered.
2) The character cursor moves on to the message and blinks there.
3) Place the cursor at the location where modification is required,
using the cursor keys.
4) Key in the desired characters to modify the message data.
5) Press the
key.
om
Enter
(d) Search [TOP] [BOTTOM]

[Operation]
1) On the message screen, select [TOP] or [BOTTOM].
2) The cursor moves to the start or end message address.
r.c
(e) END
[Operation]
1) On the edit screen, press [END] or
Esc
ce
nt
e

F1
F2
F3

Quit
Edit
3) Select one of the above items, and return to the edit menu.
3.5.2.5
The address of each module in the I/O unit is set and deleted as described
below.
nc
I/O Module Editing
.c
(1) Startup
[Operation]
1) Select [MODULE] (I/O module) from the edit menu.
2) The following I/O module edit screen appears.
EDIT (I/O MODULE)
PMCRC
<0>[C: FLADDER]
ADDRESS GROUP BASE SLOT NAME
ADDRESS GROUP BASE SLOT NAME
X0000
X0001
X0002
X0003
X0004
X0005
X0006
X0007
X0008
X0009
X0010
X0011
X0012
X0013
X0014
X0015
Y0000
Y0001
Y0002
Y0003
Y0004
Y0005
Y0006
Y0007
Y0008
Y0009
Y0010
Y0011
Y0012
Y0013
Y0014
Y0015
0
0
1 SEACH 2 INPUT
0
0
3 HELP
01 ID16C
01 ID16C
6 DELETE 7 DELALL 8
Fig. 3.5.2.5 (a) I/O Module Edit Screen
170
10 END
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(2) Setting
[Operation]
1) Place the cursor on the start address when a module is to be set.
2) Key in the module address in the following format:
GROUP.BASE.SLOT.NAME
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
Notes
1 The module name that can be specified may vary
depending on the model of the PMC or I/O unit. Selecting
[HELP] can display the module names that can be displayed
in the NAME field.
2 The I/O unit MODEL-B is allocated as follows:
GROUP : Specify a group number in the configuration.
BASE : Must be fixed at 0.
SLOT : Specify the unit number of the I/O Unit-B.
Alternatively, set to 0 if power ON/OFF
information ## is to be allocated.
(3) Deletion [DELETE] [DELALL] [DEL.CH]
(i) To delete one module:

[Operation]
1) Place the cursor at the address where the module is to be
deleted.
2) Select [DELETE].
.c
nc
(ii) To delete all modules:

[Operation]
1) Select [DELALL].
(iii) To delete the modules of one channel (for models in which more
than one channel can be set):
[Operation]
1) Select a channel for deletion.
2) Select [DEL.CH].
(4) Search [SEARCH]

[Operation]
1) Press [SEARCH] after an address is specified.
2) Place the cursor at the specified address.
(5) END [END]
[Operation]
1) On the edit screen, press [END] or
Esc

F1
F2
F3

Quit
Edit
3) Select one of the above items, and return to the edit menu.
171
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.5.2.6
(1) Start
[Operation]
1) Select [SYSPRM] (SYSTEM PARAMETER) from the editing
menu.
2) The system parameter editing screen appears.
The screen shown below is the system parameter editing screen
for PMC-RB. For each PMC model, see Item (4) below.
System Parameter
Editing
om
(2) Input
[Operation]
1) Select an input item (displayed in reverse video) with the

and
keys.
r.c
2) Enter data.
For information about input items, see Item (4) below.
ce
nt
e
(3) Termination
[Operation]
1) Select [END] or press
on the editing screen.
Esc
2) The following message appears:

F1
F2
F3

Quit
Edit
3) Select a function key from the above. The screen display returns
to the editing menu.
nc
(4) System parameter editing screen and input items for PMC model
[Example of Editing screen]
EDIT (SYSTEM PARAMETER) RC4
.c
1) COUNTER DATA TYPE

2) LADDER EXEC
3) (UNUSED)
4) LANGUAGE EXEC RATIO
5) LANGUAGE ORIGIN
6) OPERATOR PANEL
7) KEY ADDRESS
8) LED ADDRESS
9) KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS
10) LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS
:
:
0
100%
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
50%
000000H
0
(0:BINARY, 1:BCD)
(1150%)
(099%)
(0:NO, 1:YES)
PMC TYPE = RC4
w
w
<0>[C: FLADDER]
10 END
Fig.3.5.2.6 (a)
Note
For other editing screens, see APPENDIX A FUNCTIONS
SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL PMC MODELS
172
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
[Input item]
This parameter specifies whether the format of a counter value
used with the CTR function instruction is to be binary or BCD.
Initial value 0 : BINARY
Setting 0 : BINARY / 1 : BCD
Initial value 100
om
2) LADDER EXEC (ladder execution time)

This parameter specifies an incremental processing time for the
first and second ladder levels. This setting reduces ladder scan
time, thus achieving high-speed ladder execution.
Setting range 1 to 150
The table below indicates ladder execution time status during an

execution period of 8 ms.
First and second level processing time
r.c
Setting
100%
150%
5ms
7.5ms
ce
nt
e
Note
however, that increased ladder execution time on the first
and second levels reduces the following processing times:
D PMC screen display time
D Language program processing time
D Ladder processing time on the third level
.c
nc

As the language program and PMC screen display have the same
priority, this parameter specifies the percentage of the following
processing times:
D PMC screen display time
D Language program processing time
D Processing time of third-level Ladder program
While the PMC screen is displayed, a language program can be
executed cyclically.
Initial value 50
Setting range 0 to 99
4) LANGUAGE ORIGIN
This parameter specifies the start address of the link control
statement data of a language program.
Initial value 000000
Setting range Address in the

language program
storage area
When there is no language program, specify 000000H.

5) OPERATOR PANEL (connecting an F0 machine operators
panel)
This parameter specifies whether a machine operators panel is
used with the FS0. When YES is specified in this parameter,
specify the DI/DO addresses where the operators panel is
actually connected, an address for key images transferred from
the operators panel, and an addresses for LED images transferred
to the operators panel.
173
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
Initial value 0 : NO
Setting 0 : NO / 1 : YES
(i) KEY DI ADDRESS

Specify the start address (PMC address) of the external DI
where the operators panel is actually connected.
Setting range X0 to X127, X1000 to X1019
(ii) KEY DO ADDRESS

Specify the start address (PMC address) of the external DO
where the operators panel is actually connected.
om
Setting range Y0 to Y127, Y1000 to Y1014
(iii) KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS

Specify the start address (PMC address) of key images
referenced by user programs.
Usually an arbitrary internal relay area is set.
ce
nt
e
r.c
(iv) LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS

Specify the start address (PMC address) of LED images
referenced by user programs.
Usually an arbitrary internal relay area is set.
3.5.3
Printout
3.5.3.1
A sequence program can be printed out.

(1) Compatible printers
This software is usable with the printers listed below.
Overview
nc
EPSON VP1000 (default setting)

NEC PR201H
FANUC PRINTER
.c
Note
To use a NEC PR201H and FANUC PRINTER, a program
modification is required. For details, see Section 3.5.3.6.
Offline menu
[PRINT]
(2) General flow of operation for printout.
F2
Specify output item

Specify option
[SETUP]
F2
Setup menu
[PRINT]
F1
Start printing
Fig.3.5.3.1 Operation Flow of Printout
174
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.5.3.2
Printing is performed according to the following procedure.
Starting and Ending

Printing
PRINT
RB4 (STEP SEQ)
[C: FLADDER]
C:DATASAMPLE
LADDER DIAGRAM
STEP SEQUENCE DIAGRAM
V
V
I/O MODULE
MESSAGE
CROSS REFERENCE LIST
BIT ADDRESS MAP
2 SETUP 3
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
[NO/YES]
[NO/YES]
[NO/YES]
[OPTION]
[NO/YES]
[OPTION]
[NO/YES]
[OPTION]
[NO/YES]
[NO/YES]
[OPTION]
[NO/YES]
[OPTION]
[NO/YES]
[OPTION]
om
TITLE
SYSTEM PARAMETER
SYMBOL & COMMENT
r.c
1 PRINT
V
V
V
9 BREAK 10 END
ce
nt
e
Fig.3.5.3.2 Drawing Output Menu
[Operation]
1) Set the desired print format by pressing F2 [SETUP]. (See
Section 3.5.3.4.)
2) Set the desired output items. (See Section 3.5.3.3.)
3) Start printing by pressing F1 [PRINT].
4) Press F9 [BREAK] to suspend printing.
5) Press F10 [END] or the
Esc
key to terminate the print menu
nc
display.
.c
Notes
1 Perform steps 1) and 2) only when the settings must be
changed.
2 Some print formats that cannot be set in step 1) may be set
by editing the setting file. For details, see Section 3.5.3.5.
175
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.5.3.3
Items to be output to a drawing are specified as described below. More

than one item can be specified at a time. Some set items may not be
displayed, depending on the model of the PMC.
Output Item Setting
(1) Specifying output of each data item

Specify whether a data item is to be output, by pressing the
or
key after positioning the cursor with the
key
key or
om
key on the drawing output menu screen.

(2) Option specification
When specifying a data item for which options are available, position
the cursor to the desired option, then press the
Enter
key. The option
specification screen will appear. To set the option, enter the desired
key.
Enter
r.c
value, then press the
ce
nt
e
(3) Detail of each data time

(a) Title printing
The data of the title is printed.
(b) Parameter printing
The data of the system parameters is printed.
(c) Symbol printing
The symbol comment data is printed.
PRINT
RB4 (STEP SEQ) <0>[C: FLADDER]
C:DATASAMPLE
[ SYMBOL PRINT ]
START LINE NUMBER

END LINE NUMBER
APPOINT COMMENT
:
:
:
.c
nc
V
V
V
1
0
[RELAY/COIL/ALL]
F10 (ESC) : END
10 END
Fig. 3.5.3.3(a) Symbol Print Option Menu
i) Option (symbol printing)

When printing symbol/comment data, specify an output
range. When 0 is specified as the print end line number, all
data up to the last line is printed.
Comment specification
[RELAY] : Prints relay comment data.
[COIL] : Prints coil comment data.
[ALL] : Prints both relay comment data and coil
comment data.
(d) Ladder diagram printing
A ladder diagram is printed.
176
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
PRINT
RB4 (STEP SEQ)
[C: FLADDER]
C:DATASAMPLE
[ LADDER PRINT ]
V
V
V
V
PRINT UNIT
MODULE NAME
NET RANGE
START NET NUMBER
END NET NUMBER
NEW PAGE
SUBPROGRAM
CROSS REFERENCE
RELAY INFORMATION
:
:
[ALL / MODULE]
:
:
1
0
:
:
:
[NO/YES]
[NO/YES]
[SYMBOL/RELAY COMENT]
F10 (ESC) : END
10 END
r.c
om
Fig. 3.5.3.3(b) Ladder Print Option Menu
PRINT
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
i) Option (ladder diagram printing)

The output unit, net range, page break, and cross-reference
of a ladder diagram to be printed are specified.
If a diagram is output as a list file, the unit of printout must
be specified as a module.
If 0 is set as the output end net when a range of nets is
specified, printing continues up to the last net.
If a page break is specified, a page break is made in the
ladder diagram at every new file or subprogram.
If a cross-reference is specified, the ladder diagram is
accompanied with a cross-reference. (Fig. 3.5.3.3 (h))
Relay information
[SYMBOL]
: Prints symbol data.
[RELAY COMMENT] : Prints relay comment data.
(e) Printing of step sequence figure
Step sequence figure is printed
i) Option (Step sequence figure printing)
RB4 (STEP SEQ)
[C: FLADDER]
C:DATASAMPLE
[ STEP SEQUENCE PRINT ]

V
PRINT UNIT
MODULE NAME
SUBPROGRAM
:
:
:
[ALL / MODULE]
[NO/YES]
F10 (ESC) : END
10 END
Fig.3.5.3.3 (c) Step Sequence Print Option Menu
177
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
om
PRINT UNIT
Specify whether a step sequence figure will be printed for
a single subprogram or all subprograms. When printing a
figure for a single subprogram, specify the subprogram
name for MODULE NAME.
SUB-PROGRAM NUMBER
Specify whether subprogram number Pxxx will be printed
for each step.
(f) I/O module printing
The I/O module data is printed.
(g) Message printing
The message data is printed.
PRINT
RB4 (STEP SEQ) <0>[C: FLADDER]
r.c
C:DATASAMPLE
[ MESSAGE PRINT ]
ADDRESS RANGE
START ADDRESS
END ADDRESS
:
:A000.0
:A124.7
ce
nt
e
F10 (ESC) : END
10 END
nc
Fig.3.5.3.3 (d) Message Print Option Menu
.c
i) Option (message printing)

The range of messages to be printed is specified.
(h) Cross-reference list printing
A cross-reference list is printed.
PRINT
RB4 (STEP SEQ)
[C: FLADDER]
C:DATASAMPLE
[ CROSS REFERENCE LIST PRINT ]
V
V
V
CHECK DUPLICATE WRITE

APPOINT ADDRESS
APPOINT COMMENT
:
:
:
[NO/YES]
ALL
[RELAY/COIL]
[ PRINT FORMAT ]
X0.0
: S00001/N00001
Y0.0
()
(/)
: S00001/N00002
STEP No./NET No.
F1 : DISPLAY CROSS REFERENCE
F10 (ESC) : END
10 END
Fig.3.5.3.3 (e) Cross Reference List Print Option Menu
178
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
i) Option
CHECK DUPLICATE WRITE
Check multiple writing to a coil and multiple use of same
number functional instruction (ex. timer, counter).
APPOINT ADDRESS
Specify the range of printing address. It can be specified
as below.
Table 3.5.3.3 Cross-Reference List Address Specification
Example of
keying in
Address to be output
om
Address specification
mode
ALL
ALL
All addresses
Initial letter of an address
Bit address
R1.0
Byte address
X10
Specified byte addresses

(including bit addresses)
Address range
F10.0-F12.7
All addresses in a specified range
X2.3-END
(Note 1)
All addresses after a specified

address
All addresses having a specified

initial letter
ce
nt
e
r.c
Specified bit addresses only
Note1
When an address specification is made, addresses are
output in the sequence: X, Y, F, G, R, A, C, K, D, T, variable
address, P. In this example, therefore, Y and all subsequent
addresses are output.
nc
APPOINT COMMENT
Specify the kind of comment data
RELAY Print Relay comment.
COIL Print Coil comment.
.c
(i) Bit address map

The bit address map is printed.
PRINT
RB4 (STEP SEQ)
[C: FLADDER]
C:DATASAMPLE
[ BIT ADDRESS MAP PRINT ]

PUTPUT ADDRESS
APPOINT ADDRESS
:
:
[ALL/USED]
[ALL]
V
V
F10 (ESC) : END
10 END
Fig.3.5.3.3 (f) Bit Address Map Print Option Menu
179
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
om
i) Option (Bit address map)

Output address
ALL
All available addresses are printed.
(Including Not used addresses.)
USED The addresses which are used in a sequence
program are printed.
Address specifications
Specify the range of outputting addresses. For details, refer
Fig. 3.5.3.3 in (h) Cross Reference.
[DATASAMPLEP2]
***
N00588
C 3457
N00589
D 3480
(*
(*
(*
(*
X01.0
Relay
X0.0
Relay
X1.0
SUB65
CALL
X0.0
Relay
Y0.0
Coil comment Y0.0

00008 00032 00038 00291
00315 00321 00594 00618
00624 00764 00770
P4
P2000
ACT
SUB68
JMP8
L9999
.c
Relay
X0.0
SUB69
LBL
L9999
### L9999
###
N00592
G 3468
Y01.0
nc
N00591
F 3485
SUB66
CALLU
###
*)
*)
*)
*)
Relay
X0.0
N00590
E 3463
P2
X0.0
ACT
PAGE1
Net No.
### P2
FORMATC ladder data

source name = rb4_step
SUB PROGRAM NO. 2
X0.0
***
r.c
N00587
B 3455
SUB71
SP
LADDER DIAGRAM
ce
nt
e
N00586
A 3453
Fig.3.5.3.3 (g) Example of Printout of a Ladder Diagram with Cross Reference Data
180
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
[FLADDERSAMPLE]
***
Cross reference
***
PAGE2
STEP No./NET No.
Symbol
U11O U11 ON
S00055/N00024
U12O U12 ON
S00057/N00025
S00249/N00104
S00041/N00017
Y0.2
Y0.3
CTR
NO.1
MULTIPLE USED
S00247/N00104
CTR
NO.2
CTR
NO3.
MULTIPLE COIL USED
om
Y0.1
Comment
r.c
Address
S00268/N00107
ce
nt
e
S00261/N00106
S00254/N00105
.c
nc
Fig.3.5.3.3 (h) Example of Printout with a Multiple Coil Write Check Indication
181
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(1) Printout example by F2[SETUP] (print menu)

<ASCII mode printout>
Initial step
P100
Transition
<- L1
j S210
P101
Label
S211 j
P151
P152
Divergence of selective
sequence
Divergence of
simultaneous
S215 j S217 sequence
P161
P165
Convergence of
simultaneous
P162
sequence
P160
S212 j
P153
S216
P163
P154
P164
Step
Convergence of selective
sequence
j ] S1000
P2000
nc
Block step
P102
> L1
S1
P1
Initial step
Transition
P100
L1
S210
P101
P150
:
:
S211
P151
:
P152
:
:
S212
P153
:
P154
Label
Divergence of selective
P160 sequence
Divergence of
simultaneous
:
S215 *
S217 sequence
P161 :
P165
Convergence of
simultaneous
P162
sequence
*
:
ce
nt
e
P150
:
I*
:
:
+
:
<*
:
:
+
:
:
*
:
:
+
:
:
*
:
:
+
:
:
B*
:
:
+
:
:
->
om
[ j ] S1
P1
r.c
<graphical mode printout>
S216
P163
164
Step
Convergence of selective
sequence
S1000
P2000
Block step
P102
Jump
L1
.c
Jump
*
:
(2) Printout example by SUB-PROGRAM NUMBER [NO/YES]

<Print sub program number>
<Not print sub program number>

[ j ] S1
[ j ] S1
P1
P100
<- L1
j S210
P150
P155
Sub prograrm number
P100
<- L1
j S210
P101
P160
P150
P155
P160
Fig.3.5.3.3(i) Example of Printout of Step Sequence Diagram (1/2)
182
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(3) Printout example of more than one page.

Size of one page
om
22 element
r.c
(28 element)
14 element
The maximun element count for printing

without sub-program number is given in
parentheses.
(1/3)
ce
nt
e
Note)
Link number
(3/3)
<
>
5=>
v1
v2
v3
v2
v3
(2/3)
4=>
=>4
v1
.c
nc
=>5
<- Number of a sub program
Fig.3.5.3.3 (i) Example of Printout of Step Sequence Diagram (2/2)
183
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.5.3.4
Specify printer forms and a print format as described below.
Print Format-1: SETUP

Menu
PRINT (SETUP)
RB4 (STEP SEQ)
[C: FLADDER]
PAPER SIZE/LADDER PRINT :

INCH
INCH
INCH
INCH
/
/
/
/
ASCII
GRAPHIC
ASCII
GRAPHIC
r.c
om
D 10
10
15
15
10 END
ce
nt
e
Fig.3.5.3.4 SETUP Menu Screen
[Operation]
1) Select F2 [SETUP] from the output item selection screen.
2) The SETUP menu screen appears.
3) Position the cursor to a desired item (e.g., forms size/ladder
diagram print format) with the
4) Select the item by pressing the
Enter
or
key.
key.
nc
5) Position the cursor to the desired item (e.g., 10 INCH/ASCII)

with the
,
Enter
, or
key, then make the selection
key.
6) If F10 [END] is selected after forms selection, the screen display

returns to the output item selection screen.
(1) Forms size/ladder diagram print format

Specify a forms size. In addition, specify whether to print the ladder
diagram in character format (ASCII) or graphic format (GRAPHIC).
The currently specified output format is indicated by F.
.c
by pressing the
184
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.5.3.5
Each parameter file of this software can be rewritten using a commercially

available text editor so that the output format shown in each of the
following frames can be changed.
AMROFTRP. DAT
Diagram output
1. Change the paper selection

name
PR201-10
PR201-15
PR201-A4
PR10-A
PR15-A
PRA4-A
ESC-P-10
ESC-P-15
ESCP10-A
ESCP15-A
FANUC-10
2. Set the top margin

3. Set the net spacing
CROSSINF. DAT
(Setting the cross-reference
list output format)
INF
INF
INF
INF
INF
INF
INF
INF
INF
INF
INF
r.c
4. Set the printer model and

paper
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
om
Print Format-2
(AMOFTRP, DAT/*
.INF/Message File)
ce
nt
e
5. Set the line spacing
8. Set the output format guidance information
6. Set the left margin
9. Set the output information

10.Specify the output format
11.Set the read/write coil guidance information

12.Specify the linefeed
13.Specify the page break
nc
(Message file)
.c
7. Set the title of printout
(1) Changing the paper selection name

This item makes it possible to change the name of each choice during
diagram output format selection.
Name of file to be
edited
AMROFTRP.DAT
For these parameter files, do not change any item not described here.
Point of change
Settings
#10-A=10-inch/ASCII
#10-G=10-inch/graphic
#15-A=15-inch/ASCII
#15-G=15-inch/graphic
#A4L-A=A4 portrait/ASCII
#A4L-G=A4 portrait/graphic
Arbitrary character string

consisting of up to 30
half-size (or 15 full-size)
characters
Note
#A4L-A=and #A4L-G=are unavailable in the output to
VP1000.
185
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(2) Setting the top margin

This item makes it possible to specify the top margin of a diagram.
Name of file to be
edited
AMROFTRP.DAT
Point of change
Settings
TOPMGL=0
TOPMG=0
(for each form)
Decimal number
N00005
E
Y0.7
00001
Y0.0
*00006
Y0.0
*00006
Y0.7
00001
Y0.1
Y0.0
*00006
Y0.1
Y0.7
00001
When LCNTL=4
N00004
D
Y0.7
00001
Y0.0
*00006
Y0.0
*00006
Y0.7
00001
Y0.0
*00006
Y0.1
ce
nt
e
N00004
D
N00003
C
r.c
N00003
C
om
(3) Setting the spacing between the LADDER net

By modifying this item, the spacing between the LADDER nets used
during diagram printout can be changed in the manner shown below.
Y0.1
N00005
E
Y0.2
*00008
Y0.7
00001
Y0.2
*00008
When LCNTL=5
Name of file to be
edited
.c
nc
AMROFTRP.DAT
186
Point of change
Settings
LCNTL=4
(Set for each sheet)
Specify either 4 or 5
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(4) Setting the printer model and print paper

This item can change the printer model and print paper that are
specified at paper selection.
*.INF that can be set
Printer name
Print paper type/print mode
PR10 A
PR201 10
ESCP10 A
ESC P 10
FANUC 10
.
.
.
.
.
INF
INF
INF
INF
INF
PR201
PR201
VP1000
VP1000
FANUC printer
10-inch continuous form/ASCII

10-inch continuous form/graphic
#10-G
:
:
C FILE=
PR10 A
PR201 10
ESCP10 A
ESC P 10
FANUC 10
.
.
.
.
.
INF
INF
INF
INF
INF
PR201
PR201
VP1000
VP1000
FANUC printer

#15-A
:
:
C FILE=
PR15 A
PR201 15
ESCP15 A
ESC P 15
.
.
.
.
INF
INF
INF
INF
PR201
PR201
VP1000
VP1000

#15-G
:
:
C FILE=
PR15 A
PR201 15
ESCP15 A
ESC P 15
.
.
.
.
INF
INF
INF
INF
PR201
PR201
VP1000
VP1000
#A4L-A
: (Note)
:
C FILE=
PRA4 A
PR201 A4
. INF
. INF
PR201
PR201
A4 portrait, cut sheet/ASCII

A4 portrait, cut sheet/graphic
#A4L-G
: (Note)
:
C FILE=
PRA4 A
PR201 A4
. INF
. INF
PR201
PR201
A4 portrait, cut sheet/ASCII

A4 portrait, cut sheet/graphic
r.c
om
#10-A
:
:
C FILE=

nc
AMROFTRP.
DAT
Point of
change
ce
nt
e
Name of file to
be edited
.c
Note
#A4L-A and #A4L-G are unavailable in the output to
VP1000.
(5) Setting the line spacing

This item can specify the line spacing of a diagram. The file to be
edited is the one specified according to the descriptions in Section
1.4.4.
Name of file to be
edited
*.INF
Point of change
LPI (H) (1B) (C) (T20) ; (H) (1B)
number>) ;
LDRLPI (H) (1B) (C) (H) (1B)
number>) ;
(T15) ;
Settings
(C)
(T<decimal
(C)
(T<decimal
(6) Setting the left margin

This item can specify the left margin of a diagram. The file to be
edited is the one specified according to the descriptions in (4).
Name of file to be
edited
*.INF
Point of change
LMARGIN
(L000) ;
187
Settings
(H) (1B) (C) (H) (1B) (C) (L<decimal

number>) ;
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(7) Setting the title of printout

This item can change the title of a diagram.
Settings
(C) (<any character string consisting of up to
60 half-size (or 30 full-size) characters>) ;
ce
nt
e
@ SYS-TITLE
(*** SYSTEM & PARAMETER ***) ;
@ CMT-TITLE
(*** SYMBOL & COMMENT ***) ;
@ LAD-TITLE
(*** LADDER DIAGRAM ***) ;
@ STEP-TITLE
(*** STEP SEQUENCE DIAGRAM ***) ;
@ IO-TITLE
(*** I/O MODULE DATA ***) ;
@ MSG-TITLE
(*** MESSAGE DATA ***) ;
@ TIT-TITLE
(*** TITLE DATA ***) ;
@ CRS-TITLE
(*** CROSS-REFERENCE ***) ;
@ BIT-TITLE
(*** BIT ADDRESS MAP ***) ;
om
I-PRTOUT. JPN.
I-PRTOUT. ENG.
Point of change
r.c
Name of file to be edited
Notes
1 These point of changes are in the file, I_PRTOUT. ENG.
2 Onebyte katakana characters cannot be used.
nc
(8) Setting the cross-reference list output format guidance information

This item can specify characters to be output as guidance information
to be output during cross-reference listing. In the CROSSINF.DAT
file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning are valid as guidance
information.
Name of file to be
edited
GUIDE=
Settings
Any character string consisting
of up to 19 bytes
(9) Setting the cross-reference list output information

This item can specify step and/or net numbers to be output as
cross-reference information. If both step and net numbers are
specified, which is to be printed first can also be specified. In the
CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning are
valid as cross-reference information.
.c
CROSSINF.DAT
Point of change
188
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
Name of file to be
edited
NET-INF=
STEP-INF=
Settings
When only the net number is
output:
NET-INT=1
STEP-INF=0
When only the step number is
output:
NET-INT=0
STEP-INF=1
When the net and step
numbers are output in the
stated sequence:
NET-INT=1
STEP-INF=2
When the step and net
numbers are output in the
stated sequence:
NET-INT=2
STEP-INF=1
r.c
om
CROSSINF.DAT
Point of change
ce
nt
e
(10)Specifying the cross-reference list output format

This item enables a character string to be printed at the beginning of
the step and net numbers. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no
semicolon at the beginning are valid.
Name of file to be
edited
CROSSINF.DAT
Point of change
FORM=
Settings
Character string+%s
nc
Note
Only letters in lowercase are valid as %s.
.c
(11) Setting the cross-reference list read/write coil guidance information

This item can set a comment about coil attributes. In the
valid.
Name of file to be
edited
CROSSINF.DAT
Point of change
READ=
WRITE=
Settings
Character string consisting of
up to 13 bytes.
READ=-| |- -| / |:
WRITE=-( )- -( / )- :
(12)Specifying the cross-reference list linefeed

This item can insert a space line between addresses. In the
valid.
Name of file to be
edited
CROSSINF.DAT
189
Point of change
NL=
Settings
Decimal number
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
Note
In this case, space lines as many as the specified value plus
1 are inserted between addresses. (If 0 is specified as the
linefeed count, no space line is inserted between
addresses.)
Name of file to be
edited
FF=
Settings
0=the page is not advanced

1=the page is advanced
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
CROSSINF.DAT
Point of change
om
(13)Specifying the cross-reference list page break

This item can specify a page break between address types. In the
valid.
190
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
Environment settings for diagram printout - example 1 (settings in file

AMROFTRP.DAT)
When 2 is
selected as
the printout
paper
*
*
*
*
(The upper margin is set to 5

characters.)
Changing the types of
printout paper
(The name is changed from

2:10inch/graphic to 2:EPSON
10. )
Changing the type of printer
(The printer is changed to

EPSON VP1000 and the paper is
changed to 10-inch forms.)
.c
When 3 is
selected as
the printout
paper
*
*
*
*
om
Changing the upper margin
r.c
*
*
*
*
(The name is changed from 1:10

inch/ASCII to 1:NEC 10.)
#PAPER=10-G
#10-A=NEC 10
LENGTHL=11
LENGTH=11
WIDTHL=10
WIDTH=10
PITCHL=15/120
PITCH=20/120
LINESL=83
LINES=55
RATIOL=2/3
RATIO=2/3
GRAMODL=14
GRAMOD=16
ANKMODL=0
ANKMOD=1
LEFTMGL=0
LEFTWG=0
TOPMGL=5
TOPMG=0
LCNTL=4
C FILE=PR10 A.INF
O FILE=PRTDAT.DMP
#END
#10-G=EPSON 10
LENGTHL=11
LENGTH=11
WIDTHL=10
WIDTH=10
PITCHL=15/120
PITCH=20/120
LINESL=83
LINES=55
RATIOL=2/3
RATIO=2/3
GRAMODL=14
GRAMOD=16
ANKMODL=0
ANKMOD=1
LEFTMGL=0
LEFTWG=0
TOPMGL=0
TOPMG=0
LCNTL=4
C FILE=ESCP10 A.INF
O FILE=PRTDAT.DMP
#END
#15-A=15 inch/ASCII
LENGTHL=11
LENGTH=11
WIDTHL=15
WIDTH=15
PITCHL=15/120
PITCH=20/120
LINESL=83
LINES=55
RATIOL=2/3
RATIO=2/3
GRAMODL=16
GRAMOD=16
ANKMODL=1
ANKMOD=1
LEFTMGL=0
LEFTWG=0
TOPMGL=0
TOPMG=0
LCNTL=5
C FILE=PR15 A.INF
O FILE=PRTDAT.DMP
#END
* #15-G=15 inch
ce
nt
e
When 1 is
selected as
the printout
paper
Changing the types of printout paper
nc
#PAPER=10-G
#10-A=10 inch/ASCII
LENGTHL=11
LENGTH=11
WIDTHL=10
WIDTH=10
PITCHL=15/120
PITCH=20/120
LINESL=83
LINES=55
RATIOL=2/3
RATIO=2/3
GRAMODL=14
GRAMOD=16
ANKMODL=0
ANKMOD=1
LEFTMGL=0
LEFTWG=0
TOPMGL=0
TOPMG=0
LCNTL=4
C FILE=PR10 A.INF
O FILE=PRTDAT.DMP
#END
#10-G=10 inch/graphic
LENGTHL=11
LENGTH=11
WIDTHL=10
WIDTH=10
PITCHL=15/120
PITCH=20/120
LINESL=83
LINES=55
RATIOL=2/3
RATIO=2/3
GRAMODL=14
GRAMOD=16
ANKMODL=0
ANKMOD=1
LEFTMGL=0
LEFTWG=0
TOPMGL=0
TOPMG=0
LCNTL=4
C FILE=PR201 10.INF
O FILE=PRTDAT.DMP
#END
#15-A=15 inch/ASCII
LENGTHL=11
LENGTH=11
WIDTHL=15
WIDTH=15
PITCHL=15/120
PITCH=20/120
LINESL=83
LINES=55
RATIOL=2/3
RATIO=2/3
GRAMODL=16
GRAMOD=16
ANKMODL=1
ANKMOD=1
LEFTMGL=0
LEFTWG=0
TOPMGL=0
TOPMG=0
LCNTL=4
C FILE=PR15 A.INF
O FILE=PRTDAT.DMP
#END
#15-G=15 inch
Changing the spacing between

the LADDER nets
(The net spacing for the LADDER
diagram is widened.)
Note
An asterisk (*) indicates data which can be modified.
191
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
PR201H3 CNTINF {
CRLF
FORMF
CPI
CANCEL
LDRCPI
* LPI
* LDRLPI
* LMARGIN
RMARGIN
LDRCHAR
JPNSET
JPNRESET
}
(H)(OD,OA);
(H)(OC);
(H)(1B)(C)(H);
(H)(18);
(H)(1B)(C)(Q);
(H)(1B)(C)(T20);
(H)(1B)(C)(T15);
(H)(1B)(C)(L000);
(H)(1B)(C)(/078);
(H)(1B)(C)(J0014);
(H)(1B)(C)(K);
(H)(1B)(C)(H);
ce
nt
e
r.c
:
:
Setting the spacing between

lines
Setting the left margin
(Left margin is set to 5 characters.)
(Line spacing is set to 25.)

:
:
:
nc
om
Environment settings for diagram printout - example 2 (settings in file

PR201 10.INF)
PR201H3 CNTINF {
CRLF
FORMF
CANCEL
CPI
LDRCPI
LPI
LDRLPI
LMARGIN
RMARGIN
LDRCHAR
JPNSET
JPNRESET
}
(H)(OD,OA);
(H)(OC);
(H)(18);
(H)(1B)(C)(H);
(H)(1B)(C)(Q);
(H)(1B)(C)(T25);
(H)(1B)(C)(T15);
(H)(1B)(C)(L005);
(H)(1B)(C)(/078);
(H)(1B)(C)(J0014);
(H)(1B)(C)(K);
(H)(1B)(C)(H);
.c
Note
An asterisk (*) indicates data which can be modified.
192
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
:
GUIDE=STEP No./NET No.
NET-INF=2
STEP-INF=1
FROM=S%s/N%s
READ=-I I-!-I/I- :
WRITE=-()- -(/)- :
NL=1
FF=0
;
r.c
D Sample cross reference output
om
Environment settings for diagram output - example 3 (sample setting 1

of the CROSSINF.DAT file)
D Sample setting of the CROSSINF.DAT file
[C:DATASAMPLE]
*** Cross reference ***
ce
nt
e
PAGE 1
STEP NO./NET No.
Address
X0.0
Symbol Comment
: S00045/N00009 S00049/N00012 S00053/N00013 S00082/N00017

S00088/N00020 S00094/N0002
X0.1
: S00050/N00010 S00054/N00012 S00059/N00015 S00065/N00017

S00077/N00029
MULTIPLE COIL USED
Y0.0
nc
: S00045/N00009 S00128/N00062 S00256/N00098
R0.0
.c
: S00009/N00003 S00012/N00008 S00014/N00009 S00015/N00010

S00022/N00010 S00024/N00012 S00033/N00015 S00045/N00017
S00047/N00019 S00074/N00032 S00079/N00035
: S00002/N00001
193
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
:
GUIDE=step number
NET-INF=0
STEP-INF=1
FROM=S%s
READ=read
WRITE=write
NL=0
FF=0
;
r.c
D Sample cross reference output
om
Environment settings for diagram output - example 4 (sample setting 2

of the CROSSINF.DAT file)
D Sample setting of the CROSSINF.DAT file
ce
nt
e
[C:DATASAMPLE]
*** Cross reference ***
PAGE 1
Step number
Address
Symbol Comment
.c
nc
X0.0
Read : S00045 S00049 S00053 S00082 S00088 S00094
X0.1
Read : S00050 S00054 S00059 S00065 S00077
MULTIPLE COIL USED
Y0.0
Write: S00045 S00128 S00256
R0.0
Read : S00009 S00012 S00014 S00015 S00022 S00024 S00033 S00045
S00047 S00074 S00079
Write: S00002
3.5.3.6
Changing the Printer

Specification
Upon the completion of installation, the default printer is set to EPSON

VP1000.
(1) Changing the printer specification to NEC PR201
To enable output to an NEC PR201 printer, change the setting file by
means of the procedure described below. (In the following example,
the floppy disk drive is drive A, installed drive is under the C: \
FLADDER directory, and the file is changed from the DOS prompt.)
[Operation]
1) Copy the AMROFTRP.PR file from the APPENDIX directory of
Volume 1.5 of system floppy disk to the install directory.
Example:C: \ CD FLADDER
Enter
C: \ FLADDER>COPY A: \ APPENDIX \
AMROFTRP.PR C:
194
Enter
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
2) Delete the AMROPTRP.DAT file from install directory.

Example:C: \ FLADDER>DEL AMROPTRP.DAT
Enter
3) Change the name of the AMROFTRP.PR file to

AMROPTRP.DAT.
Example:C: \ FLADDER>RENAME AMROFTRP.PR
AMROPTRP.DAT
Enter
om
Note
To reenable output to the EPSON VP1000 printer, perform
steps 1) through 3), replacing AMROFTRP.PR with
AMROFTRP.ESC.
r.c
(2) Changing the printer specification to a FANUC printer

For details, see Section 3.5.3.5 (4).
ce
nt
e
Note
FANUC PRINTER is connected to a serial port with
RS-232-C cable.
Please set the communication mode from DOS prompt
before start by the following command.
(Example) When connected to a serial port COM1.
C:/>MODE COM1:4800,N,8,2
.c
Compilation
During compilation, an edited source program is translated into an object

file executable by the PMC. Uncompiled programs cannot use online
function and cannot be transferred to the RAM for the PMC. Compilation
can be performed in one of two modes: normal mode and condensed
mode.
nc
3.5.4
Enter
Compile
Source
program
Object
file
Transferred to the
ROM writer
and PMC
D Condensed mode
A source program can be compiled in condensed mode. When a
ladder with the same number of steps is compiled in condensed mode,
the size of the created object file is smaller than that created in normal
mode. As a result, condensed mode has the advantages listed below.
195
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
1) A larger C language area can be allocated.

Normal mode
Condensed mode
Ladder
Ladder
C
language
C
language
om
Object file
ce
nt
e
r.c
2) Time required for compilation is reduced.

3) Time required for transfer from the personal computer to the
PMC is reduced.
4) A ROM module with a smaller capacity may be used.
On the other hand, condensed mode has the restrictions described
below.
1) Memory map changes (area expansion) are likely to occur when
instructions, symbols, comments, and so forth are added when a
ROM format file generated by compilation in condensed mode
is transferred to the PMC and edited with the builtin editing
function. In this case, the user needs to pay attention to possible
overlap between the ladder area and C language area.
Ladder
Ladder
ROM format file
nc
C
language
C
language
.c
2) A ROM format file generated by compilation in condensed mode

cannot be compared with a ROM format file generated by
compilation in normal mode.
D Changing the order of subprograms
When a program is compiled, the source program, subdivided into
subprograms, is converted to a single ROM file. Within the ROM
file, subprograms are arranged in ascending order of subprogram
numbers.
Overlap (A C language program

map change is required.)
196
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.5.4.1
Start and Terminate
(1) Start
[Operation]
1) Select [compil] (compile) from the offline menu.
2) The compile screen appears.
PMCRB4
: C:DATASAMPLE
Source program name
Output to ROM format file

SYMBOL & COMMENT
[F6]
YES NET COMMENT
[F7] POINTERS ONLY
ce
nt
e
r.c
<0>[C:FLADDER
om
Compile
1 EXEC
6 SYMBOL 7 NETCMT 8 CONDNS 9 DOS
10 END
Fig.3.5.4.1 (a) Compile Menu Screen
.c
nc
D General Flow of Operation for compiling
[COMPIL]
F3
Specify input program
[ EXEC ]
[CONDNS]
F1
w
w
Offline menu
F8
Offline menu
Fig.3.5.4.1 (b) Compiling General Operation and Screens
(2) Compile
(a) Normal mode
[Operation] 1) Select F1 [EXEC].
2) Compile processing is performed in normal
mode.
(b) Condense mode
[Operation] 1) Select F8 [CONDNS].
197
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
2) Compile processing is performed in condense

mode.
(3) Displaying the results of compile processing
Pressing F2 [MAP] after the completion of compile processing
displays a memory map for the object file.
The results of compile processing are displayed by pressing F3
[ERROR] on the compile screen, regardless of whether an error or
warning has been output. Moreover, the results of compile
processing are output to a textformat file, as described below.
om
Error count =00002 Warning count =00000
ce
nt
e
Compile completed
r.c
C:DATASAMPLE
##### PASSI #####
Output the compile result in two passes.
MESSAGE
SYMBOL
LEVEL1.#LA
Ladder program exists beyond END1 instruction.
(00111net)
Net No.
LEVEL2.#LA
in each
P1.#LA
subprogram.
P2.#LA
There is no SP instruction at the top of the subprogram.
##### PASS2 #####
Fig.3.5.4.1 (c) Compile Result
Compile
PMCRB4
Source program name
.c
nc
PASS1: Convert to object

PASS2: Syntax check
If many errors have occurred, those errors can be easily identified by
viewing the relevant file with the text editor or by printing out the file.
The results of execution can also be displayed using a utility function.
(See Section 3.5.9.)
Example: When the program shown below is compiled, the
following files are output to the C:DATA directory:
Execution result file SAMPLE.ERR
Map file SAMPLE.MAP
<0>[C:FLADDER
: C:DATASAMPLE
Compile Normal End
Compile completed
1 EXEC
2 MAP
3 ERROR 4
error count=000000
warning count=000000
6 SYMBOL 7 NETCMT 8 CONDNS 9 DOS
Fig.3.5.4.1 (d) Complile Completed Screen
198
10 END
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(4) DOS command

You can call MSDOS shell by pushing F9 [DOS] key.
If you want to terminate this, key in the command as bellow at
MSDOS command line.
A : \>EXIT
1) Select [END] or press the
Esc
om
(5) Termination
[Operation]
key.
2) The screen display returns to the main menu screen.
3.5.4.2
r.c
These options initial value can be changed at the Program option setup.
(Refer to 3.5.7 Program option setup.)
Compile Options
nc
ce
nt
e
(1) F6 [SYMBOL]
Select whether output or not output the symbol & comment data to
ROM format file.
However,the symbols which can not be displayed on CRT/MDI
(7bytes or more symbols) and the coil comments assigned to them
never output to object file.
D YES: (Default setting)
The symbols which can be displayed on CRT/MDI(6bytes or less
symbols) and the coil comments assigned to them are output to object
file.
They can be displayed on CRT/MDI.
D NO :
No symbol/coil comment is converted to object file.
Any symbol and coil comment is not displayed on CRT/MDI.
.c
(2) F7 [NETCMT]
If Net comment is used in ladder program, you can choose whether
Net comment pointer (Note1) is output to object file or not.
D POINTERS ONLY : (Default setting)
To edit the ladder program by CNC online editor and decompile the
data select this setting.
However, ladder size gets larger because Net comment pointer is
output to object file.
D NO :
Any Net comment pointer is not output to object file. In this case,
ladder size in the object file is saved.
However, decompile the object file makes its net comment data
information lost.
199
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
om
Note
Net comment has its own character information only in a
source program on the personal computer.
Compiled object file does not include any net comment
characters.
Only Net comment pointer( = information of net comment
position.) can be output to object file as an functional
instruction NOP.
This Net comment pointer helps to restore net comment
date at decompiling the object file that is edited on CNC
online editor.
Password Set Function
It enables a password to be added during compilation.

The password can be used to prohibit ladder programs from being
displayed or edited. This function requires to be set the program option.
(Refer to 3.5.7 Setting program options.)
r.c
3.5.4.3
ce
nt
e
(1) Password types

There are two password types.
Each password consists of up to 8 alphanumeric characters.
Type
Use
Password (R)
Password to allow display on the CNC.
Password (R/W)
Password to allow display and editing on the CNC.
nc
(2) Password setting (compile)

1) When no password
Go to 10).
When password RW & R, RW or R
After compilation [EXEC] or [CONDNS] is selected, you will be
prompted to specify whether to use a password.
.c
Do you enter password? (Y/N)
To set a password, press Y

If password RW & R or R go to 2).
If password RW go to 6).
If it is unnecessary to set a password, press N
Go to 10).
2) The password (R) set screen appears.
Enter password (R)
3) Enter a password.
D A password that can be used is a combination of 8 or less
letters and/or numerals.
D Uppercase and lowercase letters are not distinguished from
each other. (If a lowercase letter is entered, it is assumed to
be uppercase.)
200
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
D It is impossible to use space, kana, kanji, and special

characters (such as *, #, and @).
D Some character strings are unusable.
If one such character string is entered as a password, an error
message is displayed. In such a case, use another character
string.
D An entered password is not displayed on the screen.
D If the
Enter
key is pressed before any valid password is
D When
Esc
om
specified, use of a password is not specified.

If password=RW&R go to 6).
If password=R go to 10).
is pressed, an attempt to specify a password is
discontinued.
r.c
Go to 1).
4) The password configuration screen appears.
Verification (R)
ce
nt
e
5) You will be prompted to enter the same password as entered

before, to ensure that your password was entered correctly.
D When the password entered this time matches one that was
entered before, it is accepted.
D When they do not match, the message Password mismatch
is displayed.
You are allowed to retry entering twice.
D When
Esc
is pressed, an attempt to specify a password is
discontinued.
.c
nc
Go to 1).
If password=R is specified.
Go to 10).
6) The password (R/W) set screen appears.
Enter password (R/W)
7) Enter a password (R/W).

D A password that can be used is a combination of 8 or less
letters and/or numerals.
D Uppercase and lowercase letters are not distinguished from
each other. (If a lowercase letter is entered, it is assumed to
be uppercase.)
D It is impossible to use space, kana, kanji, and special
characters (such as *, #, and @).
D Some character strings are unusable.
If one such character string is entered as a password, an error
message is displayed. In such a case, use another character
string.
D An entered password is not displayed on the screen.
D If the
Enter
key is pressed before any valid password is
specified, use of a password is not specified.

Go to 10).
201
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
D When
Esc
is pressed, the attempt to specify a password is
rejected.
Go to 1).
8) The password confirmation screen appears.
Verification (R/W)
Esc
r.c
D When
om
9) You will be prompted to enter the same password as entered

before, to ensure that your password was entered correctly.
D When the password entered this time matches one that was
entered before, it is accepted.
D When they do not match, the message Password mismatch
is displayed.
You are allowed to retry entering twice.
is pressed, the attempt to specify a password is
rejected.
ce
nt
e
10)Compilation begins.
Go to 1).
3.5.5
During decompilation, an object file is translated into a source program

that can be edited or printed out.
Decompilation
nc
Data that is uploaded from the PMC or is read from ROM is object file
data. Data in the object file cannot be edited or printed out. Such data
must be decompiled before it can be edited or printed out.
Decompile
Source
program
Note
To decompile a passwordprotected object file, it is
necessary to enter a password. (See Section 3.5.4.)
.c
Object file
202
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.5.5.1
(1) Start
[Operation]
1) Select [DECOMP] (decompile) from the main menu.
2) The decompile screen appears.
Decompile
PMCRB4
Source program name
: C:DATASAMPLE
Output to Source Program

SYMBOL & COMMENT
Merge
[F4] YES
Duplicated symbol definition [F5] MEMORY CARD DATA (effective)
ce
nt
e
r.c
<0>[C:FLADDER
om
Operation
1 EXEC
4 MERGE 5 SYMBOL 6
10 END
Fig.3.5.5.1 (a) Decompile Menu Screen
nc
(2) Decompiling
[Operation]
1) Select [EXEC] on the decompile screen.
2) Decompilation is performed and the result is displayed.
.c
(3) Decompiling
Upon the completion of decompiling, pressing the F2 [MAP] key can
display the memory map of the object file.
The result of decompiling can be displayed by pressing the F3
[ERROR] key on the decompile screen, regardless of whether an error
or warning has occurred.
If many errors have occurred, the error file can be viewed or printed
using a text editor.
The result of decompiling can also be displayed using the utility
function (see Section 3.5.9).
(Example) When the program shown below is decompiled :
Result file SAMPLE.ERR and map file SAMPLE.MAP
are output to directory C: \ DATA.
203
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
Decompile
PMCRB4
Source program name
<0>[C:FLADDER
: C:DATASAMPLE
Decompile normal end

error count=000000
warning count=000000
1 EXEC
2 MAP
r.c
om
Decompile completed
3 ERROR 4 MERGE 5 SYMBOL 6
10 END
Fig.3.5.5.1 (b) Decompile end Screen
ce
nt
e
(4) Termination
[Operation]
1) Select [END].
3.5.5.2
(1) Merge
In case the existent file is specified for output source program when
decompiling, the existent source program is deleted and new source
program is created with the contents of object file.
In this case it is possible to merge the Ladder in object file with the
Symbol/Commnet in source program by specifying the
undermentioned functionkey.
Decompile
PMCRB4
Source program name

V
<0>[C:FLADDER
: C:DATASAMPLE
Output to source program

SYMBOL & COMMENT
Merge
[F4] YES
Duplicated symbol definition [F5] MEMORY CARD DATA (effective)
.c
nc
Decompile Option
1 EXEC
4 MERGE 5 SYMBOL 6
Fig.3.5.5.2 Decompile Menu Screen
204
10 END
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
om
(a) F4 [MERGE]
This specification decides whether to merge the symbol/comment by
NO or YES.
1) NO :
The existent source program is deleted and new source program
is created with the contents of object file.
There is no display of F5[SYNBOL] in this condition.
2) YES : (Default setting)
The symbol/commnet in source program is merged with that in
object file. As for the other data except symbol/comment, object
file is effective.
Just after this specification, F5[SYMBOL] will be displayed to
specify which symbol definition is effective, either in source
program or in object file, when they are in conflict.
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
(b) F5 [SYMBOL]
F5[SYMBOL] will be displayed when YES is specified for
F4[MERGE].
This specification decides which symbol definition in either source
program or object file is effective when they are in conflict.
1) SOURCE DATA
The symbol definition in source program is effective.
2) MEMORY CARD DATA : (Default setting)
The symbol definition in object file is effective.
205
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(c) The combination of F4[MERGE] and F5[DUPADR], and its result.

Object file
COIL-COMMENT(30byte)
X0.0
R1.4
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY
XXXXXX
YYYYYY
Source program
AAAAAAAAAA
BBBBBBBB
YYYYYY
(i) The result of MERGE = NO

Source program
X0.0
R1.4
XXXXXX
YYYYYY
COIL-COMMENT(30byte)
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
BBBBBBBBBBBBBB
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY
r.c
X0.0
Y2.3
Y4.7
RELAY-COMMENT(16byte)
ce
nt
e
- Symbol/Comment data
ADDRESS SYMBOL(16byte)
om
- Symbol/Comment data
ADDRESS SYMBOL(6byte)
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY
(ii) The result of MERGE = YES and Symbol definition = MEMORY CARD DATA.
Source program
nc
XXXXXX
BBBBBBBB
YYYYYY
BBBBBBBBBBBBBB
.c
X0.0
Y2.3
R1.4
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY
(iii)The result of MERGE = YES and Symbol definition=SOURCE DATA. program.

Source program
AAAAAAAAAA
BBBBBBBB
YYYYYY
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
BBBBBBBBBBBBBB
X0.0
Y2.3
Y4.7
206
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.5.5.3
To decompile a password-protected file, it is necessary to enter a

password.
Password
Set password type
Password type to be entered
Both password (R) and (R/W)
Password (R/W)
Password (R/W)
Password (R/W)
Password (R)
Password (R)
Enter password (R)
om
1) After discompilation [EXEC] is selected, the following password

entry screen appears.
r.c
Note
If an R/W password has been set up, password (R/W) is
displayed.
ce
nt
e
2) When the valid password is entered, discompilation begins.

If the newly entered password is incorrect, an error message is
displayed, and processing discontinues.
(You are allowed to retry entering twice.)
When
Esc
.c
nc
rejected.
207
is pressed, the request to start discompilation is
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.5.5.4
When the results of decompilation are output to a source program, they

are split into units of subprograms and output to different files. For
details, see Section 2.6.2.
Outputting to Split Files
Object file
Source program
LEVEL1.#LA
om
Ladder 1st level

END1 (SUB 1)
LEVEL2.#LA
Ladder 2nd level

END2 (SUB 2)
r.c
LEVEL3.#LA
Ladder 3rd level
END3 (SUB 48)
SP (SUB 71)
P001
ce
nt
e
P1.#LA
Subprogram P1
(Ladder)
SPE (SUB 72)
SP (SUB 71)
P002
P2.#SS
Subprogram P2
(Step Sequence)
nc
SPE (SUB 72)
P003
.c
SP (SUB 71)
P3.#LA
Subprogram P3
(Ladder)
SPE (SUB 72)
The END instruction is not in the source program.
END (SUB 64)
The instruction is automatically added when the

program is compiled.
208
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.5.6
There are three types of input/output operations, as described below.
Input/Output
(1) Transfer with the PMC RAM via an RS-232C interface.

(2) Input/output between PMC RAM and a memory card or floppy disk
(FD) via a Floppy Cassette Adapter or Handy File, respectively.
om
(3) Backup and restore source program and.

[Operation]
1) Switch off the personal computer and input/output unit, and
connect them via an RS-232-C cable. (See Appendix H.)
2) Select [I/O] (input/output) from the main menu.
3) The input/output menu appears.
Ports are set according to the values in the following data files.
I/O Port Setting
(1) FLIO_AT.DAT
These files are in text format. So, a text editor can be used to change
set values in the files.
r.c
3.5.6.1
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
(2) Contents of the FLIO_AT.DAT

(effective data section only)
209
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
DATA-BLOCK=IO-PORT-SET
=COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2
FA-WRITER
PMC-L
PMC-M
PMC-M (TT)
PMC-M (AXIS)
PMC-MMC
PMC-MMC (AXIS)
PMC-N
PMC-P
PMC-QA
PMC-M (I/O)
PMC-M (I/O, TT)
PMC-M (I/O, AXIS)
PMC-N (I/O)
PMC-RB
PMC-RC
PMC-RA1
PMC-RA2
PMC-RB2
PMC-RA3
PMC-RB3
PMC-RC3
PMC-PA1
PMC-PA3
PMC-QC
PMC-NB
PMC-RB4
PMC-RC4
PMC-RB4 (STEP-SEQ)
PMC-RC4 (STEP-SEQ)
=COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
Entity on the left-hand side of each equal sign (=) : Device

Entity on the right-hand side of each equal sign (=) : Represented in
the format of each MODE command. Only the first parameter (port
number) and second parameter (baud rate) can be changed.
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
PMC-WRITER
210
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.5.6.2
Data can be transferred serially via RS-232-C.
Transfer to and from

PMC
Ladder Editing
Package
CNC
9600/4800bps
Download
9600/4800bps
Upload
om
PMC (I/O) screen
PMC (I/O) screen
9600/4800bps
Comparison
r.c
PMC (I/O) screen
Baud rate setting
ce
nt
e
(1) Download
[Operation]
1) Select F3 : [PMC] on the I/O menu screen.
2) Select F1 : [DNLOAD] (download) on the PMC menu screen to
display the source program name.
* 3) Press the System key of the CNC.
* 4) Press the CNC soft keys [PMC], [I/O], [HOST], and [EXEC] in
this order.
.c
nc
5) Press the
Enter
key.
6) Downloading is executed. During operation, the indication

EXECUTING blinks.
7) When downloading terminates normally, the indication
NORMAL END is output.
(2) Upload
Language data (C language) other than Ladder programs can be used.
When uploading or comparison is executed from PMC, one of two
data types (LADDER or ALL) can be specified. LADDER and ALL
have the following meanings:
LADDER
Sequence program only
ALL
Sequence program and language data (C language)
Specify either data type in step 6) of the operation described below:

[Operation]
1) Select F3 : [PMC] on the I/O menu screen.
2) Select F2 : [UPLOAD] on the PMC menu screen to display the
source program name.
this order.
211
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
5) Press the
Enter
key.
6) Select either LADDER or ALL with cursor.

7) Uploading is executed. During operation, the indication
EXECUTING blinks.
8) When uploading terminates normally, the indication
om
(3) Comparison
[Operation]
1) Select F3 :[PMC] on the I/O menu screen.
2) Select F3 :[COMPAR] (comparison) on the PMC menu screen to
display the source program name.
5) Press the
Enter
key.
r.c
this order.
ce
nt
e
6) Comparison is executed. .During operation, the indication

EXECUTING blinks.
7) When comparison terminates normally, the indication
(4) Termination
[Operation]
1) Select [END].
3.5.6.3
.c
nc
Note
In the operations above, an asterisk prefixed to a circled
number represents an operation on the CNC.
Memory Card Interface in

the Personal Computer
and Memory Card
A object file compiled in a personal computer can be converted to a

memory card format file, and output to a memory card via a memory card
interface installed in the personal computer. The PMC program on the
memory card can be sent to the RAM of the CNC by inserting the memory
card in the memory card interface in the CNC. By reversing the
procedure, programs can be transferred from the CNC RAM to the
memory card.
(1) PMC program transfer from the personal computer to the CNC
[Operation]
1) Install a memory card interface in the personal computer.
2) F3 : Select [COMPILE] and compile a source program.
3) Return to the main menu, and select [I/O] (input/output) from it.
4) Select F5 : [MCARD] (memory card) from the input/output
menu.
212
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
I/O
PMCRB3
FA WRITER
PMC WRITER
PMC
Handy File
Memory Card
BACKUP
ROM format file
END
om
F1 KEY :
F2 KEY :
F3 KEY :
F4 KEY :
F5 KEY :
F6 KEY :
F9 KEY :
F10 KEY :
[C: FLADDER]
4 FDCAS 5 MCARD 6 BACKUP 7
9 ROMFIL 10 END
r.c
1 FAWRT 2 PMCWRT 3 PMC
Fig.3.5.6.3 (a) Input/Output Menu
ce
nt
e
5) Select [WRITE] (write (programmer memory card)).

I/O (MEMORY CARD)
PMCRC3
[C: FLADDER]
F1 KEY : WRITE (PROGRAMMER Memory Card)
F2 KEY : READ (PROGRAMMER Memory Card)
.c
nc
F10 KEY : END
1 WRITE
2 READ
10 END
Fig.3.5.6.3 (b) Memory Card Input/Output Screen
6) Convert the file from source program to memory card format.

Specify the following items for execution.
D Name of the source program
Display the source program name.
D Name of the memory card file
Specify the name of a memory card file (accessible via a
memory card interface in the CNC) to be created by
conversion, and the drive where the memory card is inserted.
213
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
I/O (TO MCARD)
PMCRC3
<0>[C: FLADDER]
WRITE (Programmer Memory card)

Source program name
: C:DATASAMPLE
10 END
r.c
1 EXEC
om
Memory Card FILE NAME

: D:SAMPLE.#BF
(Specify the MEMORY CARD drive)
Fig.3.5.6.3 (c) Input/Output (to MCARD) Screen
The following operations are performed on the CNC side.
ce
nt
e
7) The following two methods can be used to insert the memory card
output in step 6) into the memory card interface in the CNC and
read programs on the memory card.
D Using the I/O function of the PMC
Specify MCARD, READ, and the desired filename or file
number at DEVICE, FUNCTION, and FILE NO. on the
PMC I/O screen, respectively, then press soft key [EXEC].
Sequence programs are read from the memory card file
created in step 5).
nc
PMC I/O screen
CHANNEL
DEVICE
FUNCTION
DATA KIND
FILE NO.
( #NAME )
MONIT STOP
=
=
=
=
=
1
MCARD
READ
LADDER
.c
PMC I/O PROGRAM
EXEC
CANCEL
WRITE
READ
COMPAR
D Using the BOOT SYSTEM at poweron time

Each CNC can read the sequence program from the memory
card by using the BOOT SYSTEM at poweron time.
Refer to manual of each CNC for the operation.
214
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
om
(2) PMC program transfer from the CNC to the personal computer
PMC programs are written to a memory card, using a memory card
interface in the CNC. When the memory card is inserted in a memory
card interface in the personal computer, the PMC programs on the
memory card can be accessed as ordinary DOS files.
[Operation]
1) Specify MCARD, WRITE, DATA KIND, and the desired
filename (omissible) at DEVICE, FUNCTION, LADDER, and
FILE NO. on the PMC I/O screen, respectively, then press soft
key [EXEC]. Sequence programs are output to the memory.
PMC I/O screen
PMC I/O PROGRAM
1
MCARD
WRITE
LADDER
r.c
=
=
=
=
=
ce
nt
e
CHANNEL
DEVICE
FUNCTION
DATA KIND
FILE NO.
( #NAME )
MONIT STOP
EXEC
.c
w
w
w
5)
6)
WRITE
READ
COMPAR
The following operations are performed on the personal

computer side.
Install a memory card interface in the personal computer.
Select [I/O] (input/output) from the main menu.
Select F5 : [MCARD] (memory card) from the input/output
menu. (See Fig. 3.5.6.3 (a).)
Select [READ] (read (programmer memory card)). (See Fig.
3.5.6.3 (b).)
Convert the PMC programs output to a memory card in step 1)
from memory card format to source program format by
specifying the following items and running the utility.
D Name of the memory card file
Specify the name of the conversion source memory card file
written to the memory card, and the memory card drive in
which the memory card is inserted.
Display the source program name.
nc
2)
3)
4)
CANCEL
215
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
I/O (FROM MCARD)
PMCRC3
<0>[C: FLADDER]
READ (Programmer Memory card)

Memory Card FILE NAME
: D:SAMPLE.#BF
(Specify the MEMORY CARD drive)
10 END
r.c
1 EXEC
: C:DATASAMPLE
om
Source program name
Fig.3.5.6.3 (d) Input/Output (from MCARD) Screen
3.5.6.4
Handy File+3.5 Floppy
Disk (MSDOS Format)
ce
nt
e
7) Discompile the object file after conversion, and the resultant file
will become able to be edited on the personal computer.
If a object file compiled on a personal computer is converted to Handy

File format and output to a 3.5 floppy disk (DOS format), the PMC
program can be read into the RAM of the CNC via a Handy File interface
connected to the CNC. This operation can be reversed.
.c
nc
(1) PMC program transfer from the personal computer to the CNC
[Operation]
1) Compile a source program.
2) Select [I/O] (input/output) from the main menu.
3) Select F4 : [FDCAS] (Handy File) from the input/output menu.
(See Fig. 3.5.6.4 (a).)
4) Select [WRITE] (WRITE (Programmer Handy File)).
I/O (FDCAS)
PMCRB3
[C: FLADDER]
F1 KEY : WRITE(Programmer Handy File)
F2 KEY : READ (Programmer Handy File)
F10 KEY : END
1 WRITE
2 READ
Fig.3.5.6.4 (a) FDCAS Input/Output Screen
216
10 END
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
5) Convert the source program to Handy File format by specifying

the following items and running the utility.
Display the source program.
D Name of the Handy File format file
Specify the name to be assigned to the Handy File format file
(accessible by the Handy File) to be generated by conversion,
and the 3.5 disk drive to which the file is output; 5 floppy
disk cannot be used.
PMCRC3
<0>[C: FLADDER]
WRITE (Programmer Handy File)

Source program name
om
I/O (TO FDCAS)
: C:DATASAMPLE
ce
nt
e
r.c
Handy File File name

: D:SAMPLE.#SF
(Specify the floppy disk drive)
1 EXEC
10 END
Fig.3.5.6.4 (b) Input/Output (to FDCAS) Screen
nc
The following operations are performed on the CNC side.

6) Connect the CNC and Handy File, and insert the 3.5 floppy disk
generated in step 4) into the Handy File.
.c
(2) PMC program transfer from the CNC to the personal computer
[Operation]
1) Connect the CNC and Handy File, and output the PMC program
to a 3.5 floppy disk (DOS format).
The following operations are performed on the personal
computer side.
2) Select [I/O] (input/output) from the main unit.
3) Select F4 : [FDCAS] (Handy File) from the input/output menu.
4) Select [READ] (READ (Programmer Handy File)). (See Fig.
3.5.6.4 (a).)
5) Convert the PMC program on a 3.5 floppy disk (Handy File
format) generated in step 1) to source program by specifying the
following items and running the utility.
D Name of the Handy File format file
Specify the program name output in step 1), and the 3.5
floppy disk drive where the floppy disk is inserted.
Display the source program.
217
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
I/O (FROM FDCAS)
PMCRC3
<0>[C: FLADDER]
READ (Programmer Handy File)

Handy File File name
: D:SAMPLE.#SF
(Specify the floppy disk drive)
10 END
r.c
1 EXEC
: C:DATASAMPLE
om
Source program name
Fig.3.5.6.4 (c) Input/Output (from FDCAS) Screen
3.5.6.5
Backup of User Program
ce
nt
e
6) Decompile the source program file after conversion, and the

resultant file will become able to be edited on the personal
computer.
This backup function can back up the source program, which the system
uses, to another source program and can restore the backup source
program.
Please use this function when you back up the source program under
editing or under debugging.
PMCRC3
[C: FLADDER]
F1 KEY : BACKUP
F2 KEY : RESTORE
F10 KEY : END
.c
nc
I/O (BACKUP)
1 BACKUF 2 RESTOP 3
10 END
Fig.3.5.6.5 (a) Backup Menu Screen
(1) Backup
[Operation]
1) Select [BACKUP] from the input/ output menu.
2) Select F1 : [BACKUP] from the backup menu.
3) Enter a backup program name, and press [EXEC].
218
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
I/O (BACKUP)
PMCRB3
<0>[C: FLADDER]
BACKUP (SOURCE PROGRAM BACKUP PROGRAM)
10 END
r.c
1 EXEC
om
BACKUP PROGRAM NAME
Fig.3.5.6.5 (b) Backup Screen
4) When backup terminates normaly, the NORMAL END

message is displayed.
ce
nt
e
(2) Restoring
[Operation]
1) Select [BACKUP] from the input/ output menu.
2) Select F2 : [RESTOR] from the backup menu.
3) Enter a backup program name, and press [EXEC].
I/O (RESIORE)
PMCRB3
<0>[C: FLADDER]
nc
RESTORE (SOURCE PROGRAM BACKUP PROGRAM)

:
.c
BACKUP PROGRAM NAME
1 EXEC
10 END
Fig.3.5.6.5 (c) Restoring Screen
4) When restoring terminates normaly, the NORMAL END

message is displayed.
219
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.5.6.6
Converting ROM Format
File
It is possible to convert between a ROM format file and a memory card

format file. ROM format file conversion function can be used at the
following cases.
a.In the case of using ROM format file which is created by FAPT
LADDER.
b.In the case of link processing.
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
(1) Operation
1) Select [I/O] from the offline menu. The input/output menu
screen is displayed.
2) Select F9:[ROMFIL] from the input/output menu. The
I/O(ROM format file) screen (Fig.3.5.6.6(a)) is displayed.
3) Select F1:[WRITE]. The I/O (MCARDROM FILE) screen
is displayed.
Select F2:[READ]. The I/O (ROM FILEMCARD) screen is
displayed.
4) Input a ROM format file name and a memory card file name.
5) When press [EXEC], it is possible to convert between a ROM
format file and a memory card file.
I/O (ROM format file)
PMCRB3
[C: FLADDER]
F1 KEY : WRITE (Memory Card ROM format file)

F2 KEY : READ (Memory Card ROM format file)
3.5.7
.c
nc
F10 KEY : END
Setting Program
Options
1 WRITE
2 READ
10END
Fig.3.5.6.6(a)
This function enables the setting of options for each function.

Specified data is stored for each source program.
[Operation]
or
1) Using the
key, position the cursor to the function for
which options are to be set.

2) On the setting screen for each function, select an item by positioning
the cursor with the
or
key.
220
or
key, then change the setting with the
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
Program option setup

[C: DATASAMPLE ]
2 PRINT
3 COMPIL 4 DECOMP5 I/O
6 SETUP 7 MNEEDT8 UTILTY 9 ONLINE 10 END
r.c
1 EDIT
om
Compile
Decompile
Fig.3.5.7
3.5.7.1
ce
nt
e
The user can set the compile function options as described below. These
options, when set, are used as the initial values of the compile options for
the offline function, or are used for compile processing performed with
the online functions.
For details of each option, see Section 3.5.4.
Compile
(1) Condense
This option specifies whether condense mode is to be used for
compile processing.
nc
(2) Symbol
This option specifies whether to output symbol or comment data to
an object file.
.c
(3) Net comment

This option specifies whether to output net comment data to an object
file.
(4) Password
This option specifies whether to display the password setting dialog
box at compile time.
[NO]
: Does not display the dialog box. (Password
setting is disabled.)
[RW&R]
: Displays the password (R/W) setting dialog box
as well as the password (R) setting dialog box.
[RW]
: Displays only the password (R/W) setting dialog
box.
[R]
: Displays only the password (R) setting dialog
box.
221
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01

[C: DATASAMPLE ]
[Compile]
2 PRINT
[OFF/ON]
[NOT USE/USE]
[NO/POINTERS]
[NO/RW&R/RW/R]
6 SETUP 7 MNEEDT8 UTILTY 9 ONLINE 10 END
r.c
1 EDIT
:
:
:
:
om
condense
symbol/comment
net comment
password
Fig.3.5.7.1
3.5.7.2
ce
nt
e
The user can set the decompile function options as described below.
These options, when set, are used as the initial values of the offline
function decompile options, or are used for the decompile processing
performed with the online functions.
For details of each option, see Section 3.5.5.
Decompile
.c
nc
(1) Symbol merge

This option specifies whether to merge source program data and
object file symbol/comment data at decompile time.
[NO]
: Does not merge symbol and comment data.
[SOURCE]
: Gives priority to the source data when
duplicate addresses exist in the source
program and the symbol data of the object
file.
[MEMORY CARD] : Gives priority to the object file data when
duplicate addresses exist in the source
program and the symbol data of the object
file.
222
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01

[C: DATASAMPLE ]
[Decompile]
2 PRINT
r.c
1 EDIT
END
: [NO/SOURCE/MEMORY_CARD]
om
symbol merge
Fig.3.5.7.2
Modifying Program
Option Initial Values
(OPTION.CNF)
When a new program is to be created, the initial value of each option can
be modified by means of the procedure described below.
[Operation]
1) Using the text editor, open the OPTION.CNF file under the directory
where this system is installed.
2) Find the section corresponding to a model subject to initial value
modification (that is, a line starting with #).
Example: #32;(RA3) for PMCRA3
#41;(RB4_STEP) for PMCRB4 (STEP SEQ)
ce
nt
e
3.5.7.3
.c
nc
Note
A section having a line beginning with a semicolon (;)
contains legend data. Any attempt to modify such a section
is ignored.
3) Find the subsection corresponding to a function subject to initial

value modification (that is, a line starting with *).
4) Specify a new value for the option whose initial value is to be
modified.
Table 3.5.7.3
Subsection
*COMPILE
Option
condense
Setting and function

0:
1:
symbol
(Symbol/
comment)
0:
1:
netcmt
0:
(Net comment)
1:
223
Performs compile processing in normal

mode.
Performs compile processing in
condense mode.
Dose not output symbol/comment data
to the object file.
Output symbol/comment data to the
object file.
Dose not output net comment data to the
object file.
Output net comment data to the object
file.
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
Subsection
Option
Setting and function
password
0:
1:
2:
3:
*DECOMPILE symbolmerge
0:
1:
Dose not perform merge processing.

Preforms merge processing with priority
given to source program data.
Preforms merge processing with priority
given to object file data.
om
2:
Dose not set a password.

Sets a password (R/W) and password
(R).
Sets a password (R/W).
Sets a password (R).
r.c
Note
Never attempt to modify the values of options that are not
listed in the above table. Otherwise, the system may
malfunction.
Mnemonic Editing
3.5.8.1
A source program is converted to a mnemonic file that can be edited with

any standard text editor.
[Operation]
1) Select [MNEEDT] (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.
2) The mnemonic menu screen appears (Fig. 3.5.8.1 (a)).
nc
Conversion of a Source
Program to a Mnemonic
File
ce
nt
e
3.5.8
MNEMONIC EDIT
PMCRC4
<0>[C:FLADDER ]
[C: FLADDER ]
SOURCE PROGRAM MNEMONIC FILE

MNEMONIC FILE SOURCE PROGRAM
EXECUTE USER BATCH FILE
END
.c
F1 KEY :
F2 KEY :
F3 KEY :
F10 KEY :
MNECNV
2 SRCCNV 3 BATCH 4
10 END
Fig.3.5.8.1 (a) Mnemonic Menu Screen
3) Select [MNECNV] (conversion to mnemonic).

4) The mnemonic conversion screen appears (Fig. 3.5.8.1(b)).
224
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
SOURCE MNEMONIC
PMCRC4
<0>[C:FLADDER ]
[C: FLADDER ]
:
:
:
, 4 : LADDER
, 5 : I/O MODULE
, 6 : MESSAGE
)
)
)
)
: FOR _PG
10 END
r.c
1 EXEC
SOURCE PROGRAM NAME

MNEMONIC FILE NAME
CONVERT DATA KIND SELECTION
0 : ALL
1 : SYSTEM PARAMETER
2 : TITLE
3 : SYMBOL & COMMENT
MODE
Selected Options
/ERC FLMNE.ERR /OUT V
om
1)
2)
3)
(
(
(
(
4)
Fig.3.5.8.1 (b) Mnemonic Conversion Screen
nc
ce
nt
e
5) Specify the following items:

D Source program name
Display the name of the source program to be converted.
The source program that is specified in program selection as
initial menu.
D Mnemonic file name
Specify the name of the mnemonic file to which a source
program is converted. Up to 40 characters can be specified.
D Data conversion selection
Specify data files subject to conversion. All data files can be
specified or specific data files can be selected.
D Mode (setting item selection)
Specify setting items. Select items from the table below, using
the
keys.
P-G output format data is converted.

Converts the text of a Japanese-language message to
code format (Note 2).
Japanese language Comment data, which may include kanji characters, is

comment (Note)
converted.
Japanese-language format (Note 2).
FULL_OPTIONS
.c
FOR_P-G
and
225
Comment data, which may include kanji characters, is

converted.
Data including address symbols and comments, and
function instruction names treated as comments is
converted.
Data including all instruction sections, operand sections,
and comment sections is converted.
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
LABEL/
SUB-PROGRAM
Data is converted and the jump destination (label) of a

function instruction (JMPB, JMPC, CALL, SP, or another
instruction) used in a sub-program is highlighted. The
step number of the converted mnemonic data does not
agree with other setting. (The function instruction
section used in the sub-program does not agree with the
other setting.)
r.c
om
Notes
1 The item specifying Japanese language comment
conversion cannot be selected on an English mode system.
2 Format displayed on the code or Japanese-language input
mode screen during message editing.
6) Select [EXEC] upon completion of item specification.
7) Source program is converted to a mnemonic file.
Enter
is pressed after conversion.
ce
nt
e
8) An error message is displayed if
The mnemonic conversion screen appears when
Space
is pressed
after conversion.
3.5.8.2
MNEMONIC SOURCE
PMCRC4
<0>[C:FLADDER ]
[C: FLADDER ]
:
:
1) MNEMONIC FILE NAME

2) SOURCE PROGRAM NAME
.c
nc
Conversion of a
Mnemonic File to a
Source Program
A mnemonic text file edited in a certain format using a atandard text editor
is converted to a source program.
[Operation]
1) Select [MNEEDT] (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.
2) The mnemonic menu screen appears.
3) Select [SRCCNV] (conversion to a source program).
4) The source program conversion screen appears (Fig. 3.5.8.2).
1 EXEC
10 END
Fig.3.5.8.2 Source Program Conversion Screen
226
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
5) Specify the following items:

D Mnemonic file name
Specify the name of a mnemonic file to be converted. Up to 40
characters can be specified.
D Source program name
Display the name of the source program to which a mnemonic
file is to be converted.
6) Select [EXEC] upon completion of item specification.
7) Mnemonic file is converted to a source program.
Enter
is pressed after conversion.
om
8) An error message is displayed if
The source program conversion screen appears when
3.5.8.3
Mnemonic File Format
is
r.c
pressed after conversion.
Space
If a mnemonic file created using a commercially available text editor is

to be converted to a source program, the mnemonic file must be in the
following format.
ce
nt
e
(1) Identification code

The mnemonic file defines data with four different identification
codes that each begin with %.
ID code
Description
%@A
%@E
%@0 to 5
% only
Beginning of ALL-format data

End of ALL-format data
Beginning of unit-format data
End of unit-format data
nc
The unit-format data mentioned above varies from one PMC model
to another as listed below.
Unit-format data
.c
Parameter
Title
Symbol & comment
Ladder
Message
I/O module
PMC model
R series/PA3/QC/NB/NB2
%@0
%@1
%@2 or %@2-C (Note 1)
%@3
%@4
%@5
Note
%@2, and %@2-C correspond to source format types as
follows:
%@2 : FORMAT-A/B
%@2-C: FORMAT-C
Ladder Editing Package uses FORMAT-C only. This means that, as part
of conversion to a mnemonic file, conversion to %@2-C type code is
performed. For conversion to a source program, however, both type codes
(%@2 and %@2-C) can be used.
(2) Linefeed code
Control character LF (0AH) is defined as a linefeed code. Control
character CR (0DH) is ignored.
227
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
om
(3) Reserved symbols

1) ; This special character is reserved for use in ladder data.
D A semicolon is used in the ladder data section to separate ladder
data from a comment. Characters that follow a semicolon are
treated as a comment. When a mnemonic file is converted back
to a source program, a semicolon and a comment that follows
it are not generated.
2) : This special character is reserved for use in ladder and I/O
module data.
D A colon is used in the ladder data section to separate a net
number from ladder data. Data that precedes a colon is treated
as a net number.
D A colon is also used in the I/O module data section to separate
a channel number from I/O module data. Data that precedes a
colon is treated as a channel number.
r.c
(4) Control character

The dollar character $ is used as control character in the mnemonic
file. Every dollar character in the sentence must be described as $$
in the mnemonic file.
ce
nt
e
(a) Symbol and comment data

1) Description of address and symbol
Describe the address data and the symbol strings in a same line.
Describe the address data to top of line and the symbol strings
describe after address data with blank character or horizontal
tabulation character as delimitter.
Symbol
Blank character or horizontal tabulation character

Address
2) Description of relay comment and coil comment

Describe the relay comment and coil comment after address
defined in (1).
The first string between two single quotation marks after mark
$1 is relay comment. And next string between two single
quotation marks is coil comment.
| $1 KEEP POWER ON KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON

Coil comment
.c
nc
| R0200.0 UNIT3POWER

Relay comment
Mark of comment data
line (only $1)
When relay comment is not used, a part of relay comment must be

described by double single quotation marks.
228
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
| $1
INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE
om
Note
Every single quotation mark in the relay comment and coil
comment string must be described as $ + in the
mnemonic file.
(b) Ladder data
1) Description of net comment
The net comment data is specified by (* and *) characters.
Characters
Means
Start of net comment
*)
Terminater of net comment
r.c
(*
ce
nt
e
2) Designation of new page (for ladder diagram printing)

Designation of new page for ladder diagram printing must be
described as $P or $p in the mnemonic file.
Characters
$P or $p
3.5.8.4
Designation of new page

(for ladder diagram printing)
(a) Parameter
Following example is for PMC-RC4. For other PMCs, see
APPENDIX A FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL PMC
MODELS
1) PMC-RC4
%@0
2
BCD
3
NO
4
PMC RC4
5
000000
6
50
7
100
%
[EOB]
.c
nc
Sample Mnemonic Files

(Single-format)
Means
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
229
Counter data type (Binary or BCD)

Whether an operators panel is used
(YES: Used, NO: Not used)
PMC model
(PMC-RC3/PMC-RC4/PMC-RC4
(STEPSEQ))
Start address of language program link
control statement data
(0 or 800000 to 8FFFFF
(hexadecimal))
Percentage of language program
execution time
(1% to 99%)
Ladder execution time
(Always 100%)
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
Note
When specifying YES in Item 3 above (whether an
operators panel is used), specify the KEY address, LED
address, KEY image address, and LED image address as
follows:
(b) Title (common to all models)
ce
nt
e
r.c
%@1
01 MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME
02 MACHINE TOOL NAME
03 CNC & PMC NAME
04 PMC PROGRAM NO.
05 EDITION NO.
06 PROGRAM DRAWING NO.
07 DATE OF PROGRAMING
08 PROGRAM DESIGNED BY
09 ROM WRITTEN BY
10 REMARKS
%
[EOB]
om
3 YES X0000 Y0000 R0000 R0010
(c) Symbols and comments (common to all models)

%@2C
Symbol
R0200.0 UNIT3POWER
$1 KEEP POWER ON
KEEP UNIT3 POWER ON
Display of
symbol/comment
no Relay comment
[EOB]
.c
nc
Coil Comment
Relay comment
R0200.1 UNIT2ACT
$1 $OIWER$$
KEEP UNIT4 $$POWER$ ON
R0300.0
Control code
$1 KEEP POWER ON
KEEP UNIT4 POWER ON
P0008
OPENFRONT
$1 OPEN FRONT COVER
L0100
INITIALIZE
$1
230
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
(d) Ladder (common to all models)

1) FOR_P-G
%@3
N00001: SUB
Symbol
Relay comment
; SP
;(SUBPR1 ) SUB PROG. NO.01
; [SUB PROGRAM
DATA NO.01]
ce
nt
e
71
P1
r.c
2) FULL_OPTIONS
om
%@3
RD X0.4
OR Y80.6
WRT D300.1
SUB 1
RD.NOT X3.0
SUB 40
2
8191
D300
SUB 2
%
[EOB]
X0.0
68
L100
N00003: RD
SUB
X0.1
73
L100
N00004: SUB
69
L100
nc
N00002: RD
SUB
N00005: SUB
N00006: SUB
WRT
N00008: SUB
N00009: SUB
%
.c
N00007: RD
DEC
231
Coil comment
;(XADRS1 ) JUMPB LABEL L001
; JMPB
no Comment
;(LABEL1 )
no Relay
; [LABEL L00001]
comment
;(XADRS2 ) JUMPC LABEL L001
; JMPC
;(LABEL1 )
; [LABEL L00001]
; LBL
;(LABEL1 )
; [LABEL L00001]
; SPE
; SP
;(SP1000 ) SUB PROGRAM NO.1
;(RADRS00)
;(DADRS04)
72
71
P2
R0.0
D0
2
D0.0
72
; SPE
64
; END
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3) LABEL/SUB-PROGRAM
Address
RD
JMPB
LABEL1
SP1000
RD
JMPB
LBL
SPE
SP
RD
DEC
WRT
SPE
END
SUBPR1 ;<P1
> SUB PROG. NO.01
; [SUB PROGRAM
DATA NO.01]
Coil comment
Symbol
XADRS1 ;<X0.0
> JUMPB LABEL L001
LABEL1 ;<L100
>
;[LABEL L00001]
XADRS2 ;<X0.1
> JUMPB LABEL L001
LABEL1 ;<L100
> [LABEL L00001]
;<L100
>
;[LABEL L00001]
;<P2
RADR00 ;<R0.0
DADR04 ;<D0
2
D0.0
> SUB PROG. NO.1

>
>
ce
nt
e
om
SP
(e) Message
nc
%@4
A00.0 2100020 ATC DOOR NOT CLOSE
A00.1 2100022 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT ON
A00.2 2100020 EDTOK KEY SWITCH ON
%
[EOB]
(f) I/O module
0
0
1 ID64A
4 OD64B
.c
%@5
X000 1
Y008 1
%
[EOB]
232
Relay comment
r.c
%@3
SUBPR1
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.5.8.5
%@A
%@0
2 BINARY
3 NO
4 PMCRB4
%
%@1
01 MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME
10 REMARKS
%
%@2C
R0.200.0 UNIT3POWER
$1 KEEP POWER ON
KEEP UNIT3 POWER ON
R0200.1 UNIT2ACT
$1 $POWER$$
KEEP UNIT4 $$POWER$ ON
R0300.0
$1 KEEP POWER ON
KEEP UNIT4 POWER ON
P0008
OPENFRONT
$1 OPEN FRONT COVER
L0100
INITIALIZE
$1
%
%@3
RD R1001.0
OR R120.3
AND R1000.2
WRT Y2000.4
(*
Inscribe the net comment here. Any characters
which are input with personal computer can be used.
*)
RD R1001.0
AND R1000.2
WRT Y23.4
(* $P *)
form feed position (in Ladder diagram printing)
RD R101.0
OR R123.4
AND R100.2
WRT Y200.4
%
%@4
A00.0 2100020 ACT DOOR NOT CLOSE
A00.1 2101022 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT ON
%
%@5
X000 1 0 1 ID16C
Y008 1 0 4 OD32A
%
%@E
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
Sample Mnemonic Files

(All-format)
om
(a) PMC-RB4
233
Net
comment
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.5.8.6
r.c
om
The Note if the Step

Sequence Function is
Selected When Setting a
Model
When using the step sequence method, mnemonic instructions cannot be

coded.
The mnemonic conversion functions need following notes:
1) Programming by Mnemonic Instructions
A step sequence program cannot be created with mnemonic
instructions. It is impossible to create a step sequence program with
a text editor, or to read the program by means of mnemonic-to-source
conversion.
2) Source-to-Mnemonic and Mnemonic-to-Source Conversions
If source-to-mnemonic conversion is executed for a step sequence
source program, only ladder subprograms are converted to
mnemonics, step sequence subprograms being ignored. If a step
sequence source program is subjected to source-to-mnemonic
conversion, then to mnemonic-to-source conversion, the original
source program will not be replicated.
3.5.8.7
The batch file FLMNE.BAT can be executed by suspending the execution

of mnemonic editing.
A users own batch file generated by editing the contents of the
FLMNE.BAT file with a standard text editor can also be executed.
D Example 1
The execution of mnemonic editing is suspended and text editor VZ is
activated. (In this case, VZ must be defined in the environment variable
PATH beforehand.)
[Operation]
1) Use a standard text editor to create the batch file FLMNE.BAT
as follows:
nc
ce
nt
e
User Batch File

Execution
.c
VZ
2)
3)
4)
5)
Select MNEEDT (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.

The mnemonic menu screen appears.
Select ([BATCH] (user batch file execution).
The following message appears:
Execute FLMNE.BAT.
Add parameter(s)? [A(Add), N(Not add), S(Stop)]
6) Specify A (Add), and specify *.HEX as the parameter. VZ is

activated and a list of files with the extension .HEX is displayed.
7) To restart memu screen of mnemonic, terminate VZ.
Hit any key!
8) Press any key. The screen display returns to the mnemonic menu
screen.
D Example 2
The execution of Ladder Editing Package is suspended. Then, the
command processor COMMAND.COM is activated and DOS
commands are enabled. Create FLMNE.BAT as follows:
234
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
COMMAND
3.5.9
Utility
UTILITY
F1 Dos
F2 floadat
F3 View result
F4 Linker
om
Selecting [UTILTY] from the off-line menu enables the use of the utility
functions. The following functions are registered at installation:
r.c
Fig.3.5.9 (a) Utility Screen
1) Moving to the DOS command line (starting COMMAND.COM)
ce
nt
e
F1
: Dos
2) Data transfer between the P-G and personal computer

(FLOADAT) (For details, see Section 3.4 in Appendix C.)
F2
: floadat
3) Referencing the results of compile or decompile processing

F3
: View result
F4
: Linker
nc
4) Link function
.c
3) detailed below.
The user can register any desired command as a utility. For an explanation
of how to perform this registration, see Section 3.1 of Appendix C.
(1) Referencing the results of compile or decompile processing (starting
FLVIEW.BAT)
Upon the completion of compile or decompile processing, an
execution result file and map file are created. These files are of text
format, enabling their reference using a commercially available
editor. By using this function, however, these files can be referenced
even before Ladder Editing Package is terminated.
[Operation]
1) Press
F3
on the utility screen.
2) Then, the pop-up screen shown below appears. These files can
now be referenced by pressing the
Enter
key.
EXEC FILE NAME

FLVIEW, BAT %P.err
The user can specify the type of files to be referenced, simply by changing
the file name extension (.err: Execution result file/.map: Map file).
235
3. OPERATION
B62884EN/01
3.5.10
ON-LINE FUNCTION can be selected from the off-line menu. For
details, see Section 3.4 On-Line Function.
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
Selecting On-Line
Function from Off-Line
Function
236
4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST
B62884EN/01
ERROR MESSAGE LIST
functionname : Exxxx : errormessage
om
This chapter describes the general output messages. Messages are output
and categorized:
Error number (four digits)
Category (error, warning, etc.)
(1) Function name
r.c
Name of the processing which caused the error
ce
nt
e
The processing causing the error is represented by a single

alphabetic character.
Processing
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
N
Initial menu and option setting

Title editing
I/O module editing
System parameter editing
Ladder diagram/step diagram editing
Symbol and comment editing
Message editing
Printing
Compilation
Decompilation
Mnemonic conversion
Input/Output
Online monitor
.c
nc
Funcion name
(2) Message category

Output messages are classified into the following categories. The
categories are represented by single alphabetic characters.
D F: Fatal error. The error number is 2xxx.

The system can be operated, but processing of the user program
cannot be continued because of an error.
D E: Error. The error number is 3xxx.
Processing is continued, but the results will be lost. Alternatively,
the processing is stopped.
D W: Warning. The error number is 4xxx.
Processing is continued. The results will be retained, but cannot be
guaranteed.
237
4.1
B62884EN/01
(Program Name Selection, Option Setting, OnLine Execution)
A : INITIAL MENU
4.1.1
Fatal Error
Contents
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY.
A:F2001
INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE.
A:F2004
THIS DATA CAN NOT BE HANDLED

AT THIS VERSION OF FAPT LADDER.
A:F2005
SOURCE PROGRAM HAS WRONG

FILE (S).
A:F2006
NOT FOUND XXXX FILE.
A:F2007
NOT FOUND XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM.
A:F2008
CANNOT OPEN XXXX FILE.
A:F2009
CANNOT CLOSE XXXX FILE.
A:F2010
XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM BROKEN.
The source program contains an invalid file or does not contain necessary files.
Check the source program files.
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
A:F2000
om
Message
r.c
Number
238
B62884EN/01
4.1.2
Error
Number
Message
Contents
ENTER PROGRAM NAME.
The name of the source program has not been input. Input the source
program name.
A:E3121
THE SOURCE PROGRAM DOES

NOT EXIST.
A:E3122
PMC MODEL FILE IS NOT FOUND.
The specified source program is not compatible with the system. For
details of which machine models are compatible, see Section 1.2.2.
Some system files (xxxx.TBL) cannot be found. Reinstall the system.
A:E3124
CANNOT CREATE NEW PROGRAM XXXX.
The specified source program cannot be created because a directory

having the same name already exists. Input another source program
name.
A:E3125
ILLEGAL PATH OF SOURCE PROGRAM NAME.
The specified path does not exist. Check the input source program
name.
A:E3126
SOURCE PROGRAM TYPE DIFFERENT.
A FORMATA/B program was specified when copying a source program. FORMATA/B cannot be used. Convert the program via a
memory card or mnemonic format file. For details, see Appendix D.
A:E3128
XXXX FILE READ ERROR.
A:E3130
XXXX FILE READ ERROR. HIT ANY File xxxx cannot be read.
KEY.
A:E3131
XXXX FILE OPEN ERROR.
A:E3132
XXXX FILE CLOSE ERROR.
File xxxx cannot be closed.
A:E3133
INSUFFICIENT DISK ERROR.
The file cannot be output because there is insufficient free space on

the disk. Terminate the system and delete any unnecessary files in
the disk to create more free space.
A:E3134
INVALID OPTION INITIALIZED.

(XXXX FILE WAS UPDATED.)
The option file (OPTION) has been initialized because its data was
destroyed.
A:E3137
CANNOT CREATE FILE XXXX.
File xxxx cannot be created.
A:E3138
ILLEGAL SOURCE PROGRAM

NAME.
A:E3139
ILLEGAL XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM NAME.
A:E3140
NOT FOUND FILE.
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
A:E3120
File xxxx cannot be read.
.c
nc
File xxxx cannot be opened.
CANNOT OPEN FILE.
A:E3144
CANNOT CLOSE FILE.
File xxxx cannot be closed.
A:E3145
FILE I/O ERROR.
An error occurred during file access.
A:E3146
XXXX FILE I/O ERROR.
A:E3147
UNKNOWN PMC SERIES.
A:E3148
XXXX FILE WRITE ERROR. HIT

ANY KEY.
A:E3143
Data cannot be written to file xxxx.
239
B62884EN/01
4.2
B : TITLE EDITING
4.2.1
Error
Message
Contents
B:E3020
FILE READ ERROR. HIT ANY KEY
The source program title file (TITLE) cannot be read.
B:E3021
FILE WRITE ERROR. HIT ANY KEY
Data cannot be written to the source program title file (TITLE) or control file (CONTROL).
B:E3022
FILE I/O ERROR. HIT ANY KEY
An error occurred during file access.
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
Number
240
B62884EN/01
4.3
C : I/O MODULE
EDITING
4.3.1
Error
Message
Contents
C:E3021
The source program I/O module file (IOMODULE) cannot be read.
C:E3022
Data cannot be written to the source program I/O module file (IOMODULE) or control file (CONTROL).
C:E3023
INPUT DATA INVALID
Input data is invalid. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm the input procedure.
C:E3024
APPOINTED GROUP NOT EXIST
The specified group does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm the
input value range.
C:E3025
APPOINTED BASE NOT EXIST
The specified base does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm the
input value range.
C:E3026
APPOINTED SLOT NOT EXIST
The specified slot does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm the input
value range.
C:E3027
APPOINTED ID CODE NOT EXIST
C:E3028
INPUT KEY NOT USED
C:E3030
ADDRESS APPOINT ILLEGAL
The specified module cannot be used at this address. Check whether

the output module is specified at address X and whether the input
module is specified at address Y.
C:E3032
THE SAME GROUP,BASE AND

SLOT ARE ALREADY SPECIFIED.
The specified group, base, and slot have already been assigned
modules.
Specify different group, base, and slot numbers.
C:E3033
INVALID CHANNEL NO. APPOINT
The specified channel does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm

which channels can be specified.
C:E3034
INVALID DATA, EXCEPT 0, IS SPE- For I/O UnitB (xxx:poweron/off information), a slot other than slot
CIFIED AT THE SLOT OF XXX AS
0 cannot be specified. Specify slot 0.
I/O UNIT B.
r.c
ce
nt
e
.c
nc
The specified module does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm the
module names that can be specified.
4.3.2
om
Number
Warning
Number
THE SAME GROUP,BASE AND

C:W4020
Message
Contents
The specified group, base, and slot have already been assigned
modules. Check whether the same numbers can be assigned for the
group, base, and slot.
C:W4021
INVALID DATA, EXCEPT 0, IS SPE- For the I/O UnitB module, a base other than base 0 cannot be speciCIFIED AT THE BASE OF I/O UNIT fied. Specify base 0.
B.
C:W4022
BOTH I/O UNITA AND UNITB

ARE SPECIFIED IN THE SAME
GROUP.
I/O UnitA and I/O UnitB cannot be assigned to the same group.
Specify different groups.
241
B62884EN/01
4.4
D : SYSTEM
PARAMETER
EDITING
4.4.1
om
Error
Message
Contents
D:E3020
The source program system parameter file (SYSPARAM) cannot be

read.
D:E3021
Data cannot be written to the source program system parameter file

(SYSPARAM) or control file (CONTROL).
D:E3022
INVALID VALUE
D:E3023
INPUT DATA INVALID
D:E3024
OPERATER PANEL ADDRESS

ERROR
r.c
Number
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
When 1 (YES) is set in

6) OPERATOR PANEL (which specifies whether the F0 operator
panel is used or not), specify the following address:
7) KEY ADDRESS
8) LED ADDRESS
242
B62884EN/01
4.5
E : LADDER/STEP
SEQUENCE EDITING
4.5.1
Number
om
Fatal Error
Message
CANNOT READ FILE.
E:F2101
CANNOT WRITE FILE.
E:F2102
CANNOT SEEK FILE.
r.c
E:F2100
Contents
Error (at Editing

Ladder Diagram)
Number
Message
ce
nt
e
4.5.2
INPUT INVALID
E:E3101
ADDRESS BIT NOTHING
E:E3102
RELAY OR COIL NOTHING
E:E3103
HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL
E:E3104
VERTICAL LINE ILLEGAL
E:E3105
ILLEGAL FUNCTION NO.
E:E3106
FUNCTION LINE ILLEGAL
E:E3107
PARAMETER NOTHING
E:E3108
LADDER ILLEGAL
E:E3109
ERROR NET FOUND
E:E3110
RELAY OR COIL FORBIT
E:E3111
PLEASE COMPLETE NET
E:E3112
ILLEGAL NETS CLEAED
E:E3113
ADDRESS BIT NOTHING
Contents
.c
nc
E:E3100
FUNCTION NOT FOUND
E:E3115
LADDER BROKEN
E:E3116
ADDRESS BYTE NOTHING
E:E3117
STACK REGISTER OVER(8BIT)

ERR
E:E3118
PLEASE KEY IN SUB NO.
E:E3119
PLEASE KEY IN FUN NO.
E:E3120
SYMBOL/COMMENT DATA TOO

LARGE
E:E3121
SAME SYMBOL DATA EXIST
E:E3122
SOURCE PROGRAM OF DIFFERENT FILE FORMAT
E:E3114
A FormatB and C programs were found to exist when renaming a

FormatA program.
243
Number
B62884EN/01
Message
Contents
ILLEGAL SUBPROGRAM NAME
E:E3124
TOO DEEP NESTING OF SUB

PROGRAM
An invalid subprogram name was input.
E:E3125
SAME SUBPROGRAM NAME

EXISTS
E:E3126
THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITION

WILL BE CANCELLED, IF YOU
SELECT TO ZOOM .
E:E3127
SOURCE PROGRAM OF
ANOTHER FORMAT EXISTS
A FormatB and C programs, having the same name as that specified

for the Copy/Move to file function, was found to exist during FormatA
program editing.
E:E3128
ILLEGAL SYMBOL
A value that cannot be used as a symbol was input during symbol

editing.
E:E3129
PROGRAM OPEN ERROR
E:E3130
PROGRAM NOT EXIST
E:E3131
NOT EXIST APPOINT DATA SIZE
E:E3132
PROGRAM NOT READ
E:E3133
PROGRAM NOT WRITE
E:E3134
DIRECTORY NOT EXIST
E:E3135
LADDER DATA NOT EXIST
E:E3136
PROGRAM IS OPENED
E:E3137
PROGRAM NAMES LIMIT OVER
E:E3138
CAN NOT RENAME LATMP
E:E3139
PROGRAM NOT EXIST
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
E:E3123
nc
An attempt was made to perform renaming after editing LATMP with

the File function.
4.5.3
.c
Error (at Editing Step

Sequence)
Number
Message
Contents
ILLEGAL SOURCE CODE.
A read error occurred when reading the specified intermediate code

file.
E:E3201
BUFFER SIZE OVER.
An intermediate code exceeds the Edit buffer size.
E:E3202
NUMBER OF NEST BRANCH TOO

BIG.
The maximum allowable number of branch nests has been

exceeded.
E:E3203
NUMBER OF BRANCH TOO BIG.
The maximum allowable number of branches has been exceeded.
E:E3200
E:E3204
SIZE OF TABLE BUFFER TOO BIG.
The maximum allowable number of element tables has been

exceeded.
E:E3205
UNCONNECTED STEP
SEQUENCE DIAGRAM.
The step, transition, branch, or line is not continuous.
E:E3206
SELECTED BRANCH ERROR.
The start side of the select branch does not agree with its end side.
E:E3207
PARALLEL BRANCH ERROR.
The start side of the parallel branch does not agree with its end side.
E:E3208
SYNTAX ERROR.
The sequence in the select branch is other than transition to step to

transition. Or, the sequence in the parallel branch is other than step
to transition to step.
244
B62884EN/01
Number
Message
Contents
STEP LINE SYNTAX ERROR.
The step line contains an element other than initial step, step, block
step, jump (dummy step), and serial move (vertical line).
E:E3210
TRANSITION LINE SYNTAX

ERROR.
The transition line contains an element other than initial step, step,
block step, and jump (dummy step).
E:E3211
CANNOT INSERT.
Insertion is not possible at the specified location. Or, if inserted, the

maximum coordinate value is exceeded.
E:E3212
CANNOT MAKE DIAGRAM.
A soft key that cannot be changed was specified when changing an

element.
E:E3213
HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL.
A horizontal line was specified in place of the closing code of the

branch.
E:E3214
JUMP FORWARD CHECK ERROR.
The label pointed to by JUMP does not exist.
E:E3215
CHECK INCOMPLETE ERROR.
The intermediate code cannot be created because it has not been

completely checked.
E:E3216
CHART SEQUENCE ERROR.
The step line is not properly connected to the transition line.
E:E3217
CHART START CODE ERROR.
The chart start code does not exist (step).
E:E3218
CHART END CODE ERROR.
The chart end code does not exist.
E:E3219
JUMP CLOSE ERROR.
JUMP has not been closed correctly.
E:E3220
HORIZONTAL LINE DUPLICATE

ERROR.
A branch contains two or more left end codes. (Invalid data exists
before and after the branch code.)
E:E3221
BRANCH UNCONNECTED ERROR. The branch connection is invalid.
E:E3222
BRANCH SEQUENCE ERROR.
There is an invalid code before or after the branch start and end
codes.
E:E3223
CANNOT COPY DIAGRAMS.
The copy destination is invalid.
E:E3224
CANNOT MOVE DIAGRAMS.
The move destination is invalid.
E:E3225
ILLEGAL SPECIFIED POSITION.
The specified coordinate value does not exist.
E:E3226
STRINGS NOT FOUND.
The specified character string does not exist.
E:E3227
STEP NUMBER DUPLICATE

ERROR.
The specified step number is already in use. Check which step numbers are already in use.
E:E3228
LABEL NUMBER DUPLICATE

ERROR.
The specified label is already defined.
E:E3229
CANNOT DELETE TEMPORARY

FILE.
The temporary file cannot be deleted.
E:E3230
SAME SUBPROGRAM NAME

EXISTS.
The same file already exists, but with a different extension.
E:E3231
INPUT INVALID.
Data outside the address range is set.
E:E3232
EXPECTED ADDRESS.
No subprogram number is specified.
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
E:E3209
TOO DEEP NESTING OF SUB

PROGRAM.
E:E3234
ILLEGAL FILE NAME.
E:E3235
SUBPROGRAM ALREADY
ENTRIED.
The specified subprogram is a file that is currently being edited.
E:E3236
CANNOT DELETE PROGRAM.
The intermediate code file cannot be deleted.
E:E3237
CANNOT CHANGE DATA.
Data cannot be converted because it is invalid.
E:E3233
An attempt was made to perform ZOOM for more than eight layers.
245
B62884EN/01
4.5.4
Warning (at Editing
Ladder Diagram)
Number
Message
ILLEGAL OPERATION
E:W4101
EDIT BUFFER OVER
E:W4102
70LINE/1NET OVER
E:W4103
LARGE NET APPEARED
E:W4104
MNEMONIC BUFFER OVER
E:W4105
SET COUNT OVER
E:W4106
256STEP/1NET OVER
E:W4107
THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITION WAS CANCELLED
E:W4108
THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITION WILL BE CANCELLED, IF YOU SELECT TO SAVE.
E:W4109
THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITION WILL BE CANCELLED,IF YOU SELECT TO UPDATE/APPEND.
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
E:W4100
THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITION WILL BE CANCELLED, IF YOU SELECT TO OVERWRITE.
E:W4111
MACHINE KIND AND INPUT PROGRAM NOT

CONSISTENCY !
.c
nc
E:W4110
246
B62884EN/01
4.6
F : SYMBOL &
COMMENT EDITING
4.6.1
Error
Message
om
Number
INPUT DATA ILLEGAL.
F:E3101
SYMBOL/COMMENT DATA TOO LARGE
F:E3102
SAME SYMBOL DATA EXIST
F:E3103
NO DEFINITION ADDRESS APPOINTED
F:E3104
NOT FOUND DATA ERROR
F:E3105
FILE READ ERROR HIT ANY KEY
F:E3106
FILE WRITE ERROR HIT ANY KEY
F:E3107
DATA SAVE ERROR
ce
nt
e
r.c
F:E3100
SAME ADDRESS DATA EXISTS.
F:E3109
INPUT ADDRESS DATA.
F:E3110
ILLEGAL SYMBOL.
.c
nc
F:E3108
247
B62884EN/01
4.7
G : MESSAGE
EDITING
4.7.1
Error
Number
Message
ILLEGAL CHARACTERS ARE SPECIFIED AT .
G:E3101
MESSAGE DATA TOO LARGE.
G:E3102
THE FOLLOWING DATA OF WERE DELETED.
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
G:E3100
248
B62884EN/01
4.8
H : PRINTOUT
4.8.1
Fatal Error
Message
Contents
H:F2005
SOURCE PROGRAM HAS WRONG

FILE(S). ($)
H:F2008
om
Number
r.c
4.8.2
Error
Number
Message
Contents
H:E3101
H:E3102
CANNOT READ XXXX FILE.
File xxxx cannot be read.
H:E3103
File xxxx cannot be found.
H:E3104
NOT EXIST XXXX FILE.
H:E3105
DATA INVALID XXXX FILE.
H:E3106
CANNOT WRITE XXXX FILE.
Data cannot be written to the file xxxx.
H:E3107
OUTPUT FILE NOT DEFINED.
An error occurred upon opening the output file.
H:E3108
WRITE ERROR OUTPUT FILE.
H:E3109
INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE NEED There is insufficient free space on the disk. Reserve xxxx bytes of
XXXX BYTE FREE
free space.
H:E3110
INSUFFICIENT CURRENT & TMP

DISK SPACE NEED XXXX BYTE
FREE
There is insufficient free space on the disk to perform crossreference. Reserve xxxx bytes of free space.
H:E3111
STEP NUMBER (XXXX) OVER.
The maximum allowable number of steps for the ladder diagram has
been exceeded. The maximum number of steps that can be printed
is 32767.
File xxxx does not exist.
.c
nc
The format of file xxxx is invalid.
An error occurred upon writing to the output file.
SYMBOL & COMMENT FILE READ

ERROR.
An error occurred upon reading symbol data.
H:E3113
NET COMMENT FILE READ

ERROR.
An error occurred upon reading a net comment.
H:E3114
SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA BROKEN.
The symbol data is invalid.
H:E3112
An attempt was made to reserve memory, but there was insufficient

free space.
ce
nt
e
H:E3100
249
B62884EN/01
4.8.3
Warning
Number
Message
Contents
CANCEL PRINTER OUTPUT.
The <BREAK> key was pressed before the completion of printing.
H:W4101
CANCEL FILE OUTPUT.
The <BREAK> key was pressed during file output.
H:W4102
SEL SWITCH OFF
The SEL indicator on the printer is not lit. Press the SEL button such
that the indicator lights.
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
H:W4100
250
B62884EN/01
4.9
I : COMPILE
4.9.1
Fatal Error
Number
Message
Contents
NOT ENOUGH DISK SPACE
I:F2101
OUT OF MEMORY
om
I:F2100
4.9.2
Number
r.c
Error
Message
Contents
XXXX READ ERROR
The source program cannot be read. (This error normally does not
occur during compilation.)
I:E3101
XXXX WRITE ERROR
I:E3102
XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM NAME

ILLEGAL.
An invalid source program name is specified. (This error normally

does not occur during compilation.)
I:E3103
XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM NOT

FOUND.
Source program xxxx does not exist. (This error normally does not
occur during compilation.)
I:E3105
XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM FORMAT IS DIFFERENT.
The source program format is FORMATA. (This error normally does

not occur during compilation.)
I:E3107
SYSTEM PARAMETER READ

ERROR.
The source file for the system parameter data does not exist.
I:E3108
TITLE READ ERROR.
The source file for the title data does not exist.
I:E3109
I/O MODULE READ ERROR.
The source file for the I/O module data does not exist.
I:E3110
VERIFICATION ERROR
The input password differs from the registered password.
I:E3111
THIS WORD CAN NOT BE USED

AS PASSWORD. TRY ANOTHER
WORD
Input the password correctly.
I:E3112
ONLY ALPHABETICAL AND

NUMERICAL CHARACTERS ARE
ALLOWED
The input password contains a nonalphanumeric character.
I:E3200
THERE IS AN UNDEFINED
INSTRUCTION.
An instruction that cannot be run by the specified program exists.
I:E3201
THERE IS NO COIL IN THE FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION WHICH

NEEDS THE COIL.
A functional instruction is lacking a required coil.
I:E3220
SPECIFIED VALUE FOR A PARAMETER OF THE XXXX INSTRUCTION IS OUTSIDE THE RANGE.
An outofrange value is specified in a parameter of instruction xxxx.
I:E3221
PROGRAM NUMBER IS DIFFERENT FROM PROGRAM NAME.
The parameter of the subprogram start instruction (SP) contains a

program number that does not correspond to the program name.
I:E3222
AN ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER

IS SPECIFIED FOR THE XXXX
INSTRUCTION.
An outofrange program number or an address other than a program number is specified in a parameter of instruction xxxx.
I:E3223
AN ILLEGAL LABEL NUMBER IS

SPECIFED FOR THE XXXX
INSTRUCTION.
An outofrange label number or an address other than a label number is specified in a parameter of instruction xxxx.
I:E3250
THERE IS NO LADDER PROGRAM. The ladder program is empty. Specify the END1 or END2 instruction.
ce
nt
e
I:E3100
.c
nc
The compilation results cannot be written.
251
B62884EN/01
Message
Contents
THE SIZE OF LADDER PROGRAM

IS TOO LARGE.
The size of the ladder program exceeds the maximum size specified
for the selected program type.
I:E3252
LADDER PROGRAM IS BROKEN.
An unrecognizable instruction exists.
I:E3253
LADDER EXECUTION TIME AT

THE 1ST LEVEL IS TOO LARGE.
Because the first level of the main program takes too long to execute,
the ladder cannot be executed. Make the first level smaller, or
increase the ratio of the ladder execution time in the system parameter.
I:E3254
THE NUMBER OF DIVISION OF

LADDER EXCEEDS 99.
Because the number of second level divisions in the main program

exceeds the maximum of 99, the ladder cannot be executed. Make
the second level smaller, or increase the ratio of the ladder execution
time in the system parameter.
I:E3270
SP INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE

USED IN THE MAIN PROGRAM.
SP is the start instruction for a subprogram. It cannot be used in the

main program.
I:E3271
SPE INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE

SPE is the end instruction for a subprogram. It cannot be used in the

main program.
I:E3272
JMPC INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE

The JMPC instruction performs a jump from a subprogram to the

second level of the main program. It cannot be used in the main program.
I:E3273
CALL INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE

USED EXCLUDING THE 2ND
LEVEL MAIN PROGRAM.
The CALL instruction cannot be used because a subprogram cannot

be called from other than the second level of the main program.
I:E3274
CALLU INSTRUCTION CAN NOT

BE USED EXCLUDING THE 2ND
LEVEL MAIN PROGRAM.
The CALLU instruction cannot be used because a subprogram cannot be called from other than the second level of the main program.
I:E3290
THERE IS NO SP INSTRUCTION AT
THE TOP OF THE SUBPROGRAM.
A subprogram must start with the SP instruction to indicate the start

of the subprogram.
I:E3291
THERE IS NO SPE INSTRUCTION

AT THE BOTTOM OF THE SUBPROGRAM.
A subprogram must end with the SPE instruction to indicate the end
of the subprogram.
I:E3292
LADDER PROGRAM EXISTS

BEYOND SPE INSTRUCTION.
No instructions can be placed after the SPE instruction because the

SPE instruction indicates the end of a subprogram.
I:E3293
SP INSTRUCTION IS DETECTED
IN THE SUBPROGRAM.
The SP instruction cannot be placed within a subprogram because

the SP instruction indicates the start of a subprogram.
I:E3310
THERE IS NO END1 INSTRUCTION.
The END1 instruction is not found at the end of the first level.
I:E3311
The END2 instruction is not found at the end of the second level.
I:E3312
The END3 instruction is not found at the end of the third level.
I:E3313

BEYOND END1 INSTRUCTION.
No instructions can be placed after the END1 instruction because the

END1 instruction indicates the end of the first level.
I:E3314


END2 instruction indicates the end of the second level.
I:E3315


END3 instruction indicates the end of the third level.
I:E3316

BEYOND END INSTRUCTION.
No instructions can be placed after the END instruction because the

END instruction indicates the end of the entire ladder program.
I:E3317
END1 INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE

USED.
END1 is specified for other than the first level.
I:E3318

USED.
END2 is specified for other than the second level.
I:E3319

USED.
END3 is specified for other than the third level.
I:E3320
END INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE

USED.
The END instruction is specified for the first level.
I:E3330
THERE IS NO COME INSTRUCTION.
The COME instruction is not specified when the COM instruction, that
indicates the start of the instruction control range, is specified.
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
Number
I:E3251
252
B62884EN/01
Message
Contents
CALL INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE

USED IN THE RANGE CONTROLED COM INSTRUCTION.
The CALL instruction cannot be used because a subprogram cannot

be called from within the COM instruction control range.
I:E3332
CALLU INSTRUCTION CAN NOT

BE USED IN THE RANGE CONTROLED COM INSTRUCTION.
The CALLU instruction cannot be used because a subprogram cannot be called from within the COM instruction control range.
I:E3333
ANOTHER COM INSTRUCTION

CAN NOT BE USED IN THE
RANGE CONTROLED COM
INSTRUCTION.
The COM instruction, that indicates the start of the instruction control
range, is specified twice within the range.
I:E3334
COME INSTRUCTION MUST BE

THE PAIR WITH COM.
The COME instruction, that indicates the end of the instruction control
range, is specified when the COM instruction, used to indicate the
start of the range, is not specified.
I:E3335
COME INSTRUCTION IS
DETECTED THOUGH THE CASE
OF THE COIL NUMBER SPECIFICATION.
The COME instruction is specified to indicate the end of the instruction control range when the end of the range has already been
defined as a number of coils.
I:E3340
THERE IS NO JMPE INSTRUCTION.
The JMP instruction is specified to indicate the start of the jump block,
but the JMPE instruction, that indicates the end of the block, is not
specified.
I:E3341
ANOTHER JMP INSTRUCTION

CAN NOT BE USED IN THE
RANGE OF JMP INSTRUCTION.
Another JMP instruction is specified to indicate the start of a jump

block before the JMPE instruction is specified to indicate the end of
the first block.
I:E3342
JMPE INSTRUCTION MUST BE

THE PAIR WITH JMP.
A JMPE instruction that indicates the end of a jump block is specified

when no JMP instruction, that indicates the start of a block, is specified.
I:E3343
JMPE INSTRUCTION IS DETECTED

THOUGH THE CASE OF THE COIL
NUMBER SPECIFICATION.
A JMPE instruction is specified to indicate the end of a jump block

when the end of the block has already been defined as a number of
coils.
I:E3350
THERE IS NO LABEL OF XXXX.
The JMPB instruction does not contain label xxxx that indicates the
jump destination.
I:E3351
THE LABEL OF XXXX IS USED

TWICE OR MORE.
Two or more identical label numbers are found when defining jump
destinations with the LBL instruction. Specify unique label numbers.
I:E3352
TOO MANY LABELS.
The number of jump destinations defined with the LBL instruction

exceeds the maximum allowable number that can be specified for the
selected program type. Decrease the number of defined jump destinations.
I:E3353
THE DESTINATION OF JMPB

INSTRUCTION IS BEYOND COM/
COME INSTRUCTION.
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
Number
I:E3331
The JMPB instruction cannot be used to jump from a point inside to

a point outside the COM instruction control range, or vice versa.
JMPB operations can be performed only entirely within the range or
entirely outside the range.
INSTRUCTION.
The step sequence program contains a failed instruction or an

instruction that cannot be used with the selected program type.
I:E3420
PROGRAM NUMBER IS DIFFERENT FROM PROGRAM NAME.
The parameter of the program start instruction (SP) contains a program number that does not correspond to the program name.
AN ILLEGAL STEP NUMBER IS

SPECIFIED FOR THE XXXX
INSTRUCTION.
Instruction xxxx contains an outofrange step number or an address

other than a step number.
I:E3422
AN ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER

IS SPECIFIED FOR THE XXXX
INSTRUCTION.
Instruction xxxx contains an outofrange program number or an

address other than a program number.
I:E3423
AN ILLEGAL LABEL NUMBER IS

SPECIFED FOR THE XXXX
INSTRUCTION.
Instruction xxxx contains an outofrange label number or an

address other than a label number.
I:E3440
THERE IS NO SP INSTRUCTION
AT THE TOP OF THE SUBPROGRAM.
A subprogram must start with the SP instruction to indicate the start

of the subprogram.
I:E3400
I:E3421
253
Number
B62884EN/01
Message
Contents

A subprogram must end with the SPE instruction to indicate the end
of the subprogram.
I:E3442
STEP SEQUENCE PROGRAM

EXISTS BEYOND SPE INSTRUCTION.
No other instructions can be placed after the SPE instruction because

the SPE instruction indicates the end of a subprogram.
I:E3443
SP INSTRUCTION IS DETECTED
IN THE SUBPROGRAM.
The SP instruction cannot be placed within a subprogram because the

SP instruction indicates the start of a subprogram.
I:E3460
THE LABEL OF XXXX IS

ASSIGNED FOR TWO OR MORE
STEP PROGRAMS.
Two or more defined jump destinations have identical label numbers.

Define a unique label number for each jump destination.
I:E3461
TOO MANY LABELS.
The number of defined jump destinations exceeds the number

allowed for step sequence editing. Reduce the number of jump destination definitions.
I:E3462
DSTEP INSTRUCTION WITHOUT

DLBL.
There is no label corresponding to the specified DSTEP instruction.
I:E3480
THE STEP NUMBER OF XXXX IS

ASSIGNED FOR TWO OR MORE
STEP PROGRAMS.
Two or more steps have identical step numbers. Define a unique step
number for each step.
I:E3570
THE SIZE OF THE MESSAGE DATA The amount of message data exceeds the maximum number of characters that can be specified for the selected program type. Reduce
IS TOO LARGE.
the total number of characters.
I:E3600
DATA TOO LARGE.

(LADDER + STEP SEQUENCE)
The combined size of the ladder program and the step sequence program exceeds the maximum allowable size specified for the selected
program type. Reduce the size of the ladder or step sequence program.
I:E3601
DATA TOO LARGE.

(MESSAGE + SYMBOL + COMMENT + LADDER + STEP
SEQUENCE)
The combined size of the message, symbol, comment, ladder, and

step sequence data exceeds the maximum allowable size specified
for the selected program type. Reduce the size of any of these data
types.
I:E3620
THERE IS NO SUBPROGRAM
XXXX.
The selected program does not contain any subprogram file numbered
xxxx. Create a subprogram file having this number.
I:E3640
LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE PROGRAM EXISTS BEYOND END

INSTRUCTION.
The END instruction is placed at the end of the second level when it
is followed by a subprogram. Or, the END instruction is placed at the
end of a subprogram when there is a subsequent subprogram having
a higher program number.
I:E3650
THERE IS NO LABEL OF XXXX.
There is no label corresponding to the specified JMPC instruction.
I:E3651
THE LABEL OF XXXX IS USED

TWICE OR MORE.
In the main program, two or more LBL instruction jump destinations

have identical label numbers. Define a unique label number for each
jump destination.
I:E3652
TOO MANY LABELS.
The total number of LBL instruction jump destinations defined in the

main program exceeds the maximum allowable number specified for
the selected program type. Reduce the total number of jump destinations defined in the main program.
I:E3654
r.c
ce
nt
e
nc
.c
THE LABEL OF XXXX TO REFER

EXISTS IN ANOTHER LEVEL.
I:E3653
om
I:E3441
THE LABEL OF XXXX EXISTS IN

THE RANGE OF THE COM
INSTRUCTION.
Label xxxx, indicating a jump destination, cannot be placed in other

than the second level because the JMPC instruction specifies a jump
from a subprogram to the second level of the main program. Define
label xxxx in the second level.
Label xxxx, indicating the jump destination of the JMPC instruction,
is within the COM instruction control range. Place label xxxx outside
the range.
254
B62884EN/01
4.9.3
Warning
Number
Message
Contents
THE TITLE DATA WHICH COULD

NOT BE DISPLAY ON THE CNC
WAS REPLACE WITH SPACE
CODE.
The title data contains kana or kanji characters. These characters are
replaced by spaces.
I:W4101
ILLEGAL OP.PANEL (PARAMETER).

PROCEED TO COMPILE USING
NO
Necessary addresses (key address, LED address, etc.) are not set
when YES is specified for the system parameter indicating whether
the F0 operator panel is to be used. The value of this parameter is
changed to NO during compilation.
I:W4102
EDITING SUBPROGRAM HAS

NOT COMPLETED.
There is a subprogram for which editing has not yet been completed.
Complete the editing of this subprogram.
I:W4103
MULTIPLE SUBPROGRAMS WITH Two subprograms have identical numbers (e.g., P1.#LA and
SAME NUMBER EXIST.
P1.#SS). The ladder program is the first to be compiled (P1.#LA in
the above example).
I:W4104
THE SOURCEPROGRAM IS FORMATB. THIS PARAMETER IS

IGNORED:SYMBOL/COMMENT
I:W4105
THE SOURCEPROGRAM IS FORMATB. THIS PARAMETER IS

IGNORED: NET COMMENT
I:W4200
THERE IS NO LADDER PROGRAM. The ladder program is empty. This ladder program is not output to a
memory card file.
I:W4201
LADDER EXECUTION TIME AT

THE 1ST LEVEL IS TOO LARGE.
The first level of the main program takes too long to execute. Make
the first level smaller, or increase the ratio of the ladder execution time
in the system parameter.
I:W4202
THE COIL NUMBER SPECIFICATION OF COM INSTRUCTION IS

NOT ALLOWED.
The end of the COM instruction control range cannot be specified as

a number of coils. The specified number of coils is ignored, the end
of the range being identified by the COME instruction.
I:W4203
THE COIL NUMBER SPECIFICATION OF JMP INSTRUCTION IS

NOT ALLOWED.
The end location of a jump cannot be specified as a number of coils.

The specified number of coils is ignored, the end location being identified by the JMPE instruction.
I:W4204
UNUSED NET COMMENT

POINTER FOUND.
The ladder program contains a pointer to a lost net comment character

string. This pointer is not output to a memory card file.
I:W4400
THERE IS NO STEP SEQUENCE

PROGRAM.
The step sequence program is empty. This step sequence program

is not output to a memory card file.
r.c
ce
nt
e
Symbols and comments are always output in FORMATB.
.c
nc
The FORMATB data does not include a net comment. Specifying

this item has no effect.
THE SYMBOL DATA WHICH

COULD NOT BE DISPLAY ON THE
CNC WAS REPLACED WITH
SPACE CODE.
The symbol data contains a special character that cannot be handled

by the CNC. This character is replaced by a space.
THE COMMENT DATA WHICH

SPACE CODE.
The comment data contains a special character that cannot be handled by the CNC. This character is replaced by a space.
I:W4502
COMMENT DATA SIZE EXCEEDS

64KB. SYMBOL/COMMENT DATA
IS NOT CONVERTED TO THE
MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE.
More than 65,535 characters have been input as comment data.

None of the symbol and comment data is output to a memory card file.
I:W4570
THE MESSAGE DATA WHICH

SPACE CODE.
The message data contains a special character that cannot be handled by the CNC. This character is replaced by a space.
I:W4600
UNREFERENCED SUBPROGRAM
XXXX.
Subprogram xxxx is not called by any program. This program is, however, output to a memory card file.
I:W4500
om
I:W4100
I:W4501
255
B62884EN/01
4.10
J : DECOMPILATION
4.10.1
Fatal Error
Message
Contents
J:F2100
FUNCTION CODE ERROR.

DATA:xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx,
SYSTEM:xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
The function code specified in the memory card file does not match
that defined in the system. The files function code appears immediately after DATA; the systems function code after SYSTEM. Install
valid system data.
J:F2101
PMC SERIES IS DIFFERENT FROM The program specified in memory card file xxxx does not match the
XXXX MEMORY CARD FORMAT
selected program type. Select a valid program.
FILE.
J:F2102

FILE NOT FOUND.
Specified memory card file xxxx does not exist. Create the file.
J:F2103
MISMATCHED PASSWORD.
The entered password is invalid. Enter the password correctly.
J:F2104

FILE READ ERROR.
Memory card file xxxx cannot be read. The file is invalid.
J:F2105
XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM

WRITE ERROR.
Data cannot be written to source program xxxx.
Error
Message
r.c
nc
Number
ce
nt
e
4.10.2
om
Number
Contents
INSTRUCTION.
There is a failed instruction or an instruction that cannot be used with

the selected program type.
J:E3101

There is a subprogram in the selected program that does not end with
the SPE instruction.
J:E3200
THE NUMBER OF SYMBOL DATA

IN SOURCE PROGRAM EXCEEDS
THE LIMIT.
The symbol data size in a selected program exceeded the systemdefined limit before the program was executed. The program thus cannot
be executed; reduce the symbol data size.
ID CODE (I/O MODULE)

ERROR.(ADDRESS XXXX)
An invalid ID code is specified at address xxxx in the I/O module data.

The program cannot be executed; prepare a valid memory card file.
.c
J:E3100
J:E3300
256
B62884EN/01
4.10.3
Warning
Message
Contents
THE SIZE OF LADDER PROGRAM

IS TOO LARGE.
The number of steps defined in a subprogram in the ladder program

exceeded the maximum number that can be specified for the selected
program type. The subprogram is output to the source program.
Make necessary corrections by editing the ladder diagram.
J:W4101
XXXX UNUSED NET COMMENT

POINTER FOUND.
xxxx net comment pointers do not correspond to any net comment

character string. These net comment pointers are not output to the
source program. Edit the ladder diagram as necessary.
J:W4102
XXXX UNUSED NET COMMENT

STRINGS FOUND.
xxxx net comment character strings do not correspond to any net

comment pointer. These net comment character strings are deleted.
Edit the ladder diagram as necessary.
J:W4103
XXXX DUPLICATED NET COMMENT POINTER FOUND.
xxxx identical net comment pointers have been found. Character

strings are copied so that the same net comment character strings
have the same net comment pointers.
J:W4104
THE STEP NUMBER OF XXXX IS

USED TWICE OR MORE.
Step number xxxx is assigned to two or more different steps. Edit the
step sequence as necessary.
J:W4200
THE NUMBER OF SYMBOL DATA

EXCEEDS THE LIMIT.
(ADDRESS XXXX, SYMBOL XXXX)
The total number of data items exceeded the systemdefined limit

when the symbol data merge operation reached the indicated symbol
data (address: xxxx/symbol: xxxx). Data subsequent to this symbol
data is not output to the source program.
J:W4201
XXXX SYMBOL DATA AT DUPLICATED ADDRESS FOUND.
xxxx symbol data items are defined for the same address. Either the
source data or the memory card data becomes valid, depending on
the setting of the symbol merge option.
J:W4202
SAME SYMBOL EXISTS.

The symbol character string defined in the indicated symbol data

(address: xxxx/symbol: xxxx) is already defined at another address.
This symbol data is not output to the source program.
J:W4203
ILLEGAL SYMBOL.
The indicated symbol data (address: xxxx/symbol: xxxx) was found

to be invalid as a result of the IECcompliant symbol character string
check. This symbol data is not output to the source program. To output it to the source file, change the setting in the %%%FLSET.CNF
file.
J:W4204
SYMBOL DATA ADDRESS ILLEGAL.

(SYMBOL XXXX)
The symbol data containing symbol xxxx contains an invalid address.

This symbol data is not output to the source program.
J:W4300
ILLEGAL OPERATOR PANEL (SYSTEM PARAMETER). PROCEED TO

DECOMPILE USING NO.
The operator panel specification in the system parameter data is

invalid. Processing continues while ignoring the operator panel specification.
r.c
ce
nt
e
nc
.c
THIS MEMORY CARD FORMAT

FILE IS NOT FOR EXPANDED R/D
ADDRESS.
J:W4301
om
Number
J:W4100
The R/D extension address cannot be used because the PMC version of PMCRC is earlier than 3. Change the PMC version in the system parameter.

FILE ILLEGAL.
The header section of memory card file xxxx is invalid. However, processing continues.
J:W4900
OPTION READ FAILED.

SETTING HAS CHANGED INTO
DEFAULT.
The file settings have returned to the defaults.

The settings in the OPTION file of the selected program cannot be
read. Create a valid file or modify the file settings. The option reset
function key may be used.
J:W4901
%%%FLSET.CNF READ FAILED.

SYMBOL CHARACTERS ARE NOT
CHECKED.
Symbol character check is not performed.

The settings in the %%%FLSET.CNF file cannot be read. Create a
valid file or modify the file settings. When this check is not made, processing may be continued even without making the changes.
J:W4800
257
B62884EN/01
4.11
K : MNEMONIC
CONVERSION
4.11.1
Number
om
Fatal Error
Message
Contents
K:F2001
INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE.
K:F2006
K:F2007
NOT FOUND XXXX SOURCE

PROGRAM.
K:F2100
FILE I/O ERROR.
K:F2101
SETUP FILE BROKEN.
K:F2102
ILLEGAL OPTION(S).
K:F2103
INSUFFICIENT PARAMETER(S).
Required system or functional instruction parameters are not specified.
K:F2104
TOO MANY PARAMETERS.
The functional instruction contains more parameters than are

required.
K:F2105
ILLEGAL OPTIONSPECIFIED FILE.
K:F2106
ILLEGAL IDCODE.
K:F2107
EXPECTED TERMINATOR.
K:F2108
PMC SERIES IS DIFFERENT FROM

SOURCEPROGRAM.
K:F2109
EXPECTED IDCODE.
K:F2110
ILLEGAL PARAMETER(S).
K:F2111
CREATE TEMPORARY FILE(S) IN

CURRENT DIRECTORY.
K:F2112
NOT SPECIFIED ENVIRONMENTAL

VARIABLE TMP.
K:F2113
ILLEGAL NAME OF SETUP FILE.
K:F2114
NOT FOUND SETUP FILE.
K:F2115
EXPECTED /PC OPTION.
K:F2116
XXXX EXECUTABLE FILE NOT

FOUND.
K:F2117
INPUT DATA ILLEGAL.
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
K:F2000
258
B62884EN/01
4.11.2
Error
Number
Message
Contents
K:E3100
XXXX FILE CANNOT EXECUTE.
K:E3101
XXXX SYMBOL & COMMENT

DATA BROKEN.
K:E3102
CANNOT BE HANDLE DATA TYPE

%@2C.
K:E3103
CANNOT CONVERT FILES OF THE

PMC SERIES SET UP THE SYSTEM.
K:E3104
CANNOT OVERWRITE EXISTING

DATA.
K:E3105
CANNOT SPECIFY BIT ADDRESS

OF PARAMETER.
A bit address is specified in the byte address parameter of the functional instruction.
K:E3106
CANNOT SPECIFY BYTE ADDRESS

ON BASIC INSTRUCTION.
A byte address is specified for the basic instruction.
K:E3107
CANNOT SPECIFY OUTPUT MODULE AT INPUT ADDRESS.
An output module is specified as the input address of the I/O module

data.
K:E3108
CANNOT SPECIFY INPUT MODULE AT OUTPUT ADDRESS.
An input module is specified as the output address of the I/O module

data.
K:E3109
CANNOT SPECIFY THE ADDRESS

PROHIBITED USING AS PARAMETER.
A parameter prohibited address is specified as the address parameter of the functional instruction.
K:E3110
CANNOT SPECIFY THE BIT

ADDRESS.
K:E3111
CANNOT SPECIFY THE BYTE

ADDRESS.
K:E3112
CANNOT SPECIFY THE INPUT

ADDRESS.
An output prohibited address is specified as the output address

parameter of the functional instruction.
K:E3113
CANNOT SPECIFY THE INPUT

ADDRESS WITH COIL.
An output prohibited address is specified for the coil.
K:E3114
CANNOT SPECIFY THE ODD

ADDRESS.
An oddnumber prohibited address is specified as an oddnumber

address.
K:E3117
EXPECTED A MULTIPLE OF 2.
The system parameter contains a value that is other than a multiple

of 2.
K:E3118
EXPECTED A MULTIPLE OF 5.
The system parameter contains a value that is other than a multiple

of 5.
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
The mnemonic of extended symbol %@2C is converted when

%%%FLSET.CNF is a FORMATA/B file.
EXPECTED ADDRESS.
K:E3120
EXPECTED FUNCTION NUMBER.
K:E3119
The basic instruction has no address.
K:E3121
EXPECTED PARAMETER(S).
The functional instruction has no parameter.
K:E3122
IDCODE NOT FOUND IN XXXX.
K:E3123
ILLEGAL ADDRESS.
An invalid address or an address that cannot be specified is specified in

the symbol and comment data, or message data.
K:E3124
ILLEGAL ADDRESS IN DATA

TABLE.
An invalid address is specified in the functional instruction data table.
K:E3125
ILLEGAL ADDRESS OF PARAMETER.
An invalid address is specified in the functional instruction address

parameter.
K:E3126
ILLEGAL CHARACTER(S).
The system parameter, title data, symbol and comment data, or message data contains invalid character data.
259
Number
B62884EN/01
Message
Contents
ILLEGAL SOURCEPROGRAM
NAME.
K:E3128
ILLEGAL MNEMONIC FILE NAME.
K:E3129
ILLEGAL PARAMETER NUMBER.
The system parameter contains an invalid data number.
K:E3130
ILLEGAL TITLE NUMBER.
The data number of the data identifier is invalid.
K:E3131
ILLEGAL VALUE.
The system parameter contains an invalid value.
K:E3132
ILLEGAL VALUE IN BASE DATA.
An invalid value is specified in the base data of the I/O module data.
K:E3133
ILLEGAL VALUE IN GROUP DATA.
An invalid value is specified in the group data of the I/O module data.
K:E3134
ILLEGAL VALUE IN SLOT DATA.
An invalid value is specified in the slot data of the I/O module data.
K:E3135
ILLEGAL VALUE OF PARAMETER.
An invalid value is specified in the data table of the functional instruction.
K:E3136
INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHARACTER(S).
K:E3137
INPUT MNEMONIC FILE NAME.
K:E3138
INPUT SOURCEPROGRAM
NAME.
K:E3139
INVALID A NUMBER OF CONVERT

DATA.
K:E3140
INVALID FUNCTIONS NAME.
K:E3141
INVALID FUNCTION NUMBER.
K:E3142
INVALID MODULE NAME.
K:E3143
RETURN STATUS FROM SPAWN IS

E2BIG(=7).
K:E3144
INVALID PMC SERIES OF SPECIFIED SOURSEPROGRAM.
K:E3145
INVALID QUALIFIER.
K:E3146
LACK OF XXXX FILE.
K:E3147
MESSAGE DATA TOO LARGE.
K:E3148
MNEMONIC FILE NOT FOUND.
K:E3149
NOT ENOUGH PARAMETER(S).
Required system or functional instruction parameters are not specified.
K:E3150
NOT FOUND BASE DATA.
The base data of the I/O module is not found.
K:E3151
NOT FOUND GROUP DATA.
The group data of the I/O module is not found.
K:E3152
NOT FOUND MODULE NAME.
The module name of the I/O module is not found.
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
K:E3127
An unsupported functional instruction is specified.
The module name of the I/O module data is invalid.
.c
nc
The system parameter, title data, symbol and comment data, ladder,
or I/O module data is followed by an invalid character.
NOT FOUND SLOT DATA.
K:E3154
NOT FOUND XXXX PROCESS

INTERFACE FILE.
The slot data of the I/O module is not found.
K:E3153
K:E3155
NOT FOUND XXXX SOURCE

PROGRAM MANAGEMENT FILE.
K:E3156
NOT FOUND XXXX SUB PROGRAM FILE.
K:E3157
OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS.
K:E3158
OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS IN DATA An outofrange address is specified in the functional instruction
TABLE.
data table.
K:E3159
OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS OF

ADDRESS.
The address of the mnemonic data or I/O module data is specified.
An outofrange address is specified as a message setting address.
260
B62884EN/01
Number
Message
Contents
OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS OF

PARAMETER.
An outofrange address is specified in the functional instruction

parameter.
K:E3161
OUT OF PARAMETER VALUE.
An outofrange value is specified in the functional instruction

parameter.
K:E3162
OUT OF VALUE.
An outofrange value is specified in the system parameter.
K:E3163
OUT OF VALUE IN BASE DATA.
An outofrange value is specified in the base data of the I/O module

data.
K:E3164
OUT OF VALUE IN DATA TABLE.
An outofrange value is specified in the functional instruction data

table.
K:E3165
OUT OF VALUE IN GROUP DATA.
An outofrange value is specified in the group data of the I/O module

data.
K:E3166
OUT OF VALUE IN SLOT DATA.
An outofrange value is specified in the slot data of the I/O module

data
K:E3167
PLEASE SHORTEN FILE NAME.
K:E3168
PROCESS ERROR.
K:E3172
SOURCEPROGRAM NOT FOUND.
K:E3173
SPECIFIED CONVERT DATA NOT

FOUND.(XXXX)
K:E3174
SPECIFY THE VALUE(SLOT)

EXCEPT 0 AT I/O UNITB XXXX.
K:E3176
SYMBOL DATA COUNT OVER.
K:E3177
SYMBOL DATA NOT FOUND.
Although comment data exists, there is no symbol data.
K:E3178
SYMBOL OR COMMENT DATA

NOT FOUND.
Only symbol or comment data was converted to the address.
K:E3179
THE SAME GROUP,BASE,AND

The group, base, and slot data of the I/O module data all have the
same number.
K:E3181
TOO LONG STRINGS.
The length of the system parameter, message data, or title data

exceeds the maximum.
K:E3187
TOO MANY CHARACTERS IN 1

LINE.
The number of characters entered on a line of the system parameter,

message data, title data, symbol and comment mnemonic data, mnemonic data, or I/O module data exceeds the limit.
K:E3188
TOO MANY PARAMETERS.
The functional instruction contains more parameters than are

required.
K:E3189
TOTAL VALUE OF BASE AND SLOT The sum of the base data and slot data values of the I/O module data
IS OVER.
exceeds the maximum.
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
K:E3160
UNDEFINED INSTRUCTION.
The data contains an undefined instruction.
K:E3191
UNEXPECTED ADDRESS.
An address is specified in a location where it is not required.
K:E3190
UNEXPECTED PARAMETER(S).
A parameter is specified for an instruction that requires no parameters.
K:E3193
UNKNOWN DATA NUMBER.
A nonexistent data number is specified for a system parameter or

data identifier.
K:E3192
K:E3194
DATA ENTRY ERROR.
An attempt to register symbol and comment data failed.
K:E3195
INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHARACTER(S) IN SYMBOL DATA.
The symbol data contains a doublebyte character. Doublebyte

characters cannot be used in symbol data.
261
B62884EN/01
4.11.3
Warning
Number
Message
Contents
COMMENT DATA NOT FOUND.
Only symbol data was converted to the address.
K:W4101
DATA NOT FOUND.
The system parameter, title data, symbol and comment data, message data, or I/O module data does not exist.
K:W4102
DELETED KANJI CHARACTERS.
K:W4103
EXPECTED CONTROL CONDITION

(S).
No control condition is specified for the functional instruction.
K:W4104
ILLEGAL CHARACTERS ARE SPECIFIED AT XXXX.
Invalid character data exists in xxxx.
K:W4105
ILLEGAL OP.PANEL(PARAMETER).
PROCEED TO DISCOMPILE
USING NO.
System parameter OP.PANEL contains an invalid value; the value is

converted to NO.
K:W4106
ILLEGAL SYMBOL.
The symbol data is nonstandard (check level1). (For FORMATC

only)
K:W4107
INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHARACTER(S).
The message data contain a doublebyte character.
K:W4108
INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHARACTER(S) IN COMMENT DATA.
Comment data containing a doublebyte character was converted

without the doublebyte character conversion option (J option).
K:W4109
LOGICAL OPERATED WITH

UNUSED REGISTER(S).
An operation was performed using a register that is not registered in

the ladder data.
K:W4110
LOGICAL PRODUCT REMAINS IN

REGISTER(S).
A register exists that has not been output to the ladder data.
K:W4111
MESSAGE DATA INCLUDE KANA

OR KANJI CHARACTERS AT
XXXX.
Message data xxxx contains a doublebyte or singlebyte katakana

character.
K:W4112
NOT ENOUGH CONTROL CONDITION (S).
Control conditions required for the functional instruction are not specified.
K:W4113
NOT FOUND DATA AT XXXX

ADDRESS.
No message is defined for address xxxx.
K:W4114
NOT FOUND PARAMETER NUMBERED XXXX.
K:W4115
NOT FOUND TITLE NUMBERED

XXXX.
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
K:W4100
NOT FOUND XXXX PMCOS FILE.
K:W4117
NOT USED NET COMMENT

POINTER EXIST. XXXX
K:W4116
OUTPUT UNUSED REGISTER(S).
K:W4119
OVERWROTE EXISTING DATA.
K:W4120
INVALID QUALIFIER.
K:W4121
REGISTERS OVERFLOW.
K:W4122
SOME GARBAGE DATA ARE

FOUND AT END OF LADDER
DATA.
During conversion to FormatB, data that does not belong to level 1

to 3, or to any subprogram, is found. This indicates that there is data
subsequent to the last SPE.
K:W4123
SPECIFY SAME GROUP,BASE,

AND SLOT.
The group, base, and slot data of the I/O module data all have the
same number.
K:W4118
An invalid character follows the end code % of the system parameter, title data, symbol and comment data, ladder data, message data,
or I/O module data.
262
B62884EN/01
Message
Contents
K:W4124
SPECIFY SAME NUMBER(GROUP)

AT I/O UNITB AS I/O UNITA.
K:W4125
SPECIFY THE VALUE(BASE)

EXCEPT 0 AT I/O UNITB.
K:W4126
THE FOLLOWING DATA OF XXXX

WERE DELETED, BECAUSE OF
EXCEEDING THE LIMIT.
K:W4127
TOO MANY CONTROL CONDITIONS.
The functional instruction is subject to too many control conditions.
K:W4128
UNEXPECTED COIL(S).
A coil was specified when not required by the functional instruction.
K:W4129
UNEXPECTED CONTROL CONDITION(S).
A basic instruction was specified in a functional instruction for which

no control conditions are required.
K:W4130
REDEFINITION OF ADDRESS
DATA.
Two or more symbol definitions exist for a single address. When the
start code of the symbol data is %@2, the symbol definition must not
be specified more than once. The second and subsequent definitions
are ignored. For information relating to the start code, see Section
3.5.8.3.
K:W4131
REDEFINITION OF SYMBOL DATA.
The same symbol is specified for two or more different addresses.

Symbols other than the first specified symbol are replaced by spaces.
K:W4132
TOO LONG STRINGS FOR SYMBOL DATA.
The character string length of the symbol data exceeds the maximum
(six characters for FORMATA and FORMATB; 16 characters for
FORMATC). The symbol data is replaced by spaces.
K:W4133
TOO LONG STRINGS FOR COMMENT DATA.
The comment data length exceeds 30 characters. The comment

data is replaced by spaces.
K:W4134
SYMBOL DATA ALREADY EXIST.
Two or more different symbols are specified for the same address.
(For FORMATC, an identical symbol may be specified in more than
one location.) Symbols other than that specified first are replaced by
spaces.
K:W4135
RELAY COMMENT DATA ALREADY Two or more different character strings are specified for the same
EXIST.
relay comment at the same address. (For FORMATC, an identical
character string may be specified in more than one location.) Relay
comments other than that specified first are replaced by spaces.
K:W4136
COIL COMMENT DATA ALREADY

EXIST.
K:W4137
COMMENT TITLE DATA ALREADY

EXIST.
r.c
ce
nt
e
nc
.c
TOO LONG STRINGS FOR RELAY

COMMENT DATA.
K:W4138
om
Number
Two or more different character strings are specified for the same coil
comment at the same address. (For FORMATC, an identical character string may be specified in more than one location.) Coil comments other than that specified first are replaced by spaces.
Two or more different character strings are specified for the same
comment title at the same address. (For FORMATC, an identical
character string may be specified in more than one location.) Comment titles other than that specified first are deleted.
The relay comment data length exceeds 16 characters. (For FORMATC only) The relay comment data is replaced by spaces.
TOO LONG STRINGS FOR COIL

COMMENT DATA.
The coil comment data length exceeds 30 characters. (For FORMATC only) The coil comment data is replaced by spaces.
K:W4140
TOO LONG STRINGS FOR COMMENT TITLE DATA.
The comment title data length exceeds 30 characters. (For FORMATC only) The comment title data is replaced by spaces.
K:W4139
263
B62884EN/01
4.12
L : INPUT/OUTPUT
4.12.1
Error
Number
Message
Contents
L:E3101
ROM ID UNMATCH ERROR
The currently set cassette or module does not match the currently
selected machine model.
L:E3102
FILE OPEN ERROR
The specified file cannot be opened.
L:E3103
FILE READ ERROR
The specified file cannot be read.
L:E3104
FILE WRITE ERROR
Data cannot be written to the specified file.
L:E3105
FILE CLOSE ERROR
The specified file cannot be closed.
L:E3106
INVALID RECEIVE DATA
Data other than an ISO code has been received.
L:E3107
TIME OUT ERROR
No response was received within a specified period after the PC

issued an instruction. Check the destinations power source, settings, cable connections and parameters (baud rate and stop bit), and
whether the contents of CONFIG.SYS are valid.
L:E3108
ACCESS CANCELED
L:E3109
FILEROM UNMATCH ERROR
The file contents do not match the ROM data.
L:E3110
CONTROL CODE ERROR
The control code is invalid.
L:E3120
FIRST RECORD INFORMATION

ERROR
The contents of the first record are invalid.
L:E3121
ROM DATA CANT CONDENSE

ERROR
The ROM data cannot be compressed.
L:E3122
PART OF ROM DATA INVALID
The ROM file data is invalid.
L:E3123
ROM FILE > ROM ERROR
The ROM file exceeds the size of ROM itself.
L:E3124
ROM FILE FORMAT ERROR
The ROM file format is invalid.
L:E3125
ROM PARITY ERROR OF APPOINT The ROM parity of the specified file is invalid.
FILE
L:E3126
ROM COUNT ERROR
The ROM count is invalid.
L:E3150
ROM FILE OPEN ERROR
The ROM file cannot be opened.
L:E3151
WORK FILE OPEN ERROR
The work file cannot be opened.
L:E3152
WORK FILE INITIALIZE ERROR
The work file cannot be initialized.
L:E3153
WORK FILE CLOSE ERROR
The work file cannot be closed.
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
L:E3100
.c
nc
Access has been interrupted.
S RECORD FORMAT ERROR
The S record format is invalid.
L:E3155
WORK FILE SEEK ERROR
A seek operation cannot be performed for the work file.
L:E3156
WORK FILE WRITE ERROR
Data cannot be written to the work file.
L:E3157
ROM FILE WRITE ERROR
Data cannot be written to the ROM file.
L:E3158
WORK FILE READ ERROR
The work file cannot be read.
L:E3159
ROM FILE READ ERROR
The ROM file cannot be read.
L:E3160
ROM FILE FORMAT ERROR
L:E3180
ROM SET ERROR
The EROM is mounted improperly.
L:E3181
DIAGNOSIS ERROR
An error was detected during EROM diagnosis.
L:E3182
EROM OUT LEVEL ERROR
The EROM is faulty.
L:E3183
COMPARE ERROR
The EROM data does not match the ROM file contents.
L:E3154
264
B62884EN/01
Number
Message
Contents
DATA FILE WRITE ERROR
Data cannot be written because the EROM is not deleted.
L:E3185
BLANK CHECK ERROR
The EROM is not yet deleted.
L:E3186
DATA SEND ERROR
The number of data items is invalid.
L:E3187
PARITY ERROR
A parity error occurred during data transmission.
L:E3188
ROM WRITER IS OCCAPIED
The writer is in use.
L:E3189
ROM TYPE ERROR
The ROM type is invalid.
L:E3190
COMPARE ERROR ADDRESS = ,

INPUT DATA = , FILE DATA =
L:E3191
FLIO _AT.DAT FILE FORMAT

ERROR. HIT ANY KEY.
The format of the FLIO_AT.DAT file is invalid.
L:E3192
MEMORY CARD ERROR
An error occurred during memory card format conversion.
L:E3193
NUMBER ERROR OF INPUT

PARAMETER
L:E3194
NO.3 PARAMETER ERROR
The third parameter specified for memory card format conversion is

invalid.
L:E3195
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY
There is insufficient memory to activate memory card format conversion.
L:E3196
The fourth parameter specified for memory card format conversion is

invalid.
L:E3197
INVALID PMC TYPE
The activated machine is other than a model that can perform

memory card format conversion.
L:E3198
INVALID ROM COUNT(OUT OF

CASSETTE SIZE)
The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid (the
count falls outside the allowable range).
L:E3199

FILE SIZE)
The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid (the file
size falls outside the allowable range).
L:E3200
PMC TYPE FILE READ ERROR
The machine model setting file cannot be read.
L:E3201
INITIALIZE ERROR
Memory card format conversion cannot be initialized.
L:E3202
NOT EXIST FILE
L:E3203
FILE READ ERROR
The memory card format conversion file cannot be read.
L:E3204
INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE
There is insufficient free space on the disk to activate memory card

format conversion.
L:E3205
OUT OF MEMORY
L:E3206
NOT MAKE FILE
The memory card format conversion file cannot be created.
L:E3207
NOT OPEN WORK FILE
The work file for memory card format conversion cannot be opened.
L:E3208
CONVERT TABLE MAKE ERROR
An error occurred upon creating a conversion table for memory card

format conversion.
L:E3209
PMC TYPE I/O ERROR
An I/O error occurred for the machine model setting file.
L:E3210
BREAK PMC TYPE FILE
The machine model setting file was destroyed during an I/O operation.
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
L:E3184
.c
nc
The memory card format conversion file does not exist.
L:E3211
IMPOSSOBLE PROSESS ERROR
The child process cannot be executed.
L:E3212
ROM FILE TYPE ERROR
L:E3213
FILE SEEK ERROR
A seek operation cannot be performed for the specified file.
L:E3214
FILE READ ERROR
L:E3215
FILE OPEN ERROR
L:E3216
NOT EXIST SOURCE CONVERT

FILE
The source file for which format conversion is to be performed does

not exist.
L:E3217

ROM SIZE)
ROM size falls outside the allowable range).
265
Number
B62884EN/01
Message
Contents
FILE SIZE GAIN ERROR
The file size cannot be obtained.
L:E3219
FILE SIZE CHANGE ERROR
The file size cannot be changed.
L:E3220
DATA SEEK ERROR
A seek operation cannot be performed in the file data section.
L:E3221
ROM INFORMATION ERROR
Data cannot be written to the ROM file data section.
L:E3222
FILE WRITE ERROR
L:E3223
OBJECT FILE I/O ERROR
An I/O error occurred in the object file.
L:E3224
DATA MAX OVER
The data exceeds the maximum allowable size.
L:E3225
DATA SIZE IS LESS THAN ROM

SIZE
Execution cannot be continued because the data size is smaller than

that of the count.
L:E3226
INVALID DATA SIZE OF MEMORY

CARD
The size of the memory card data section is invalid.
L:E3227
INVALID MEMORY CARD FILE
The memory card file is invalid (the identification data is invalid).
L:E3228
INVALID ROM COUNT IN ROM FILE The ROM count in the ROM file is invalid.
L:E3229
ROM PARITY ERROR
The parity value in the ROM file is invalid.
L:E3230
PARAMETER ERROR
(MEMORY CARD TYPE)
An invalid parameter exists (memory card format).
L:E3300
ERROR OF INPUT FILE NAME

(1ST FILE NAME)
The name of the source file for which format conversion is to be performed is invalid.
L:E3301

(2ND FILE NAME)
The name of the destination file for source file conversion is invalid.
L:E3302

(1ST/2ND FILE NAME)
The source and destination file names are both invalid.
L:E3303
CANNOT EXECUTE CONVERSION
L:E3304
INVALID PMC NAME
The machine model name cannot be determined.
L:E3306
MEMORY CARD FILE DOES NOT

EXIST
The MCARD format file does not exist.
L:E3320
THE NUMBER OF PARAMERTERS

IN FILE ARE WRONG
The number of parameters specified in the text file is invalid.
L:E3321
ERROR OF FUNCTION NO.
The function number is invalid.
L:E3322
FILE DOES NOT EXIST
The file does not exist.
L:E3323
ERROR OF MEMORY ALLOCATION
There is insufficient memory.
L:E3324
LF DOES NOT EXIST
No line feed code exists.
L:E3325
CANNOT SEARCH STRING IN

TEXT FILE
The search character string is not found in the text file.
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
L:E3218
ERROR OF PORT SET COUNT
The specified number of ports is invalid.
L:E3328
THERE ARE MORE PARAMETERS

IN TEXT FILE IT IS NEEDED
The text file contains too many parameters.
L:E3329
ERROR OF MODE COMMAND

(FOR MORE THAN 128BITES)
The MODE command cannot be executed (the specified argument

is longer than 128 bites).
L:E3330

(COULD NOT FILD COMMAND
INTERPRETER)
The MODE command cannot be executed (the command interpreter

is not found).
L:E3331

(FOR INVALID COMMAND INTERPRETER)
The MODE command cannot be executed (the command interpreter

format is invalid).
L:E3332

(FOR FEW MEMORIES)
The MODE command cannot be executed (there is insufficient

memory).
L:E3333
INVALID PORT NO. IN TEXT FILE
Port No. in the text file is invalid.
L:E3334
INVALID BAUD RATE IN TEXT FILE
Baud Rate in the text file is invalid.
L:E3335
INVALID PARITY IN TEXT FILE
Parity in the text file is invalid.
L:E3326
266
B62884EN/01
Message
INVALID DATA BITS IN TEXT FILE
Bit Length in the text file is invalid.
Contents
L:E3337
INVALID STEP BITS IN TEXT FILE
Stop Bit in the text file is invalid.
L:E3338
INVALID X PARAMETER IN TEXT

FILE
X Parameter in the text file is invalid.
L:E3339
The MODE command cannot be executed.
L:E3340
PORT INITIALIZE IS COMPLETE

END
The port has been successfully initialized.
L:E3341
TEMPORARY FILE FORMAT

ERROR
The temporary file format is invalid.
L:E3342
COULD NOT DELETE TMPORARY

FILE(FOR INVALID PASS NAME)
The work file cannot be deleted (the pathname is invalid).
L:E3343
COULD NOT DELETE TMPORARY

FILE(FOR COULD NOT FIND FILE)
The work file cannot be deleted (the specified file is not found).
L:E3344
UNKNOWN PMC TYPE
The specified machine model is an undefined PMC model.
L:E3345
PORT INITIALIZE ERROR
Port initialization failed.
L:E3350
PORT ERROR(OVER RUN)
A port overrun occurred (detected by the I/O port status check).
L:E3351
PORT ERROR(PARTY)
A parity error occurred (detected by the I/O port status check).
L:E3352
PORT ERROR(FRAMING)
A framing error occurred (detected by the I/O port status check).
L:E3353
PORT ERROR
(BREAK INTERRUPT)
L:E3354
PORT ERROR
(TIME OUT)
L:E3355
PORT ERROR
(DATA OUTPUT)
L:E3356
TIMER SET/CANCEL ERROR
The system timer is invalid. Change the data in the text file
(FLIO_AT.DAT).
For details, see the comment section of
FLIO_AT.DAT.
L:E3400
ILLEGAL XXXX PROGRAM NAME.
Unpermitted character is used in specified program name.

The program name is over 8 characters.
L:E3401
SOURCE PROGRAM TYPE IS

DIFFERENT.
L:E3402
XXXX FILE I/O ERROR.
L:E3403
UNKNOWN PMC SERIES.
Specified source programs PMC type is unknown.
L:E3404
XXXX DIRECTORY DOES NOT

EXIST.
Specified directory for backup does not exist.
L:E3500
L:E3501
INPUT PARAMETER COUNT

ERROR
The number of input parameters is invalid.
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
Number
L:E3336
A break interrupt error occurred (detected by the I/O port status

check).
A time out error occurred (detected by the I/O port status check).
.c
nc
A data transmission error occurred (detected by the I/O port status

check).
FormatA/B source program is specified. Specify FormatC source

program.
INPUT PARAMETER MACHINE

LABEL NAME ERROR
The machine model label of the input parameter is invalid.
L:E3503
DATA FILE OPEN ERROR
The data file cannot be opened.
L:E3502
L:E3504
DATA FILE READ ERROR
The data file cannot be read.
L:E3505
CONVERT SOURCE FILE OPEN

ERROR
The source file for which format conversion is to be performed cannot

be opened.
L:E3506
CONVERT OBJECT FILE OPEN

ERROR
The destination file for source file conversion cannot be opened.
L:E3507
PARAMETER COUNT ERROR IN

DATA FILE
The number of parameters specified in the data file is invalid.
L:E3508
PARAMETER ERROR IN DATA FILE The data file contains an invalid parameter.
L:E3509
INVALID DATA FILE INFORMATION
The contents of the data file are invalid.
267
Number
B62884EN/01
Message
Contents
L:E3510
CONVERT SOURCE FILE READ

ERROR
The source file cannot be read.
MEMORY ALLOCATE ERROR
There is insufficient memory to continue processing.
CONVERT SOURCE FILE FORMAT

ERROR
L:E3513
CONVER OBJECT FILE WRITE

ERROR
Data cannot be written to the destination file.
L:E3514
DATA FILE DOSNT EXIST
The data file does not exist.
L:E3515
COCNVERT CANCEL
Conversion has been canceled.
L:E3516
There is insufficient free space on the disk to continue processing.
L:E3600
L:E3601
INPUT PARAMETER COUNT

ERROR
The number of input parameters is invalid.
L:E3602
INPUT PARAMETER MACHINE

LABEL NAME ERROR
The machine model label for the input parameter is invalid.
L:E3603
DATA FILE OPEN ERROR
The data file cannot be opened.
L:E3604
DATA FILE READ ERROR
The data file cannot be read.
L:E3605
CONVERT SOURCE FILE OPEN

ERROR
The source file cannot be opened.
L:E3606
CONVERT OBJECT FILE OPEN

ERROR
The destination file cannot be opened.
L:E3607
PARAMETER COUNT ERROR IN

DATA FILE
The number of parameters specified in the data file is invalid.
L:E3608
PARAMETER ERROR IN DATA FILE The data file contains an invalid parameter.
L:E3609
INVALID DATA FILE INFORMATION
The contents of the data file are invalid.
L:E3610
CONVERT SOURCE FILE READ

ERROR
The source file cannot be read.
L:E3611
MEMORY ALLOCATE ERROR
There is insufficient memory to continue processing.
L:E3612
CONVERT SOURCE FILE FORMAT

ERROR
L:E3613
CONVER OBJECT FILE WRITE

ERROR
Data cannot be written to the destination file.
L:E3614
DATA FILE DOSNT EXIST
The data file does not exist.
L:E3615
COCNVERT CANCEL
Conversion has been canceled.
L:E3516
There is insufficient free space on the disk to continue processing.
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
L:E3511
L:E3512
SUM CHECK ERROR OF S

RECORD
The S record check sum is erroneous.
L:E3618
FORMAT ERROR OF S0 RECORD
The S0 record format is invalid.
L:E3617
PMC TYPE CODE ERROR
The machine model code for the S0 record is invalid.
L:E3620
DATA CONVERT ERROR
A data conversion error occurred.
L:E3621
FORMAT ERROR OF S RECORD
The S record format is invalid.
L:E3622
PMC ADDRESS ERROR
The specified PMC address falls outside the allowable range.
L:E3700
NUMBER ERROR OF INPUT

PARAMETER
L:E3701
The third parameter specified for memory card format conversion is

invalid.
L:E3702
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY
L:E3703
The fourth parameter specified for memory card format conversion is

invalid.
L:E3619
268
B62884EN/01
Number
Message
Contents
INVALID PMC TYPE
The activated machine is other than a model that supports memory

card format conversion.
L:E3705
INVALID ROM COUNT

(OUT OF CASSETTE SIZE)
count falls outside the allowable range).
L:E3706
INVALID ROM COUNT

(OUT OF FILE SIZE)
The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid (the file
size falls outside the allowable range).
L:E3707
PMC TYPE FILE READ ERROR
The machine model setting file cannot be read.
L:E3708
INITIALIZE ERROR
Memory card format conversion cannot be initialized.
L:E3709
NOT EXIST FILE
The memory card format conversion file does not exist.
L:E3710
FILE READ ERROR
The memory card format conversion file cannot be read.
L:E3711
There is insufficient free space on the disk to activate memory card

format conversion.
L:E3712
OUT OF MEMORY
L:E3713
NOT MAKE FILE
The memory card format conversion file cannot be created.
L:E3714
NOT OPEN WORK FILE
The work file for memory card format conversion cannot be opened.
L:E3715
CONVERT TABLE MAKE ERROR
An error occurred upon creating a conversion table for memory card

format conversion.
L:E3716
PMC TYPE I/O ERROR
An I/O error occurred for the machine model setting file.
L:E3717
BROKEN PMC TYPE FILE
L:E3718
IMPOSSIBLE PROSESS ERROR
L:E3719
ROM FILE TYPE ERROR
L:E3720
FILE SEEK ERROR
L:E3721
FILE READ ERROR
L:E3722
FILE OPEN ERROR
L:E3723
NOT EXIST SOURCE CONVERT

FILE
The source file for which format conversion is to be performed does

not exist.
L:E3724
INVALID ROM COUNT

(OUT OF ROM SIZE)
ROM size falls outside the allowable range).
L:E3725
FILE SIZE GAIN ERROR
The file size cannot be determined.
L:E3726
FILE SIZE CHANGE ERROR
The file size cannot be changed.
L:E3727
DATA SEEK ERROR
A seek operation cannot be performed in the file data section.
L:E3728
ROM INFORMATION ERROR
Data cannot be written to the ROM file data section.
L:E3729
FILE WRITE ERROR
L:E3730
OBJECT FILE I/O ERROR
An I/O error occurred in the object file.
L:E3731
DATA MAX OVER
The amount of data exceeds the allowed maximum.
L:E3732
DATA SIZE IS LESS THAN ROM

SIZE
Execution cannot be continued because the data size is smaller than

that of the count.
L:E3733
INVALID DATA SIZE OF MEMORY

CARD
The size of the memory card data section is invalid.
L:E3734
INVALID MEMORY CARD FILE
The memory card file is invalid (the identification data is invalid).
L:E3735
INVALID ROM COUNT IN ROM FILE The ROM count in the ROM file is invalid.
L:E3736
ROM PARITY ERROR
The parity value in the ROM file is invalid.
L:E3737
PARAMETER ERROR
(MEMORY CARD TYPE)
There is an invalid parameter (memory card format).
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
L:E3704
The machine model setting file was destroyed during an I/O operation.
A seek operation cannot be performed for the specified file.

.c
nc
269
B62884EN/01
4.12.2
Warning
Number
Message
Contents
ROM PARITY WARING OF

APPOINT FILE, CONTINUE TO
TRANSFER? (Y/N)
L:W4101
ROM PARITY WARING OF

APPOINT FILE
L:W4102
XXXX IS A PROGRAM OF
DIFFERENT PMC TYPE.
Restoring program PMC type and system PMC type is not same.
L:W4200
NORMAL END
Processing ended normally.
L:W4201
D _PROGOPT _DRAM UNMATCH
The DRAM does not match.
L:W4202
PARITY UNMATCH
The parity does not match.
L:W4203
CASSETTE SIZE = XXXX
Cassette size = xxxx
L:W4204
ROM COUNT = XXXX
ROM count = xxxx
L:W4205
THE LAST 120H BYTES OF THE

OBJECT FILE ARE DELETED
The last 120h bytes of the ROM file have been deleted.
L:W4206
ADJUST OBJECT FILE SIZE TO

ROM COUNT SIZE
The ROM count is appropriate for the object file size.
L:W4207
ADD OBJECT FILE SIZE

(XXXX BYTE)
The object file size has been increased by xxxx bytes.
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
L:W4100
270
B62884EN/01
4.13
N : ONLINE
MONITOR
4.13.1
Error
Message
Contents
om
Number
FLASH ROM WRITE ERROR
N:E3003
FLASH ROM ERASE ERROR
The FROM is faulty.

Replace the FROM.
Contact FANUC Service.
N:E3006
FLASH ROM SIZE ERROR
The size of the sequence program is greater than that of FROM.

Increase the size of FROM.
Try using the offline CONDENSE function.
N:E3007
FLASH ROM NOT EMG STOP
The CNC is not in emergency stop status.

Set the CNC to emergency stop status.
N:E3008
FLASH ROM PROGRAM DATA

ERROR
The PMC sequence program has failed.

Input the sequence program again.
N:E3030
LADDER SIZE ERROR
The sequence program is too large to be written to the PMC.

Check the size of the sequence program.
N:E3031
PMC CONTROL TYPE BSI (RA1).
When the PMC control module type is RA1, online editing cannot be
performed.
N:E3036
PROGRAM SIZE ERROR

(OPTION).
The size of the sequence program exceeds the optionspecified size.

Reduce the size of the sequence program.
N:E3037
PMC TYPE UNMATCH.
N:E3038
NO OPTION (LADDER STEP).
The ladder step number option does not exist.
N:E3041
THE COMMUNICATION TO PMC IS

NOT READY.
Communication with the PMC has not been established.

Start communication with the PMC.
N:E3042
AN ALARM OCCURS ON PMC.
Processing cannot be continued because of a PMC alarm.

Clear the cause of the PMC alarm.
N:E3045
LADDER SIZE OVER (PMC)

ERROR STATUS = nn
The ladder program being edited is too large to be written to the PMC.
Reduce the size of the ladder program.
N:E3046
THE PROGRAM IS NOT

CORRESPONDING (PMC). STATUS=NN
The program being edited does not match that of the PMC.
Load, store, or restore the program such that it matches the PMC program.
N:E3047
AN ALARM OCCURS ON PMC

ERROR STATUS = nn
Processing cannot be continued because a PMC alarm is issued.

Check whether the ladder data being edited is valid.
N:E3048
LADDER DATA ERROR (PMC)

ERROR STATUS = nn
The program being edited does not match that of the PMC.
Load, store, or restore the program such that it matches the PMC program.
N:E3050
INPUT INVALID
An invalid value has been entered.

Enter a valid value.
N:E3051
OBJECT BUFFER OVER
The sequence program is full.

Reduce the size of the ladder program.
N:E3054
COM FUNCTION MISSING
The usage of the COM (SUB9) functional instruction is invalid.

Check whether the usage of COM and COME (SUB29) is valid.
N:E3055
JUMP FUNCTION MISSING
The usage of the JMP (SUB10) functional instruction is invalid.

Check whether the usage of JMP and JMPE (SUB30) is valid.
ce
nt
e
r.c
N:E3001
.c
nc
The PMC type is invalid.

Convert the machine model using the offline function.
271
Number
B62884EN/01
Message
Contents
END FUNCTION MISSING
The usage of the END1, END2, END3, and END functional instructions is invalid.
Check whether these instructions have been entered in the correct
order.
N:E3058
LADDER BROKEN
Data cannot be updated because the ladder program has failed.

Input the ladder program again.
N:E3060
CALL CALLU FUNCTION MISSING
The usage of the CALL and CALLU functional instructions is invalid.

Enter these instructions in the second ladder level, or in a subprogram.
N:E3061
COM FUNCTION MISSING

(CALL,SP)
The CALL or CALLU functional instruction is specified between the COM

(SUB9) and COME functional instructions.
Do not specify CALL or CALLU between COM and COME.
N:E3062
JMP FUNCTION MISSING (SP)
Within the subprogram, the usage of the JMP (SUB10) functional

instruction is invalid.
Check whether the usage of JMP and JMPE (SUB30) is valid.
N:E3063
SUB PROGRAM MISSING
The usage of the SP functional instruction is invalid.

Check whether the usage of SP and SPE is valid.
N:E3064
SP NO. DUPLICATE
The specified subprogram number already exists.

Specify another subprogram number.
N:E3065
SUB PROGRAM NOTHING
No subprogram exists.
Create a subprogram.
N:E3066
END FUNCTION NOTHING
The END functional instruction does not exist.

Enter the END functional instruction.
N:E3068
LBL COUNT OVER
The number of labels exceeds the allowed maximum.

Reduce the number of labels.
N:E3069
LBL NO. DUPLICATE
N:E3070
LBL FUNCTION NOTHING (JMPB)
The LBL functional instruction specified by JMPB does not exist.

Enter the LBL functional instruction.
N:E3071
COM FUNCTION MISSING (JPMB)
The JMPB functional instruction is specified between the COM and

COME functional instructions. This instruction cannot be used to perform a jump from between COM and COME.
Do not insert JMPB between COM and COME. Or, enter the LBL
functional instruction, together with JMPB, between COM and
COME.
N:E3072
JMPB FUNCTION MISSING
The JMPB instruction cannot jump to other than a subprogram.

Ensure that it jumps to a subprogram.
N:E3073
LBL FUNCTION NOTHING (JMPC)
The LBL functional instruction specified by JMPC does not exist.

Enter the LBL functional instruction.
N:E3074
COM FUNCTION MISSING (LBL)
The specified LBL functional instruction is specified between COM

and COME. This instruction cannot be used to perform a jump from
between COM and COME.
Do not insert LBL between COM and COME. Or, enter the JMPC
functional instruction, together with LBL, between COM and COME.
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
N:E3056
.c
nc
The specified label number is already in use.

Specify another label number.
N:E3075
JMPC FUNCTION MISSING
The JMPC functional instruction is specified in other than a subprogram.

Specify the JMPC functional instruction in a subprogram.
N:E3076
LBL FUNCTION MISSING (JMPC)
The LBL functional instruction specified by JMPC exists in a level

other than the second ladder level.
Enter the LBL functional instruction in the second ladder level.
N:E3077
SYMBOL UNDEFINE
The entered symbol is not yet defined.

Enter a valid symbol name.
N:E3080
LADDER ILLEGAL
The ladder program is invalid.

Input the ladder program again.
272
B62884EN/01
Number
Message
Contents
ILLEGAL OPERATION
An invalid operation was performed (e.g., an attempt was made to

create a relay or coil in a functional instruction).
Be careful to specify operations correctly.
N:E3084
DATA TABLE COUNT OVER
The number of data tables exceeds the allowed maximum.

Reduce the number of data tables.
N:E3085
EDIT BUFFER OVER
There is no free space in the buffer in which editing can be performed.

Reduce the size of the net being edited.
N:E3090
RELAY OR COIL FORBIT
An unnecessary relay or coil exists.

Delete the unnecessary relay or coil.
N:E3091
ADDRESS BIT NOTHING
The specified address is not found.

Check the specified address.
N:E3092
HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL
The horizontal lines of the net are not connected.

Connect the horizontal lines.
N:E3093
FUNCTION LINE ILLEGAL
There is an invalid connection between functional instructions.

Ensure that the connections between functional instructions are specified correctly.
N:E3094
RELAY OR COIL NOTHING
No relay or coil exists.

Add a relay or coil.
N:E3095
VERTICAL LINE ILLEGAL
The vertical lines of the net are not connected.

Connect the vertical lines.
N:E3096
PARAMETER NOTHING
N:E3097
ADDRESS NOT DETECTED
No address is specified.
Specify an address.
N:E3100
NET TOO LARGE
The net being edited exceeds the size of the editing buffer.
Reduce the size of the net being edited.
N:E3102
LARGE NET APPEARED
N:E3111
ERROR NET FOUND
N:E3113
FUNCTION NOT FOUND
The specified functional instruction is not found.

Check the number of the functional instruction.
N:E3114
ILLEGAL FUNCTION NO
Search for a functional instruction has been performed using the

wrong number.
Check the number specified for the functional instruction.
N:E3123
ROM FILE OPEN ERROR

ERROR STATUS = nn
The MCARD file cannot be opened.

Check whether the program name has been entered correctly. Alternatively, the MCARD file may have been destroyed.
SYMBOL FILE OPEN ERROR

ERROR STATUS = nn
The symbol file cannot be opened.

Check whether the program name has been entered correctly.
Alternatively, the source program may have been destroyed.
ROM FILE READ ERROR

ERROR STATUS = nn
The MCARD file cannot be read.

The MCARD file may have been destroyed.
N:E3126
ROM FILE READ ERROR (VMEM)

ERROR STATUS = nn
An error occurred when reading data from extended memory.

Memory management may have been disabled.
Reboot the personal computer.
N:E3130

NOT ENOUGH MEMORY
There is insufficient memory to perform writing to the MCARD file.

Memory management may have been disabled.
Reboot the personal computer.
N:E3131

ERROR STATUS = nn
Data cannot be written to the MCARD file.

Check the amount of free space available on disk, and the name of
the program to be saved.
N:E3125
r.c
ce
nt
e
No parameters are specified for a functional instruction.

Specify the required parameters.
The net is too large to be displayed.

Reduce the size of the net.
An invalid net exists.
Correct the invalid net.
nc
.c
N:E3124
om
N:E3082
273
B62884EN/01
Message
NET COMMENT FILE OPEN ERROR
ERROR STATUS = nn
The net comment file cannot be opened.

Check whether the program name has been entered correctly.
Alternatively, the source program may have been destroyed.
Contents
N:E3140
FAIL TO ALLOCATE MEMORY FOR

DATA TABLE CONTROL DATA.

Reserve an area in conventional memory.
N:E3141
FAIL TO READ FROM PMC DATA

TABLE CONTROL DATA.
An error occurred while reading data table control data from the PMC.
Check the connection with the PMC and whether the specified
machine model matches that of the connected PMC.
N:E3142
FAIL TO WRITE TO PMC DATA

TABLE CONTROL DATA.
An error occurred while writing data table control data to the PMC.
Check the connection with the PMC and whether the specified
machine model matches that of the connected PMC.
N:E3143
THIS DATA TABLE GROUP IS

WRITEPROTECTED.
An attempt was made to change a value in a data table group, but that
data table group is writeprotected.
First, check whether the correct data table group is specified, then set
that data table group to writeenabled status.
N:E3144
ADDRESS NOT FOUND.
The specified address is not found.

Check whether the address is specified correctly.
N:E3150
LADDER DIAGRAM HAS NOT

BEEN MODIFIED.
An attempt was made to update or restore the ladder diagram when

it had not been modified.
N:E3151
AN ERROR OCCURS IN THE LADDER DIAGRAM.
An error occurred in the ladder diagram.

The system cannot switch to update or monitor.
Correct the error in the diagram.
N:E3153
TEMPORARY FILE LOAD ERROR.

NOT ENOUGH PROGRAM
MEMORY

Reserve an area in conventional memory or on disk.
N:E3155
PROGRAM READ ERROR.

NOT ENOUGH PROGRAM
MEMORY

Reserve an area in conventional memory.
N:E3158
LADDER DIAGRAM HAS BEEN

MODIFIED.
N:E3160
SELECTED PROGRAM IS
UNMATCH.
The specified program does not match that in the PMC memory.
Specify the correct program, or load or store the program such that
it matches the PMC memory program.
N:E3161
TRANSFER WAS ABORTED.
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
Number
N:E3132
.c
N:E3162
NOT CONNECTED TO PMC.

CAN NOT TRANSFER PROGRAM.
Communication with the PMC has not yet been established. Set up
communication with the PMC.
N:E3163
MISMATCH PASSWORD
The entered password is invalid.

Enter a valid password.
N:E3164
TOO LARGE PROGRAM.

NOT ENOUGH PMCS PROGRAM
MEMORY
The size of the specified program exceeds that of the PMC program
memory.
Check the sizes of the specified program and the PMC program
memory.
N:E3167
INVALID PROGRAM NAME.
The program name is invalid.

Check the program name.
N:E3170
CUT BUFFER SIZE OVER.
The specified range is too great.

Specify a narrower range.
N:E3171
CUT BUFFER ALLOCATION

ERROR.

Reserve an area in extended memory, conventional memory, or on
disk.
The user has canceled the transfer.

If the storing of a program is canceled, the program in PMC memory
may be destroyed. Store the program again to load it into the PMC.
If program loading is canceled, the program remains as is. If the program does not match that in PMC memory, load or store the program
such that it matches the PMC memory program.
nc
The system cannot switch to store or monitor because the ladder diagram has been modified.
Update the ladder diagram.
274
B62884EN/01
Message
Contents
NET COMMENT CUT ERROR (nn).
When nn = 1:
disk.
When nn = 2:
The net comment file contains invalid data.
Check the net comments using the offline function.
N:E3173
NET COMMENT COPY ERROR

(nn).
When nn = 1:
disk.
When nn = 2:
N:E3174
NET COMMENT PASTE ERROR

(nn).
When nn = 1:
disk.
When nn = 2:
N:E3175
NET COMMENT APPEND ERROR.
The net comment file contains erroneous data.

N:E3176
NET COMMENT DELETE ERROR.

N:E3177
NET COMMENT DATA WRITE

ERROR.

N:E3178
NOTHING NET COMMENT DATA.
The net comment file contains no net comment within the specified
range.
N:E3183
THIS FUNCTION IS PROTECTED.
On-line editing function and I/O menu functions are protected. Confirm keep relay.
Data table control data screen is protected. Confirm keep relay.
N:E3184
WRITE PROTECT. (NOT MDI MODE PMC parameter is write protected.

NOR EMERGENCY STOP.)
Set CNC mode to MDI or emergency stop, or stop the sequence program.
N:E3185
WRITE PROTECT. (CHECK PWE.)
PMC parameter is write protected.

Set CNC parameter PWE=1, or stop the sequence program.
N:E3186
WRITE PROTECT. (CHECK PWE

AND KEY4.)
PMC parameter is write protected.

Set CNC parameter PWE=1, or set KEY4=1, or stop the sequence
program.
N:E3187
WRITE PROTECT.
Signal status is write protected.

Confirm keep relay.
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
Number
N:E3172
275
B62884EN/01
Number
Contents
Signal trigger unavailable
[Cause] Trigger data on PMC side is invalid.
[Remedy] Please restart signal trigger.
N:E3301
Signal trigger buffer allocation error

[Cause] The memory is insufficient.
[Remedy] Please secure an extended memory, conventional memory, and the disk space.
N:E3302
Reject signal trigger

[Cause] Online editor is selected.
[Remedy] Please restart signal trigger after online editor was finished.
N:E3303
Debug ladder is executing. Cannot execute signal trigger

[Cause] Signal trigger cannot be executed because debug ladder is executing on PMC side.
[Remedy] Please restart signal trigger after debug ladder was finished.
N:E3304
Signal trigger buffer size error

[Cause] The memory buffer for signal trigger on PMC side is insufficient.
N:E3305
Signal trigger data unavail

[Cause] Signal trigger parameter is not corrected.
[Remedy] Please confirm the data of signal trigger parameter.
N:E3310
Signal trace is unavailable

[Cause] Signal trace is not supported on PMC side.
[Remedy] It is necessary to exchange a system ROM of PMC.
N:E3311
Signal trace parameter error

[Cause] Signal trace parameter is not corrected .
[Remedy] Please confirm the address of signal trace parameter.
N:E3312
Signal analysis is executing. Signal trace cannot be executed

[Cause] Signal trace cannot be executed because signal analysis is executing on PMC.
[Remedy] Please restart signal trace after signal analysis was finished.
N:E3320
PMC parameter file read error.

[Cause] Fail in reading the PMC parameter file.
[Remedy] A hard error may occur. Please confirm following cases.
a) Whether drive is ready.
b) Whether disk format is right.
N:E3321
PMC parameter file read error. Specified file not found.

[Cause] The specified file is not found.
[Remedy] Please confirm whether the file name is correct.
r.c
ce
nt
e
nc
.c
PMC parameter file write error.

[Cause] Fail in writing the PMC parameter file.
[Remedy] A hard error may occur. Please confirm following cases.
a) Whether drive is ready.
b) Whether disk is not writeprotected.
c) Whether disk format is right.
N:E3322
om
N:E3300
N:E3323
PMC parameter file write error. Specified path not found.

[Cause] The specified path is not found.
[Remedy] Please confirm whether the file name is correct.
N:E3324
PMC parameter file write error. Insufficient disk space.

[Cause] Insufficient disk space.
[Remedy] Please secure the disk space.
N:E3325
PMC parameter file write error. File is write protected.

[Cause] The file is writeprotected.
[Remedy] Please cancel the writeprotect.
276
B62884EN/01
Number
Contents
Illegal PMC parameter file name.
[Cause] The mistake is found in the file name.
[Remedy] Please confirm the file name.
N:E3327
This file format is not PMC parameter file format.

[Cause] There is a part of illegal format in the PMC parameter file.
[Remedy] Please confirm whether the file format is correct.
N:E3328
Can not save.(Not EDIT mode.)

[Cause] PMC parameter file can not be saved if NC is not EDIT mode while Ladder is running.
[Remedy] Please put NC into EDIT mode. Or, please stop the Ladder.
N:E3329
Can not restore.(Not emergency stop nor PWE = 1.)

[Cause] PMC parameter file can not be restored if NC is not stopping emergency or Parameter Write Enable
(PWE) is not 1 while Ladder is running.
[Remedy] Please put NC into the state of emergency stop and set Parameter Write Enable (PWE) 1. Or,
please stop the Ladder.
N:E3341
Step cannot be executed. Ladder program is running

[Cause] Step cannot be executed because the ladder program is running.
[Remedy] Please stop the ladder program.
N:E3342
Block cannot be executed. Ladder program is running

[Cause] Block cannot be executed because the ladder program is running.
N:E3343
Step cannot be executed. Signal trigger is executing

[Cause] Step cannot be executed because signal trigger is executing.
[Remedy] Please stop the execution of signal trigger function.
N:E3344
Block cannot be executed. Signal trigger is executing

[Cause] Block cannot be executed because signal trigger is executing.
N:E3345
Trigger cannot be executed. Ladder program is running

[Cause] Trigger cannot be executed because the ladder program is running.
N:E3346
Scan cannot be executed. Ladder program is running

[Cause] Scan cannot be executed because the ladder program is running.
N:E3347
Trigger cannot be executed. Signal trigger is executing

[Cause] Trigger cannot be executed because signal trigger is executing.
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
N:E3326
Scan cannot be executed. Signal trigger is executing

[Cause] Scan cannot be executed because signal trigger is executing.
N:E3348
Ladder debug parameter error. (Address %s?)

[Cause] In ladder debug parameter, trigger address is not correct.
[Remedy] Please confirm trigger address.
N:E3349
N:E3350
Ladder debug parameter error. (Count %s?, Min=1 Max=32767)

[Cause] In ladder debug parameter, trigger count or scan count is not correct.
[Remedy] Please confirm trigger count or scan count.
N:E3351
Block execution aborted !

[Cause] Block execution is aborted by the following operations.
Select Online editor
Run the ladder program
Enter or exit online monitor
277
B62884EN/01
Number
Contents
Address cannot be changed. Debug trigger is executing
[Cause] Trigger address cannot be changed because debug trigger is executing.
[Remedy] Please stop the execution of debug trigger.
N:E3353
Count cannot be changed. Debug trigger is executing

[Cause] Trigger count cannot be changed because debug trigger is executing.
[Remedy] Please stop the execution of debug trigger.
N:E3354
Count cannot be changed. Debug scan is executing

[Cause] Scan count cannot be changed because scan is executing.
[Remedy] Please stop the execution of scan.
N:E3370
Signal analysis is unavailable

[Cause] Signal analysis not supports on PMC side.
[Remedy] It is necessary to exchange a system ROM of PMC.
N:E3371
Signal analysis parameter error

[Cause] Signal analysis parameter is not corrected.
[Remedy] Please confirm the data of signal analysis parameter.
N:E3372
Signal trace is executing. Cannot execute signal analysis

[Cause] Signal analysis cannot be executed because signal trace is executing on PMC side.
[Remedy] Please restart signal analysis after signal trace was finished.
N:E3373
Disable init for sampling

[Cause] Signal analysis cannot be initialized because signal analysis is executing on PMC side.
[Remedy] Please retry parameter initialized after signal analyz was finished.
N:E3374
Aborted signal analysis execution and initialize ?

[Cause] Signal analysis cannot be initialized because signal analysis is executing on PMC side by the keep
memory data of the old edition.
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
N:E3352
278
r.c
ce
nt
e
nc
.c
om
APPENDIX
A. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL

PMC MODELS
B62884EN/01
FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL PMC MODELS
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
Those functions which vary depending on the PMC model are described
below. Read this appendix in conjunction with Section 1.2.2.
281

PMC MODELS
B62884EN/01
A.1
SYSTEM
PARAMETERS
A.1.1
The system parameter editing screens for all of the PMC models are
shown below. For a detailed explanation of editing, see Section 3.5.2.6.
Editing
EDIT (SYSTEM PARAMETER)

COUNTER DATA TYPE
(UNUSED)
(UNUSED)
(UNUSED)
OPERATOR PANEL
KEY ADDRESS
LED ADDRESS
KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS
LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS
PMCRB3
<0>[C: FLADDER]
:
:
:
:
:
(0:BINARY, 1:BCD)
(0:NO, 1:YES)
r.c
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
om
(1) PMCRB3/RB4/RB5/RB6
ce
nt
e
PMC TYPE = RB3
10 END
(2) PMCRC3/RC4
EDIT (SYSTEM PARAMETER)
PMCRC4
.c
nc

2) LADDER EXEC
3) (UNUSED)
5) LANGUAGE ORIGIN
6) OPERATOR PANEL
7) KEY ADDRESS
8) LED ADDRESS
<0>[C: FLADDER]
:
:
0
100%
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
50%
000000H
0
(0:BINARY, 1:BCD)
(1150%)
(099%)
(0:NO, 1:YES)
PMC TYPE = RC4
282
10 END

PMC MODELS
B62884EN/01
A.1.2
Examples of Mnemonic
Files (SingleFormat)
The system parameter mnemonic formats for the PMC models are shown
below. For information about the mnemonic editing function, see Section
3.5.8.
(1) PMCRB4/RB5/RB6
Counter data type

PMC model
When specifying YES in Item 3 above (whether an operators panel is used), specify the KEY address, LED address,
KEY image address, and LED image address as follows:
3 YES X0000 Y0000 R0000 R0010
%@0
2
BINARY
3
NO
4
PMC RB3
7
100
%
[EOB]
Counter data type

PMC model
(Binary or BCD)
(PMC-RB3)
(100% (fixed))
nc
2.
3.
4.
7.
ce
nt
e
(2) PMCRB3
Note
(Binary or BCD)
(PMC-RB4/PMC-RB4 (STEP SEQ) /
PMC-RB5/PMC-RB6 (STEP SEQ) )
r.c
Note
2.
3.
4.
om
%@0
2
BINARY
3
NO
4
PMC RB4
%
[EOB]
.c
3 YES X0000 Y0000 R0000 R0010
(3) PMCRC3/RC4
%@0
2
BCD
3
NO
4
PMC RC4
5
000000
6
50
7
100
%
[EOB]
Note
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Counter data type

PMC model
(Binary or BCD)
(PMC-RC3/PMC-RC4/PMC-RC4
(STEPSEQ))
Start address of language program link control statement data
(0 or 800000 to 8FFFFF (hexadecimal))
Percentage of language program execution time
(1% to 99%)
(Always 100%)
3 YES X0000 Y0000 R0000 R0010
283

PMC MODELS
A.2
B62884EN/01
During linking, load modules created in the C language are linked with
a ROM format file. The C language can be used only with
PMC-RC3/RC4/RC4 (STEP SEQ)/QC/NB/NB2.
Linking is not
required when the C language is not used.
LINK
ROM
format file
ROM
format file
Transferred
to the ROM
writers and
PMC
om
Link
Load modules
in C language
ce
nt
e
r.c
Notes
This function enables linking to be performed on a personal
computer. In addition, with this function, an object and C
language load modules can be separately transferred to
and linked on the PMC (dotted line in the figure below).
C program development environment for PMC-RC (/RC3/RC4/QC/NB)

Personal computer
Link control statement

creation tool
FAPT LADDER
C language source Link control source
nc
Convert
(Note 2)
Object file
(MCARD file)
iC286 (compiler)
ROM format file
.c
FANUC
distribution
library
BND386 (binder)
BLD386 (binder)
Link
OJ386 (converter)
Intel hexadecimal
load module
Convert
(Note 2)
ROM format file
Object file
with C language
(MCARD file)
HEX2SREC
(Note 1)
PMC RC3
Debug
ROM writer
284

PMC MODELS
B62884EN/01
om
Notes
1 Intel hexadecimal load modules cannot be linked. Before
link operation, convert the file format by referring to the
HEX2SREC Users Manual.
2 With FAPT LADDER-II, ROM format files are no longer
used. This means that a ROM format file cannot be created
by compile processing alone, conversion between an object
file and ROM format file being required. A detailed
description is given below.
r.c
(a) Using method of HEX2SREC

Intel hexadecimal load modules cannot be directly linked. Perform
the below operation before linking.
[Operation]
1) Execute HEX2SREC.EXE in response to the DOS prompt.
Specify as follows:
input-file-name output-file-name
ce
nt
e
C:\FLADDER\APPENDIX> HEX2SREC
2) Conversion is performed.
3) Check that specified file names have been created using the DIR
command.
4) Specify an output file name (for example, SAMPLE.SR) as the
load module file name for linking.
.c
nc
Note
When the extension of an input file name is omitted, the
extension .HEX is assumed. Output is directed to a file
with the same name but the extension is changed to .SR.
The specification of the following files has the same effect
in input/output:
HEX2SREC SAMPLE.HEX SAMPLE.SR
HEX2SREC SAMPLE SAMPLE.SR
HEX2SREC SAMPLE.HEX
HEX2SREC SAMPLE
(b) Converting between an object file and ROM format file

A ROM format file cannot be created by compiling a source program.
Instead, in the case of link processing, the following extra work is
required.
Before link processing: Conversion from an object file (MCARD
file) to a ROM format file
After link processing: Conversion from a ROM format file to an
object file (MCARD file)
For the method of conversion, see 3.5.6.6.
285

PMC MODELS
B62884EN/01
(c) Starting link processing

[Operation]
1) Press
on the utility screen.
F4
2) Then, the pop-up screen shown below appears. Pressing the
Enter
EXEC FILE NAME

i _lipmcr p fl03400. tbl
om
key displays the link screen.
Model file name
r.c
Specify the model to be used for link processing, by changing the

model file name.
The table below indicates the correspondence between the PMC
models and model file names.
ce
nt
e
PMC model
PMC-RC3
PMC-RC4
PMC-RC4 (STEP SEQ)
Model file name
fl03400.tbl
fl04000.tbl
fl04200.tbl
(Initial value)
3) The link screen appears.

Linker
PMCRC3
nc
Load module file name

ROM format file name
: A:DATACMODULE.SR
: A:DATASAMPLE.#EX
Edition
Machine tool name

Program no.
.c
Series
NC & PMC name
<0>[A:FLADDER]
1 EXEC
2 MAP
3 ERROR 4 P
5I
10 END
Note
If an invalid model file is specified, the status line of the link
screen does not display a model name. In such a case,
check the following:
When the newly entered file name is invalid
Enter a valid file name.
When the specified model file is not installed

Install the model file.
286

PMC MODELS
B62884EN/01
(d) Linking
[Operation]
1) Specify the load module file name and ROM format file name to
link. The load module file name must conform to DOS
specifications. Here the load module file name should be
specified with its extension (--------.***). (Specity an output
program name for HEX2SREC.)
2) Select [EXEC].
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
(4) Termination
[Operation]
1) Select [END].
287
B. AUTOMATIC COMPILATION
AND DECOMPILATION
AUTOMATIC COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION
(1) Conditions for starting automatic compilation or decompilation

When [ONLINE (SELECTED PROGRAM)] has been selected
from the initial menu, automatic compilation or decompilation is
performed according to the following conditions:
[Conditions/results]
The start conditions are determined from the results of comparing the
time stamps of the CONTROL and MCARD files for the source
program. The conditions under which these files are updated and the
results of updating are described below.
[File updating conditions]
1) CONTROL file
The CONTROL file is updated once the source program has been
modified by using the offline editing function.
2) MCARD file
The MCARD file is updated once the source program has been
input by using the offline input/output function (for example,
after being transferred from the PMC or converted from a
memorycard or HandyFile format file), or once processing has
been terminated after modifying the ladder program by using the
online function.
[Results]
1) When the CONTROL file has the most recent time stamp
Automatic compilation is performed.
[Applicable cases]
D When no compilation is performed after the program is
edited by using the offline function
D etc
2) When the MCARD file has the most recent time stamp
Automatic decompilation is performed.
[Applicable cases]
D When no decompilation is performed after the program is
transferred from the PMC by using the offline input/output
function
D When processing is terminated after the ladder program is
edited by using the online function
D etc
3) When both files have the same time stamp
Automatic start processing is not performed.
[Applicable cases]
D When compilation is performed after the program is edited
by using the offline function
D etc
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
B62884EN/01
288
B. AUTOMATIC COMPILATION
AND DECOMPILATION
B62884EN/01
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
Note
The options applied to automatic compilation or
decompilation, started under the above conditions, are
those specified with [PROGRAM OPTION SETTING] of the
offline function. Before attempting to select [ONLINE
FUNCTION], confirm the set options. For details of how to
set options, see Section 4.5.7.
289
C. CHANGE OF EACH SETTING FILE
CHANGE OF EACH SETTING FILE
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
B62884EN/01
290
B62884EN/01
C.1
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
FILE %%% FLSET.
CNF
%%%FLSET.CNF is a file of the text form and some setting parameters, by

which the behavior of system is decided, are described there.
The file exits in the directory in which the system is installed.

And the parameters can be changed by a text editor on the market.
r.c
(1) Sample of %%%FLSET.CNF
om
Note
%%%FLSET.CNF contains the set values used to
determine system operation. If data in this file is not
modified correctly, the functions described in this manual
may not be performed correctly. Do not, therefore, attempt
to modify any data other than the items described below.
;
;
FAPT LADDER Initial Setting File
;
;
;
*V;
System information
;
verl=A08B9201J503
Version 01.0;
rights=Copyrigth (C) 19911995 FANUC LTD.;
*S;
System Setup
;
editor =;
;
ladkey = 1;
;
;
IEC_SYM=2
;
;
*U;
Utility Information
;
N = UTILITY;
;
F1 = Dos / command.com;
F2 = flOadat / FLOADAT;
F3 = View result / FLVIEW.BAT %p.err;
F4 =Linker / i_lipmcrpf103400b.tbl;
F5 =;
F6 =;
F7 =;
F8 =;
F9 =;
F10=;
;
[EOF]
ce
nt
e
( key word = 9characters)
.c
nc
Text Editor
Ladder editing key buffer size

(1 ladkey 16)
1:Check symbol (level1) for IEC standard
2:No check
Utility Guidance
[F1] Soft Key Guidance & EXE

291
B62884EN/01
om
(2) Registering a command in the utility

(a) Function
A tool which is executed under DOS can be registered in the
[UTILITY] function on the initial or offline menu.
(b) Key word
Items F5= to F10= are displayed under
Utility Information
*U ;
For these items, describe the
tool to be assigned to each function key. Do not modify currently
displayed characters, such as *U and F5=. If such a character is
modified, the system does not recognize the assignment.
(c) Format
Tool name displayed on the utility screen
Characters to the right of ; are assumed to be a comment.

F1 = Dos / command. com ; !
r.c
Registered tool
Delimiter between displayed name and command

Function key to which the tool is assigned
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
The maximum number of characters which can be used to specify

the tool name and registered tool are as follows:
D Tool name
: 70 characters
(or 35 doublebyte characters)
D Registered tool : 40 characters
292
D. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM
B62884EN/01
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM
293
D.1
DIFFERENCES FROM
FAPT LADDER
B62884EN/01
(1) Source program types

FAPT LADDER supports three source program types: FORMATA,
FORMATB, and FORMATC, while FAPT LADDERII Ladder
Editing Package supports only the FORMATC type.
Supported source program type
Software model
FORMATB
FORMATC
f (NOTE)
f (NOTE)
f (NOTE)
FAPT LADDERII
FAPT LADDER
om
FORMATA
r.c
Note
The supported source program types also vary with the
PMC model. For details, refer to the relevant FAPT
LADDER manual.
ce
nt
e
SAMPLE MANAGEMENT OF FORMATC

1) FORMATC
This source program type is used on Ladder Editing Package.
The FORMATC source program is organized by below files.
<A case of specifying C:DATAPRG_C as source program>
C:
data
PRG _C
.c
nc
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
CONTROL
SYSPARAM
TITLE
XSYMBOL.xxx
MESSAGE
IOMODULE
LEVEL1.#LA
LEVEL2.#LA
LEVEL3.#LA
Pyyy.#LA
Pzzz.#SS
NETCMT.xxx
OPTION
MCARD
Source program managing file

System parameter data file
Title data file
Symbol & Comment data file
Message data file
I/O Module data file
First level ladder data file
Second level ladder data file
Third level ladder data file
Subprogram ladder data file
Subprogram step sequence data file
Net comment data file
Setting of option
Memory card format file
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
(Note 3)
(Note 3)
(Note 1)
Notes
1 xxx is number of multi file managing.
2 Only for use LEVEL3 ladder.
3 yyy, zzz is number of subprogram.
2) FORMATA
This source program type is only used on FAPT LADDER.
The source program is managed using the following names. A
single directory can contain two or more source programs.
294
B62884EN/01

xxxxxxxx.#CN
xxxxxxxx.#PA
xxxxxxxx.#TA
xxxxxxxx.#SY
xxxxxxxx.#C1
xxxxxxxx.#C2
xxxxxxxx.#ME
xxxxxxxx.#IO
xxxxxxxx.#LA
: File managing user programs

: File storing system parameters
: File storing the title data
: File storing symbols
: File storing comments
: File storing comments (reserve)
: File storing messages
: File storing the I/O module data
: File storing ladder
om
(xxxxxxxx is the specified source program name.)
CONTROL
SYSPARAM
TITLE
SYMBOL
COMMENT1
COMMENT2
MESSAGE
IOMODULE
LEVEL1.#LA
LEVEL2.#LA
LEVEL3.#LA
Pyyyyy.#LA
Pyyyyy.#SS
: File managing the source program

: File storing system parameters
: File storing the title data
: File storing symbols
: File storing comments
: File storing comments (reserve)
: File storing messages
: File storing the I/O module data
: File storing ladder of the first level
: File storing ladder of the second level
: File storing ladder of the third level
: File storing ladder subprograms
: File storing step sequence subprograms
nc
ce
nt
e

r.c
3) FORMATB
This source program type is only used on FAPT LADDER.
A directory is created with the specified source program name.
In the directory, the program is managed under the following
names. A single directory cannot contain two or more source
programs.
(yyyyy is a subprogram number.)
.c
(2) Elimination of ROM format files

FAPT LADDER supports ROM format object files. Ladder Editing
Package, FAPT LADDERII, however, does not use ROM format
files because an object file called an MCARD file (memorycard
format file) is added to the source program. The data flow is outlined
below.
Some FAPT LADDER operating procedures require the input of
ROM format files. FAPT LADDERII, however, does not require the
input of ROM format files.
(a) FAPT LADDER
FAPT LADDER
Source file
1)
2)
1) Compile
3) Output (in ROM format)
ROM format
file
3)
4)
2) Decompile
4) Input (in ROM format)
295
External devices
CNC
Memorycard format file
HandyFile format file
FAPT LADDERII/Ladder Editing Package
FAPT LADDERII
Source file
Each data file
1)
2)
3)
MCARD file
4)
2) Decompile
4) Input (in object format)
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
1) Compile
3) Output (in object format)
External devices
CNC
HandyFile format file
om
(b)
B62884EN/01
296
B62884EN/01
D.2
om
CONVERSION FROM
FAPT LADDER
When converting data created with FAPT LADDER for use with the
Ladder Editing Package, use a method that is appropriate for the data
format, as described below.
[Data types]
Source file of FORMATC
Source file of FORMATA and B
Mnemonic format file
ROM format file
r.c
(1) Source file conversion (with the backup function)

(a) FORMATC
A file can be converted with the Restore of the backup function.
For details of this function, see Section 3.5.6.5.
All FAPT LADDERII source files are of FORMATC type,
allowing this method to be used for conversion.
(b) FORMATA/B
First, using FAPT LADDER, convert a file of to FORMATC
type. Then, perform program conversion as explained in (a),
above.
ce
nt
e
(2) Conversion using a mnemonic format file

Convert a program to a mnemonic format file, using the mnemonic
editing function of FAPT LADDER, before using the program.
For details of this function, see Section 3.5.8.
Note, however, that this method cannot be used to convert a step
sequence program. (See Section 3.5.8.6.)
(3) Conversion using a memorycard format file
Convert a program to a memorycard format file, using the FAPT
LADDER I/O function of Memory card, before using the program.
For details of the function, see Section 3.5.6.3.
.c
nc
(4) Conversion using a ROM format file

First, convert a ROM format file, created with a FAPT LADDER
function such as the compile function, to a memorycard format file
by using the I/O function of ROM format file. Then, apply method
(3), above.
For details of the function, see Section 3.5.6.6.
297
CONVERT THE PMC

TYPE OF SEQUENCE
PROGRAM
D.3.1
Converting by System
Parameter Editing
By changing the mnemonic file, it is possible to convert some PMC type

sequence program to another type of it.
On the following PMC type, it is possible to edit the different PMC type
data by changing system parameter of the mnemonic data.
However, format of the system parameter, usable functional instructions
and range of address are different.
Conversion source
(PMC)
om
D.3
B62884EN/01
Conversion
destination (PMC)
Remarks
r.c
PMC-RA1/RA2/RA3
Step sequence data
PMC-RB3/RB4/RB5/RB6 cannot be converted.
RB/RB2/RB3
RC3/RC4
RB4/RB5/RB6
RC/RC3/RC4
PMC-PA1/PA3/NB/NB2
ce
nt
e
[Example: PMCRB3 PMCRC3]
(1) Set the PMC type to PMCRB3 and convert the original source
program to mnemonic file.
(2) Change the system parameter of the mnemonic file to PMCRC3
with a standard text editor.
(3) Convert the mnemonic file((2)) to source program by the open
CNC of PMCRC3 model.
Converted file (PMCRC3)
nc
Original file (PMCRB3)
Change system parameter
.c
%@A
%@0
2 BCD
3 NO
4 PMCRB3
7 100
%
%@1
01 ABCKIKAI
02 SDRILL
%
%@5
X000 1 0 1 ID16C
Y008 1 0 4 OD32A
%
%@E
%@A
%@0
2 BCD
3 NO
4 PMCRC3
5 000000
6 50
7 100
%
%@1
01 ABCKIKAI
02 SDRILL
%
%@5
X000 1 0 1 ID16C
Y008 1 0 4 OD32A
%
%@E
298
B62884EN/01
D.3.2
Conversion source
(PMC)
Conversion
destination (PMC)
Converter
file name
PMC-L/M/M
(FS0-T)
(MMC) PMC-RB3/RB4/RB5/RB6 FS0T_CNV.SYM

RC3/RC4
PMC-L/M/M
(FS0-M)
(MMC) PMC-RB3/RB4/RB5/RB6 FS0M_CNV.SYM

RC3/RC4
om
Conversion Using a
Signal Address
Converter
r.c
Note
A converter file is included under the
APPENDIX
subdirectory on the system floppy disk (Vol. 5).
[Example operation: PMCM PMCRB4]
(1) Set FAPT LADDER for PMCM, then convert the program subject
to conversion to a mnemonic file. ( A.)
ce
nt
e
(2) On the OPEN CNC of the PMCRB4 model, convert the source
program to a mnemonic file with the offline function for
MNEMONIC EDIT. ( B.)
(3) Start your text editor (any commercially available text editor can be
used.) (Specify the name of the mnemonic file created in (2) as the
edit file name.)
(4) Replace the symbol data of the conversion destination mnemonic file
(PMCRB4) with the converter file (FS0T_CNV.SYM). ( C.)
nc
(5) Replace the ladder data of the conversion destination mnemonic file
(PMCRB4) with the ladder data of the conversion source mnemonic
file (PMCM). ( D.)
(6) Terminate the text editor, then start the Ladder Editing Package.
.c
(7) Convert the mnemonic format file created in (5), above, to a source
program.
(8) On the symbol editing screen, delete all symbol and comment data.
299
%@A
%@0
1 400
20
Converter file
(FS0T_CNV.SYM)
%@2
G0000.0 G100.0
G0000.1 G100.1
G0000.2 G100.2
F0135.4 F275.4
F0135.5 F275.5
F0135.6 F275.6
F0135.7 F275.7
%
7 100
80
90
%@1
%
%@2
%
%@3
RD X21.4
WRT G121.4
RD. NOT X22.3
WRT. NOT G122.3
SUB 1
SUB 2
%
%@4
%
%@E
B. Conversion destination mnemonic format

file (PMCRB4)
C.Insertion
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
D.Insertion
%@A
%@0
2 BINARY
3 NO
4 PMCRB4
%@1
%
%@2
%
%@3
%
%@4
%
%@5
%
%@E
om
A. Conversion source
mnemonic format file
(PMCM)
B62884EN/01
300
B62884EN/01
D.3.3
Using Data in a
Sequence Program for
Another Program
Data (such as title, symbol & comment, ladder, message, and I/O module
data) in a sequence program can be used for another sequence program,
by the following method.
The range of addresses used varies from one model to another. They may
have to be modified. Refer to the programming manual of the respective
models.
om
[Example : Using the symbols & comment data of the PMCRB for the PMCRC3]
%@A
%@0
2 BCD
3 NO
4 PMCRC3
5 000000
6 50
7 100
%
%@1
%@2
X000 .0 ZPX. M
X0001.1 ZPY. M
%
%
%@E
ce
nt
e
r.c
%@A
%@0
2 BCD
3 NO
4 PMCRB
7 100
9 YES
%
%@1
Insert
%@2
X0000.0 ZPX. M
X0001.1 ZPY. M
%
.c
nc
%
%@E
301
B62884EN/01
D.4
TRANSFER FROM
PG
D.4.1.1
Command Input During
Startup
om
Function for
Transferring Data
between the PG and
PC
This function is used to transfer data in ASCII (mnemonic) format

between a PG (including the Mate and Mark II) and a PC via an
RS232C cable. [FLOADAT] is for IBM PC/AT.
(1) Uploading
Loads the FAPT LADDER mnemonic data into the PC from the PG
via the RS232C port.
r.c
D.4.1
FLOADAT
[name of file for storing uploaded data]
u (for IBM PC/AT)
ce
nt
e
When a file with the same name as the file specified for receiving data
already exists in the current directory, the following message is
displayed.
File is exist. Over write? <Y/N>
nc
(2) Downloading
Loads the FAPT LADDER mnemonic data into the PG from the PC
via the RS232C port.
[name of file for storing downloaded data]
d (for IBM PC/AT)
As shown above, the load commands have the following two

parameters:
u: Uploads data from the PG to the PC.
d: Downloads data from the PC to the PG.
Note
The above parameters can be specified with either
lowercase or uppercase characters.
.c
FLOADAT
302
B62884EN/01
D.4.1.2
PC side
IBM PC/AT series
MODE COM1:
(PC DOS MODE
MODE COM1:
command)
PG side
IO NC,CN1,F1,F6
IO NC,CN1,F1,F6,BR10 (for 9600 baud)
Communications
Settings
4800,E,7,2
9600,E,7,2
(for 9600 baud)
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
Notes
1 The baud rate can be set to either 4800 or 9600. However,
note that when the PC baud rate is set to 9600, the
parameter BR10 must be added to the baud rate setting for
the PG.
2 It is necessary to set these communications setting only for
doing this operation. After using this function, please
restore the communications settings as the section 2.1
(Chapter 1).
The CN number is not fixed. For the PG or PG Mark II, the CN

number can be any setting from CN1 to CN4. For the PG Mate, the
CN number can be any setting from CN1 to CN3. However, note that
the CN number selected here must match the CN number of the IO
command. Use the cables specified in Appendix H.
Operation example
During uploading
Operation procedure
Turn on power.
nc
<PC> <PG>
Example of input and screen contents
Enter IO command settings.
<PC>
IBM PC/AT Series : Enter MODE command settings. (See Section 2 of Communications Settings)
<PG>
Store transmission data in PG memory.
Press the [F2] key to select menu item no.2.
<PC>
Execute FLOADAT. Enters waiting state.
FLOADAT FILENAME u
.c
<PG>
<PG>
Set [F6] ON. Select no.4 on the menu.
<PC>
Select any entry from 1 to 7 on the submenu.
Begins transmission.
IO NC, CN1, F1, F6 (, BR10)
<PC>
LOADER START is displayed.
<PG>
EXECUTING is displayed.
<PC>
Operation Complete is displayed.
Completes transmission.
Returns to the menu.
<PG>
<PC>
The message Operation Complete is displayed,

followed by the prompt HIT ANY KEY. Hit any key
to end operation.
303
HIT ANY KEY is displayed.
B62884EN/01
During downloading
Operation procedure
<PC> <PG>
Example of input and screen contents
Turn on power.
<PG>
Enter IO command settings.
IO NC, CN1, (BR10,) F1, F6
<PC>
IBM PC/AT Series : Enter MODE command setting. (See Section 2 of Communications Settings)
<PG>
Turn on [F1] key. Select no.2 on the menu.

Enters waiting state.
<PG>
<PC>
Execute FLOADAT.
FLOADAT FILENAME d
Completes transmission.
Returns to the menu.
<PC>
The message Operation Complete is displayed, <PC>

followed by the prompt HIT ANY KEY. Hit any key
to end operation.
Output Start is displayed.
Operation Complete is displayed.

HIT ANY KEY is displayed.
ce
nt
e
<PG>
om
<PC>
r.c
Begins transmission.
EXECUTING is displayed.
D.4.1.3
.c
nc
Protocol
During uploading
When the FLOADAT command is executed on the PC side, a
communications request is issued for the PG and reception begins.
After all data has been received, DC 3 is sent and transmission is
completed.
1) DC 1 code is sent to the PG (data transmission request).
2) Data is received.
3) Completion code is received and reception is completed.
4) DC 3 code is sent.
Transmission and reception both use the 1byte machinedependent
BIOS call for input and output.
During downloading
After the PG issues a transmission request, the PG enters the
waiting state. FLOADAT is activated in the PC, then transmission
begins. After all data has been sent, DC 4 is sent and transmission
is completed.
1) The PG issues DC 1.
2) DC 2 code is sent to the PG.
3) Data is sent.
4) DC 4 code is sent.
Transmission and reception both use the 1byte machinedependent
BIOS call for input and output.
304
B62884EN/01
D.4.1.4
When the transmission speed is faster than reception processing, BUSY

control is performed by issuing the DC 1 and DC 3 codes. In the IBM
PC/AT series, there is no X parameter, which effectively has the same
result.
BUSY Control
D.4.1.5
Data Start and End
Codes
Start code
om
The system will automatically determine which of the following seven

pairs of start and end codes is used. When none of these codes are used,
an error message is displayed and operation terminates.
End code
%@A
%@E
%@0
%@1
%@2
%@3
%@4
%@5
ce
nt
e
r.c
Notes
1 The end codes shown here must appear at the beginning of a line.
nc
In other words, strictly speaking, a data reception end code is

actually denoted by the sequence CR + LF + an end code. End
codes (% etc.) appearing within comments are ignored.)
D.4.1.6
.c
Data Conversion (Return

Codes)
(1) When an LF code (0AH) is received, it is converted into two

characters, the first of which is CR (0DH) followed by LF (0AH).
D.4.1.7
(2) When a CR code (0DH) is received, it is discarded.

(3) When an end code (DE) is received, CR (0DH) and LF (0AH) are
appended to it in that order.
Until a data start code (DS) is received, data is discarded.
Transmission and
Receive Data
...
CR LF
Discarded
DS CR LF
CR LF
DS CR LF
Valid data
After the end code (DE) has been sent or received, DC 3 is sent for
uploading or DC 4 is sent for downloading, then the file is closed.
305
B62884EN/01
D.4.1.8
This software detects the following four types of errors.
Error Detection and

Messages
(1) When there is an error in the command line

Error in the file name, u, or d.
Parameter Error
FLOADAT FILENAME u/d set parameter. (FILNAME, upload or download.)
om
(2) When the specified file cannot be found

Output file cannot be found or file for receiving cannot be opened.
Cannot open output file
Wrong data received
r.c
(3) When data not in the FAPT LADDER format is sent or received
ce
nt
e
(4) When there is a definite problem with the start code,

Start Code error detected
or there is a definite problem with the end code

End code error detected
File is exist. Over write?
.c
nc
This software only detects errors in the command line and in the FAPT
LADDER format.
This software does not support detection of errors in the contents of FAPT
LADDER data.
Messages
When the file name specified as the file for receiving data already exists
in the current directory, the following message is displayed.
306
<Y/N>
B62884EN/01
D.4.1.9
1. Incorrect entry found in the command line.

2. Specified file cannot be opened.
3. Data not in the FAPT LADDER format was sent or received.
The following causes can be considered for the above errors:
D The end code has been omitted (% or %@E was omitted).
D The start code has been omitted (%@*, where * is A or 0 to 5, was
omitted).
D Garbage data exists at the beginning of the file.
D Garbage data exists between each unit of data.
D The file format is completely different from the FAPT LADDER
format.
When any of the above errors is detected, the current operation is
canceled.
During downloading, if an error is detected on the PC, the system will
return to the DOS screen. At the same time, a %, %@E or other end
code is sent to the PG to return it to the menu screen.
4. Others
D When, for some reason, data transfer is interrupted
(When the power to the PC or PG is interrupted during operation,
etc.)
When data transfer is interrupted during uploading, the system will
enter a waiting state until data transfer is restarted. (To interrupt the
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
Error Detection and

Handling
waiting state, press
Ctrl
+ C ).
.c
nc
When data transfer is interrupted during downloading, the data

becomes corrupt and data transfer must be started over from the
beginning.
307
E. STANDARD SYMBOL DATA
B62884EN/01
STANDARD SYMBOL DATA
When a mnemonic file and the standard symbol data are combined, it is possible
to use the standard symbol name provided by FANUC.
DATA FILE NAME
om
CNC TYPE
FS16/18T
F16&F18T. SYM
FS16/18M
F16&F18M.SYM
r.c
Note
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
The standard symbol data is stored in the directory APPENDIX of

system floppy (Vol. 5).
308
F. TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA

(CHGMES)
B62884EN/01
TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES)
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
This function is a tool(CHGMES) for easy changing the message data

incorporating sequence program of FANUC PMCs .
This tool extracts only message data from Handy file format file.
The message data in CNC(PMC) can be replaced with this extracted data,
if both message data size are the same.
This tool is usefull when it is necessary to use some message data files in
one ladder program.(For example: Supporting multilingual message.)
309

(CHGMES)
B62884EN/01
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
<Method of Message size Check>

1) Memory map information is output when the source program is
compiled.
Please check each symbol top address of the original changing
ladder and the ladder for changing to be the same value.
2) This tool for changing the message data execute with the
compare file, then this tool execute the same check of the
message data size.
1. PROCEDURE OF THE MESSAGE DATA CHANGING
1) Load the basic message ladder file of handy file format to the NC
by using the memory card or floppy disk on the PMC
input/output operation ([I/O] screen).
2) Input the CHGMES command with the message data for
changing and dummy ladder file(handy file format).
3) The message data on the NC is changed by loading the output file
of this tool on the PMC input/output operation ([I/O] screen).
2. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
It is necessary to use following operating environment for this tool.
1) Memory
235Kbytes or more main memory is required when activating
this function.
2) Temporary files
This function generates following temporary files for work area
on the drive/directory which is set by environmental variable
TMP of DOS.
This function generate temporary files on the route directory of
current drive when environmental variable TMP is not set.
It is necessary to free max.65KBytes disk space for these
temporary files.
$TMPD.T**, $TMPW.T**
(**=00 to 99)
(These temporary files are deleted by this function
automatically.)
3) Hard disk
It is necessary to use following disk space.
S For installation
S To generate temporary files
S (In case of environmental variable TMP
of DOS set on hard disk)
TOTAL
68KBytes
65KBytes
133KBytes
3. INSTALLATION
Please copy EXEFILE (_CHGMES.EXE) to any directory from
system floppy disk(Vol.5).
Key in _CHGMES on the installed directory, then following files
are generated.
D CHGMES.EXE ASC2IMG.EXE IMG2ASC.EXE :
Execute files (.EXE)
D RB3DUMMY.SFM RB3BASIC.SFM RB3MES.SFM :
example files(.SFM)
310

(CHGMES)
B62884EN/01
( [COMPARE FILE] )
Return
om
Example files(.SFM) are used to confirm the installation of this function

by activating example command.
4. ACTIVATION
Key in following command at the DOS prompt activated in the
utility.(No.9 of FAPT LADDER main menu).
Or,Please change the directory in which this tool is installed.
(It is not necessary to change the directory when the PATH is set.)
Then key in following command.
CHGMES [INPUT FILE] [OUTPUT FILE] [PMC TYPE]
: : A handy file format file that consists of a

dummy ladder and message data to replace the
message data in the basic message ladder file.
Create this file by compiling the source file and
converting to a handy file format file using
FAPT LADDER.
OUTPUT FILE
: : A handy file format message file created by this

tool.
This file contains only message data.
By loading this file to the CNC, message data in
the CNC memory can be substituted.
PMC TYPE
: : PMC TYPE (RB3 or RB4)

Error will occur at key in other than applied
PMCs.
COMPARE FILE
(Optional)
: : Basic message ladder file (Handy file format)

Please refer to the Fig.Operation outline.
This tool compares message size of the INPUT
FILE and the COMPARE FILE to determine
if there is a match. Then, you can guarantee that
only the message will be correctry replaced
without crashing other data when you load the
OUTPUT FILE to CNC.
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
INPUT FILE
311

(CHGMES)
B62884EN/01
<Outline of Operation>
Basic message ladder
Message for changing+Dummy ladder
Source format
program
Source format
program
om
Generation, Editing
Check the SYMBOL top

address by memory map
display.
r.c
COMPILATION
Object file
ce
nt
e
Object file
INPUT/OUTPUT (F4: Handy File)
*3
*1
Handy file format

file
MEMORY CARD
nc
FLOPPY
Handy file format

file
Changing to message ROM data(Using this function)
CHGMES [In. file] [Out. file] [pmc type] ([Comp. file])

*1
*2
*3
.c
(Note)
.
.
*2
FLOPPY
Handy file
format file
(Note)
CNC
Loading at [I/O]screen operation of PMC.
MEMORY CARD
OR
Only message data for changing of ROM file
Note
It is possible to load by memory card only for FS16B, FS18B, FS20, FS21B, and FS15B
(PMCNB).
Please refer to the following manual about detailed operation of loading by the memory card
or handy file. It is not possible to load on boot screen.
FANUC PMC MODEL PA1/PA3/RA1/RA2/RA3/RB/RB2/RB4/RC/RC3/RC4/NB
PROGRAMMING MANUAL (LADDER LANGUAGE) (B61863E/06)
312

(CHGMES)
B62884EN/01
5. USING EXAMPLE
Check the installation of this function by using the following example.
There are some sample files in system floppy disk for checking this
function.
RB3DUMMY.SFM : : Message data and dummy ladder file (Handy
file format)
(Message
data
(50KB)+Ladder
(END1+END2))
: : Basic message ladder file (Handy file format)
(Message
data
(50KB)+Ladder
data+Symbol&Comment data)
RB3MES.SFM
: : Data for checking the result (Message

data(50KB))
(This file is a normal output file, when this tool
execute for above sample data. It is possible to
check result by comparing OUTPUT FILE
and this file.)
Execute as the following (In this case the system
is installed in main body.)
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
RB3BASIC.SFM
1) Please key in the following command.

A:>CHGMES RB3DUMMY.SFM USERTEST.SFM RB3
RB3BASIC.SFM Return
.c
nc
You can specify any name for OUTPUT FILE. In this

example,USERTEST.SFM is used.
2) Following file is generated on current drive.
USERTEST.SFM (Message data (50KB))
3) Check the result by using FC/A(DOS COMMAND).
C:>FC/A USERTEST.SFM RB3MES.SFM
If NO DIFFERENCES ENCOUNTERED is displayed, the
result is correct.
6. ERROR MESSAGES
Message

PMC type does not match between applied PMCs.
chgmes : PMC type unmatch (input file)
PMC type of input file and key in PMC type do not match.
chgmes : PMC type unmatch (compare file)
PMC type of compare file and key in PMC type do not match.
chgmes : PMC type unmatch (pmc type)
chgmes : Message sizes of (input file) and (compare file) are Message size of input file and compare file do not agree.
mismatched
Please adjust the message size by adding some dummy
message to the input file. Please comfirm the MAP display on
the compile function of FAPT LADDER.
chgmes : Cannot start ASC2IMG
ASC2IMG.EXE does not exist not in the same directory of

CHGMES.EXE.
chgmes : Cannot start IMG2ASC
IMG2ASC.EXE does not exist in the same directory of

CHGMES.EXE.
chgmes : Cannot make temporary file $tmpd.t**

chgmes : Cannot make temporary file $tmwd.t**
It is impossible to make temporary file.

Disk is insufficient.
It is impossible to set the file name, because $tmp*.t00 to
$tmp*.t99 exist.
313

(CHGMES)
B62884EN/01
Message

Temporary file cannot be closed.
Please check the disk space.
asc2img : Cannot allocate memory (**bytes)
Memory is insufficient. Please free up 235KB of more

memory, and re-activate.
asc2img : Conversion area in input is conflicted
Ladder header of the input file is crushed.

Please re-make the input file, and re-activate.
asc2img : Unknown file type
Illegal format of the input file. Please change the fomat, and
re-active.
asc2img : (input file) : Record No.**has

**********************
There is an invalid data of input file.

Please correct as error message, and reactivate.
asc2img : Cannot open file
There is no input file.
asc2img : Cannot close file
It is impossible to close the file.

asc2img : Cannot write
It is impossible to write the temporary file.

img2asc : Cannot allocate memory (**bytes)
Memory is insufficient. Please free up 235KB or more

memory, and re-activate.
img2asc : Cannot write
It is impossible to write the output file.

.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
chgmes : Cannot close file $tmpd (w).t**
314
G. CAUTIONS FOR USING THE O/S
B62884EN/01
CAUTIONS FOR USING THE O/S
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
(1) Windows 3.1

1) SMARTDRV.EXE
When SMARTDRV.EXE is used with write caching enabled, pay
attention to the following:
Enable write caching SMARTDRV.EXE
Be careful especially when the AUTOEXEC.BAT contains a
command line of SMARTDRV.EXE.
[Symptom]
When SMARTDRV.EXE is used with write caching enabled, the
following symptom occurs.
D The following alarm occurs during a read from the PMC or
FA/PMC writer, disabling entry.
Alarm message : Received data invalid
OVERRUN
[Measure]
When SMARTDRV.EXE is used, disable write caching for the
following disk drives:
a. Drive where the FAPT LADDER system exists
b. Drive where ROM format files are created
Example) When the FAPT LADDER system is on drive A, and
a ROM format file is to be created on drive B
SMARTDRV a b disable write caching for
drives A and B
Refer to the Microsoft Windows 3.1 Function Guide, supplied
from Microsoft, for detailed descriptions about how to use
SMARTDRV.EXE.
315
H. DATA TRANSFER CABLES
B62884EN/01
DATA TRANSFER CABLES
IBM PC/AT
om
Use the cables below to transfer data from a PC to a CNC, ROM writer
(FA writer or PMC writer), or PG (PG Mark II or PG Mate).
1. For IBM PC/AT
Online cable
IBM PC/AT cable
25pin male
connector
r.c
9pin female
connector
25pin female
connector
25pin male
connector
ce
nt
e
CNC, ROM writer, or PG
2. For IBM PS/2

IBM PS/2
Online cable
nc
9pin female
connector
.c
IBM PS/2 cable
316
25pin male
connector
25pin female
connector
25pin male
connector
CNC, ROM writer, or PG
H. DATA TRANSFER CABLES
B62884EN/01
D Online cable (A08B0031K801/K802)
20
20
RD
RS
CS
25pin male
connector
ER
DR
CD
SG
RD
RS
CS
ER
DR
CD
SG
FG
ce
nt
e
D IBM PC/AT cable
CD
RD
SD
9pin female
connector
ER
SG
RS
CS
CI
20
22
20
20
CD
RD
SD
ER
SG
DR
25pin female connector
RS
CS
CI
.c
nc
DR
25pin male
connector
r.c
FG
SD
om
SD
D IBM PS/2 cable
SD
RD
RS
25pin female
connector
CS
ER
DR
CD
SG
FG
317
SD
RD
RS
CS
ER
DR
CD
SG
FG
25pin female
connector
I. INQUIRY FORM
B62884EN/01
.c
nc
ce
nt
e
r.c
om
INQUIRY FORM
318
I. INQUIRY FORM
B62884EN/01
Company name
Section
Person in charge
Phone No.
Address
Fax No.
No.
Product name
Ordering code
Version
No.
Date of
purchase
r.c
om
FANUC
sales person
2
3
[Usage environment]
Machine type used (PC)
ce
nt
e
OS
Version
EMS board:
Yes / No
Other equipment (printer, etc.)
(Manufacturer:
(Manufacturer:
(Manufacturer:
(Manufacturer:
.c
[Details of inquiry]
nc
Please print out the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files on a sheet and attach it to this form.
Please use this form when you have any questions about this product.
319
Index
B62884EN/01
[A]
A : Initial Menu, 238
About PMC Program, 10
About Symbol & Comment Data, 12
Automatic Compilation and Decompilation, 288
Decompilation, 202
Decompile, 222
Decompile Option, 204
Diagnose, 47
Differences from Fapt Ladder, 294
Directory Configuration after Installation, 25
Display System Information, 100
[B]
om
[E]
B : Title Editing, 240

Backup of User Program, 218
r.c
BUSY Control, 305
[C]
C : I/O Module Editing, 241
Changing the Printer Specification, 194

Command Input During Startup, 302
Common System Operations, 35
Communication, 105
Communications Settings, 303
Compilation, 195
ce
nt
e
Cautions for Using the O/S, 315

Change of Each Setting File, 290
E : Ladder/Step Sequence Editing, 243

Editing, 115, 282
Error, 239, 240, 241, 242, 247, 248, 249, 251, 256,
259, 264, 271
Error (at Editing Ladder Diagram), 243
Error (at Editing Step Sequence), 244
Error Detection and Handling, 307
Error Detection and Messages, 306
Error Message List, 237
Examples of Mnemonic Files (SingleFormat), 283
Examples of Operation, 106
Executing or Stopping a Program, 91
Exit, 46
[F]
nc
Compile, 221
Compile Options, 199
CONFIG.SYS, 26
Configuration and Installation of Package, 14
.c
Conversion from FAPT LADDER, 297
Conversion of a Mnemonic File to a Source Program,

226
Conversion of a Source Program to a Mnemonic File,
224
F : Symbol & Comment Editing, 247

Fatal Error, 238, 243, 249, 251, 256, 258
File, 43
File Configuration, 28
File System, 28
Function for Transferring Data between the PG and
PC, 302
Function Overview, 5
Functions Specific to Individual PMC Models, 281
Conversion of Sequence Program, 293

Conversion Using a Signal Address Converter, 299
[G]
Convert the PMC Type of Sequence Program, 298
Converting by System Parameter Editing, 298
G : Message Editing, 248
Converting ROM Format File, 220
[H]
[D]
H : Printout, 249
Handy File+3.5 Floppy Disk (MSDOS Format), 216
D : System Parameter Editing, 242

Data Conversion (Return Codes), 305
[I]
Data Start and End Codes, 305

Data Transfer Cables, 316
I : Compile, 251
Index
B62884EN/01
[O]
I/O Module Editing, 170

I/O Port Setting, 209
OffLine Function, 115
Input/Output, 101, 209
Online editing, 53
Inquiry Form, 318
OnLine Functions, 37
Installation, 18
OPEN CNC System Configurations, 5
Installing the Software to Invoke from the DOS Command Prompt, 22
Operating Environment, 15
Operation, 30, 203
om
Output Item Setting, 176

Outputting to Split Files, 208
[J]
Overview of Operation, 33
J : Decompilation, 256
r.c
Overview of the OnLine Functions, 37
[K]
[P]
Package Configuration, 17
K : Mnemonic Conversion, 258
ce
nt
e
Password, 207
Password Set Function, 200
[L]
PMC Alarm Status, 89

PMC Parameter, 76
L : Input/Output, 264
Ladder Debugging Function, 64
Ladder Diagram/Step Sequence Editing, 118
PMC Programming Method, 10

PMC Status Window, 90
Print Format1: SETUP Menu, 184
Ladder Monitor, 47
Print Format2 (AMOFTRP, DAT/* .INF/Message

File), 185
Link, 284
.c
Loading of Program, 101
nc
Ladder monitor, 47
[M]
Memory Card Interface in the Personal Computer and

Memory Card, 212
Menu Structure, 33
Message Editing, 169
Printout, 174
Program Backup, 103

Protocol, 304
[R]
Registering the Software in the Windows [Programs]
Menu, 18
Restoring PMC Parameter, 44
Mnemonic Editing, 224
Mnemonic File Format, 227

Modifying Program Option Initial Values (OPTION.CNF), 223
Monitoring a Ladder, 106
[S]
Sample Mnemonic Files (Allformat), 233
Sample Mnemonic Files (Singleformat), 229
Saving PMC Parameter, 43
MSDOS, 45
Selecting OffLine Function from OnLine Function,

45
[N]
N : OnLine Monitor, 271
Selecting OnLine Function from OffLine Function,

236
Sequence Program Creation, 8
Setting Program Options, 220
Index
B62884EN/01
Signal Analysis Function, 95
The Note if the Step Sequence Function is Selected

When Setting a Model, 234
Signal Status Window, 73

Signal Trace Function, 92
The Overview of Ladder Editing Package, 4
Signal Trigger Function, 61
Title Data Editing, 117
Standard Symbol Data, 308
Tool for Changing Message Data (CHGMES), 309
Start and Terminate, 197
Transfer from PG, 302
Starting and Ending Printing, 175
Transfer to and from PMC, 211
Starting the Ladder Editing Package, 31
Transmission and Receive Data, 305
om
Starting the OnLine Functions, 38

Storing to the Program, 102
[U]
Supported PMC Functions, 7
User Batch File Execution, 234
System Configuration File %%% FLSET. CNF, 291

System Parameter Editing , 172
Using Data in a Sequence Program for Another Program, 301
System Parameters, 282
Utility, 235
The Constitution of Source Program, 29
ce
nt
e
[T]
r.c
Symbol & Comment Editing, 165
nc
.c
w
w
Warning, 241, 250, 255, 257, 262, 270

Warning (at Editing Ladder Diagram), 246
The Major Functions, 4
[W]
Sep., 96
Date
01
evision
Revision Record
Contents
Revision
Date
r.c
ce
nt
e
nc
.c
Contents
om
FANUC OPEN CNC Ladder Editing Package OPERATORS MANUAL (B62884EN)
om
r.c
All specifications and designs

are subject to change without
notice.
.c
nc
No part of this manual may be

reproduced in any form.
ce
nt
e

GE Fanuc Open Ladder Editing

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Fanuc Open Ladder Editing

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GFZ-62884EN B-62884EN

Presented By: CNC Center

Warnings, Cautions, and Notes

Copyright 1996 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

THE MAJOR FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The Overview of Ladder Editing Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ABOUT PMC PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PMC Programming Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF PACKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Registering the Software in the Windows [Programs] Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIRECTORY CONFIGURATION AFTER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

STARTING THE LADDER EDITING PACKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

COMMON SYSTEM OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of the OnLine Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

C : I/O MODULE EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D : SYSTEM PARAMETER EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E : LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

F : SYMBOL & COMMENT EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL PMC MODELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

B. AUTOMATIC COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FILE %%% FLSET. CNF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

DIFFERENCES FROM FAPT LADDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONVERSION FROM FAPT LADDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONVERT THE PMC TYPE OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Converting by System Parameter Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Function for Transferring Data between the PG and PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E. STANDARD SYMBOL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

G. CAUTIONS FOR USING THE O/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

H. DATA TRANSFER CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

I. INQUIRY FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Thank you for purchasing Ladder Editing Package.

Ladder Editing Package is a programming system for developing

FANUC OPEN CNC Ladder

The development of a sequence program on a personal computer,

FAPT LADDER Operators Manual (B66131E)

FAPT LADDERII Operators Manual (B66184EN)

This manual explains procedures required to install, activate, and operate

The following abbreviations are used in this manual.

FANUC PMC-MODEL RA3

FANUC OPEN CNC

MS-DOS and PC-DOS are both referred to simply as DOS, unless it

Sequence program monitoring/debugging

PMC parameter setting/display

OPEN CNC System

Fig.1.2.1.1 Function Overview

A variety of OPEN CNC system configurations are described below.

[Program backup destination]

[Program backup destination]

1) Supported PMC models

Table 1.2.2 Functions Supported for Each PMC Model

Start control system development

Determine control targets (machine, CNC)

Determine interface specifications (DI/DO assignment)

Determine control operation specifications

Create sequence program (design, address map determination, coding)

Sequence program input, editing, debugging, and printing

Ladder diagram editing Mnemonic

Ladder diagram monitoring/editing

Sequence program printing

Fig.1.2.3 Sequence Program Creation

(1) What is the step sequence method ?

(2) The configuration of a sequence program